PROJECT MANUAL - ARC...worker paid less than the stipulated prevailing rates, with Certifiable Payroll, for any work done under the contract by him/her or by any subcontractor under

PROJECT MANUAL

SACRAMENTO CITY COLLEGE South Campus Utility Improvements

LOS RIOS COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT BID #16020

PREPARED BY:

LOS RIOS COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT 1919 Spanos Court, Sacramento, CA 95825

Phone (916) 568-3071 ~ Fax (916) 568-3145

(Issued 04/22/2016)

Bid# 16020 Sacramento City College South Campus Utility Improvements

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 0 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID FORM CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATION NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE DESIGNATION OF SUB-CONTRACTORS BID BOND CONTRACT PAYMENT BOND FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND ESCROW AGREEMENT WASTE REDUCTION AND RECYCLE PROGRAM CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE GENERAL CONDITIONS

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01 2100 - ALLOWANCES SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 01 2976 - PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 3113 - PROJECT COORDINATION SECTION 01 3119 - PROJECT MEETINGS SECTION 01 3216 - CONTRACT SCHEDULE SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 3500 - SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 4500 - QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01 5713 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 7123 - FIELD ENGINEERING SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

SECTION 22 1113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING DIVISION 23-HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HAVC) SECTION 23 0500 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. SECTION 23 0518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 23 0519 -METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING


ii

SECTION 23 0523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 0719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION SECTION 23 0900 - HVAC AUTOMATION SECTION 23 1123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 23 2116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS SECTION 23 5233 - WATER-TUBE BOILERS DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 0010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 26 0531 - CONDUIT SECTION 26 0543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND STRUCTURES DIVISION 31-EARTHWORK SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLITION SECTION 31 1100 - DEWATERING SECTION 31 2000 - EARTHWORK DIVISION 32-EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 32 1216 - ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 32 1313 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT DIVISION 33-UTILITIES SECTION 33 1216 - VALVES SECTION 33 6113 - UNDERGROUND HYDRONIC DISTRIBUTION PIPING DRAWINGS:

C1.0 TITLE SHEET C2.0 GENERAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS & STAGING AREA C3.0 SITE DEMOLITION PLAN C4.0 SITE PIPING PLAN C5.0 SURFACE REPAIR PLAN C6.0 PHASING PLAN C7.0 UTILITY CONFLICT PLAN C8.0 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS C9.0 EROSION CONTROL PLAN NOTES & DETAILS C10.0 EROSION CONTROL PLAN S-1 LRC UTILITY PLANT PLAN, ELEVATION AND SECTION M-1 MECHANICAL LEGEND, NOTES, AND SHEET INDEX M-2 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M-3 PARTIAL MECHANICAL SITE PLAN, GAS PIPING ISOMETRICS &

CALCULATIONS


iii

M-4A PARTIAL MECHANICAL PLANS AND SECTIONS DEMO AND NEW - LRC BOILER ROOM

M-4B PARTIAL MECH. PLANS & SECTIONS DEMO & NEW - LRC CHILLER RM. & EQUIP. YARD

M-5 PARTIAL MECH. PLANS (DEMO AND NEW), SECTIONS AND DETAILS - LRC MECH RM

M-6 PARTIAL MECHANICAL PLANS, SECTIONS AND DETAILS DEMO & NEW BUSINESS BLDG.

M-7 PARTIAL HEATING WATER DIAGRAMS DEMO & NEW - LRC BOILER RM & BUSINESS BLDG.

M-8 PARTIAL CHW PIPING DIAGRAMS - DEMO AND NEW - LRC CHILLER RM AND EQUIP. YARD

M-9 PARTIAL CHW PIPING DIAGRAMS - DEMO AND NEW - LRC BLDG. & BUSINESS BLDG.

M-10 MECHANICAL DETAILS M-11 MECHANICAL DETAILS M-12 MECHANICAL DETAILS M-13 MECHANICAL DETAILS M-14 PARTIAL CAMPUS CHW & HHW SYSTEM DIAGRAMS E-0 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS, ONE-LINE, DETAIL AND SHEET INDEX E-1 SCHEDULES E-2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E-3 FLOOR PLANS - ELECTRICAL E-4 FLOOR PLANS - ELECTRICAL E0-1 SYMBOLS LIST & DRAWING INDEX E0.2 DETAILS & TRENCH SECTIONS E4.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E4.1 TELECOM SITE PLAN

END OF SECTION.

South Campus Utility Improvements SCC Bid 16020

Page 1 of 39 REV: January 28, 2016

NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS

SCC South Campus Utility Improvements - BID #16020 Notice is hereby given that the Board of Trustees of the Los Rios Community College District (District) will receive sealed bids for a lump sum contract according to the specifications prepared for Los Rios Community College District and described in general as: SCC South Campus Utility Improvements- BID #16020. The work shall consist of, but not limited to installation of new boiler, boiler and chiller area modifications, installation of new hydronic, water, gas, electric and signal underground infastructure, and associated site modifications. The Contractor shall include in the bid all labor, tools, transportation, equipment, services, incidentals, taxes and materials for a complete and working project in conformance with the Contract Documents.

The estimated construction cost of this project is $3,325,000.00. The time allowed for completion

is 270 days from the Notice to Proceed.

Work to be performed under the Contract Documents requires a California State License Board Class A-General Engineering Contractor or Class B-General Building Contractor. Effective July 1, 2014, all contractors and subcontractors who intend to bid on or perform work on public works projects must register and pay a fee to the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 and provide evidence of registration for contract award. This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations. A pre-bid project conference is scheduled for Wednesday, May 11, 2016, 10:00AM. Attendance at the pre-bid conference is strongly recommended, as it may be the only opportunity for bidders to review the bidding documents with the Consultants and District. All interested parties should report to the Campus Police Department to obtain a temporary parking pass and directions to the job walk location, Sacramento City College, 3835 Freeport Blvd., Sacramento, CA 95822.

Bids must be received at the Los Rios Community College District Facilities Management Office

during the business hours of 8:00 AM through 4:30 PM, Monday through Friday, holidays excepted. US Mail Hand Delivered TO: LRCCD Board of Trustees TO: LRCCD Board of Trustees Attn: Purchasing Dept. Attn: Purchasing Dept. 3753 Bradview Drive 3753 Bradview Drive Sacramento, CA 95827 Sacramento, CA 95827 Bids will be accepted until Thursday, May 19, 2016, 2:00PM at which time bids will be opened

and read aloud at the address listed above in the Conference Room. No faxed bids will be accepted. Bids shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the bid number, project name, and the bidder’s name, license number & address clearly marked on the front of the envelope. For purposes of the bid opening, the time of day shall be as shown on the public clock located at the same office as listed above.

Each bidder must submit a bid to the District on the bid forms provided in the Contract

Documents. Said bid must be accompanied by one of the following: cash, cashier’s check, certified check, or original bid bond in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the lump sum bid, and made payable to the Los

Utility Improvements SCC Bid 16020


Rios Community College District. A surety, duly admitted to do business in the State of California by the California State Insurance Commissioner and rated no less than A-7 by AM Best, must issue bid bonds. A duly authorized principal of the bidder must sign said bid bond. The successful bidder must be able to bond 100% of the project cost and will be required to furnish payment and performance bonds with the executed Contract Documents.

Pursuant to section 1770, and following, of the California Labor Code, the Contractor shall pay

not less than the prevailing rate of per diem wages as determined by the Director of the California Department of Industrial Relations. Copies of such prevailing rate of per diem wages are on file at the General Services Office of the Los Rios Community College District, 1919 Spanos Court, Sacramento, CA 95825. Those copies shall be made available to any interested party upon request. Independent of any other liability that may attach or be assessed, the Contractor shall forfeit, as penalty to the Los Rios Community College District, Fifty Dollars ($50.00) for each calendar day or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the stipulated prevailing rates, with Certifiable Payroll, for any work done under the contract by him/her or by any subcontractor under him, in violation of the provisions of such Labor Code. Pursuant to section 22300 of the Public Contract Code, the Contractor may substitute a deposit of securities in lieu of the Los Rios Community College District withholding any moneys to ensure Contractor’s performance under the Contract, or alternatively, request that the Los Rios Community College District make payment of retentions earned directly to Banner Bank as the escrow agent at the expense of Contractor pursuant to the escrow instructions included herein. The provisions of Public Contract Code section 22300 are incorporated herein by reference as though set forth in full, and shall govern the substitution of securities and/or escrow account.

Bona fide California licensed contractor bidders may secure copies of the proposed Project

Manual/Specifications and Drawings from:

ARC Document Solutions 801 Broadway Sacramento, CA 95818 Phone: 916-443-1322 Fax: 916-325-2455

Web: www.e-arc.com/location/sacramento No partial sets will be issued. Call for applicable charges. All charges are Non-Refundable.

Drawings and specifications may be examined at the following plan rooms: Sacramento Builders’ Exchange Sacramento Builders’ Exchange 1331 T Street 151 N. Sunrise Ave., Suite 511 Sacramento, CA 95814-7107 Roseville, CA 95661 Phone: (916) 442-8991 Phone: (916) 782-4762 Placer County Builders’ Exchange El Dorado Builders’ Exchange 231 Cherry Avenue, Suite 101 3430 Robin Lane, Suite 7 Auburn, CA 95603 Cameron Park, CA 95682 Phone: (530) 889-3953 Phone: (530) 672-2955

All inquiries regarding this bid should be directed via phone (916) 568-3071 or fax (916) 568-3145 to Kim Carrillo, Senior Buyer/Contract Specialist, Los Rios Community College District.



The Los Rios Community College District and its Board of Trustees reserves the right to reject any or all bids received and/or waive any minor irregularity of a bid as the public good may require. All bids will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the day of the bid opening. Dated: 4/22/2016



INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

(1) All portions of the bid form must be completed before the bid is submitted. Failure to do so may result in the bid being rejected as non-responsive. Attached to and submitted with the bid form, bidder shall provide the completed Contractor Qualifications, Non-Collusion Declaration signed by bidder, Statement of Compliance, Designation of Subcontractors-Bid Form, and the appropriate bid security. Failure to submit all required documents may result in the bid being rejected as non-responsive.

(2) An original of the bid form shall be filled in and submitted as the bid. (3) Los Rios Community College District may have obtained one or more report(s) which are

identified as follows: n/a. The report(s) may contain facts that may materially affect bidders’ bids. In addition, District has constructed other public works projects throughout the District, and obtained reports and other information in the course of the design and construction of those other public works construction projects, all of which may contain facts that may materially affect bidders’ bids. Bidders are strongly encouraged to inspect all of District’s reports, records and documents referred to above.

(4) A pre-bid conference has been scheduled at the site of the work; all bidders, subcontractors,

material suppliers and others who may be working on the work of improvement are strongly encouraged to attend this pre-bid conference. Due to the facts and circumstances of this particular project, the pre-bid conference may be the only opportunity to conduct the pre-bid investigation of the site and satisfy the pre-bid obligations set forth in these Contract Documents. If a bidder (or others) attend the entirety of a scheduled pre-bid conference and need additional time to complete their investigation of the site, bidder must notify the District in writing, via certified or registered mail, no less than two days after the pre-bid conference, to request additional time. The written request must include an estimate of the amount of additional time required by bidder.

(5) Prior to submitting a bid proposal, each bidder shall examine carefully the site of the work and the Contract Documents, and shall satisfy itself as to the character, quality, and quantity of the surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered. The submission of a bid proposal shall be conclusive evidence that the bidder has satisfied itself through bidder’s own investigation as to the conditions to be encountered; the character, quality, and scope of work to be performed; the materials and equipment to be furnished; and all requirements of the Contract Documents. Where investigations of subsurface conditions have been made with respect to foundation or other structural design, and that information is made available to bidder or shown in the Contract Documents, said information represents only a statement as to the character of materials which have been actually encountered and is only made available or included for the convenience of bidders. Investigations of subsurface conditions are made for the purpose of design, and the District assumes no responsibility whatsoever with respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of borings, the log of test borings, or other investigations, or of the interpretation thereof, and there is no guaranty, either expressed or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing throughout the work, or any part of it, or that unanticipated conditions may not occur. When a log of test borings is made available to bidder or included in the Contract Documents, it is expressly understood and agreed that said log of test borings does not constitute a part of the Contract, and represents only an opinion of the District as to the character of the materials to be encountered, and is made available or included in the Contract Documents only for the convenience of the bidders. Making such information available to bidders is not to be construed in any way as a waiver of the requirement that bidders perform their own investigation, and bidders must satisfy themselves, through their own investigations, as to conditions to be encountered.

(6) Following the public opening of bids, the District may request that the apparent low bidder

complete the Contractor Qualification Questionnaire included in these Contract Documents and furnish



all required supporting documentation to enable the District to determine whether the apparent low bidder is qualified to perform the work described in the Contract Documents and/or is a responsible contractor. By submission of a bid, bidder agrees to complete the Contractor Qualification Questionnaire, furnish all required attachments, sign the Contractor Qualification Questionnaire, all in strict conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and Contractor Qualification Questionnaire, and return to the District’s Representative within ten days of District’s request. If bidder fails or refuses to complete the Contractor Qualification Questionnaire, furnish all required attachments, sign the Contractor Qualification Questionnaire, or return it to the District’s Representative within ten days of District’s request, bidder will not be considered for award of the contract, and further, bidder agrees that the Los Rios Community College District may award the work to another bidder, call for new bids, or such other action as the District deems appropriate. In such event, the bidder shall be liable to the Los Rios Community College District for the difference between the amount of the disqualified bid and the larger amount for which the District procures the work plus all of the District’s costs, damages, expenses and liabilities.

(7) If for any reason the District elects to not award the contract to the apparent low bidder, the

District may request in writing that the apparent second lowest bidder complete the Contractor Qualification Questionnaire and furnish all required supporting documentation to enable the District to determine whether the second low bidder is qualified to perform the work described in the Contract Documents. If for any reason the District elects to not award the contract to the apparent second lowest bidder, the District may request the third lowest bidder to complete the Contractor Qualification Questionnaire and furnish all required supporting documentation, and so on.

(8) If the District receives from a bidder within the time set forth in these Contract Documents, a

complete Contractor Qualification Questionnaire and all required supporting documentation as required by the Contract Documents, and if the District determines that a bidder is not qualified to perform the work required by the Contract Documents, and if the District elects to not award the Contract to that bidder, the District will promptly return that bidder’s bid security.

(9) All Bid protests shall be filed in writing with the Purchasing Department, Los Rios

Community College District, 1919 Spanos Court, Sacramento, California, 95825 by personal delivery or certified or registered mail, so that it is received by Los Rios Community College District, not later than five (5) working days after the bid opening or three (3) working days after bid submissions are made available to the public, whichever date is later.

(10) The Contractor agrees to complete all of its work required in the Contract Documents, or any

subsequent revisions or modifications thereto, within the time specified in the Bid Form, subject to Change Orders increasing or decreasing the time specified. If the Contractor fails to complete all its obligations within the time specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall pay to the District, as liquidated damages, the sum of $1,500.00 (One Thousand, Five Hundred Dollars) per day for each consecutive calendar day the work remains uncompleted for the first thirty (30) days beyond the time specified in the Contract for completion. After the first thirty (30) days beyond the time specified in the Contract Documents for completion, liquidated damages will remain increase to the sum of $3,000.00 (Three Thousand Dollars) per day for each calendar day that the work remains uncompleted.

(11) Bidder shall carefully review all plans and specifications, prior to submitting its bid, to determine if there are any discrepancies, inconsistencies, disagreements, errors or omissions therein. If any such discrepancies or apparent errors are found in the Contract Documents prior to the date of bid opening, bidders shall submit a written request for clarification to the District Purchasing Department, which response to said request will be given in the form of addenda to all bidders, if time permits. Otherwise, in figuring the work, bidders shall consider that any discrepancies or conflict between Contract Documents shall be governed by Article 8, Intent of Plans and Specifications, and Article 12,



Conformance with Codes and Standards, of the General Conditions. To the fullest extent permitted by Public Contract Code section 1104 and applicable law bidder/contractor hereby waives any claim and any damages therefor arising out of or connected in any way with any claimed or actual discrepancy, disagreement, inconsistency, error or omission in the plans and specification, of any nature whatsoever, which reasonably could have been discovered by a reasonably prudent bidder upon a careful examination prior to submission of its bid. The correction of any discrepancies in, or omissions from the drawings, specifications, or other Contract Documents, or any interpretation thereof, during the bidding period will be made only by a written addendum issued by the District. Any other interpretation or explanation of such documents will not be considered binding.

(12) The Contractor’s bid proposal shall be made on the form provided, with all items filled out, and properly signed. The bid proposal shall be signed in longhand, by the Contractor if an individual, by a member of the partnership, or by an officer of a corporation authorized to sign contracts in its behalf. If made by a corporation, the bid proposal shall show the name of the State under the laws of which the corporation is chartered or organized. Bidders are warned against making erasures or alterations of any kind on their bid proposal. Bid proposals which contain omissions, erasures, alterations, conditions, or additions not called for, may be rejected. The bid proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope having the bid number, name of the Project, as it appears on the bid proposal, and the name, license number and address of the bidder shown thereon.

(13) In accordance with California Public Contract Code, Chapter 4 (commencing with section 4100), Part 1, Division 2 (Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act), each bid proposal shall have listed on the form provided with the bid proposal: (a) the name, license number, DIR number, and location of the place of business of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the general contractor, in or about the construction of the work or improvement, or a subcontractor licensed by the State of California, who, under subcontract to the general contractor, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the general contractor’s total bid, and (b) the portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor. The Contractor shall list only one subcontractor for each such portion as defined by the Contractor in Contractor’s bid. For each subcontractor, Contractor shall verify the subcontractor has registered pursuant to Labor Code 1725.5. If Contractor fails to specify a subcontractor for any portion of the work to be performed under this Contract in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the total bid, Contractor agrees to perform that portion itself.

(14) A bid proposal may be withdrawn at any time prior to the hour fixed in the Notice to Contractors for the opening of bids by a written request of the bidder, filed with the District. The withdrawal of a bid will not prejudice the right of a bidder to file a new bid proposal within the time prescribed.

(15) Bid proposals will be opened and read publicly at the time and place indicated in the Notice to Contractors, or as soon thereafter as is reasonable. Bidders or their representatives and others interested are invited to be present. (16) The proposal must be accompanied by cash, a bid bond, certified check, or cashier’s check in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the amount bid. The bid’s bond must be on the form furnished by the District and signed in favor of the District, and the certified check or cashier’s check must be made payable to the Los Rios Community College District. The bidder shall pay to the District such sums from said cash, bond, certified check, or cashier’s check as necessary to reimburse the District for costs incurred for failure of the successful bidder to complete, sign and return in strict compliance with these Contract Documents, all documents required by these Contract Documents. The amount of



said cash, bond, certified check, or cashier’s check shall not be deemed to constitute a penalty or liquidated damages. The District shall not be precluded by such cash, bond, certified check, or cashier’s check from recovering from the defaulting bidder damages in excess of the amount of said cash, bond, certified check, or cashier’s check incurred as a result of the failure of the successful bidder to complete, sign and return in strict compliance with these Contract Documents, all documents required by these Contract Documents. (17) After the bid proposals have been opened and read, they will be checked for accuracy and compliance with these Contract Documents. Bid prices shall include everything necessary for the completion of construction and fulfillment of the Contract, including, but not limited to, furnishing all materials, equipment, tools, excavation, sheeting, bracing and supports, plant labor and services, except as may be provided otherwise in the Contract Documents. When a price is quoted in both words and figures, the words shall prevail in case of a discrepancy. Bid prices shall include allowance for all taxes, including, but not limited to, all federal, state, and local taxes. The District expressly reserves the right to reject any and all bid proposals; to waive any minor irregularity in a bid; and to accept one schedule of a bid proposal and reject another. (18) The bidder shall be licensed under the provisions of Chapter 9, Division 3, of the Business and Professions Code of the State of California to do the type of work contemplated in the Project, and shall be skilled and regularly engaged in the general class or type of work called for under this contract. All contractors and subcontractors must be registered and qualified to perform public work pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5.

(19) More than one bid proposal from any individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or association, under the same or different names, will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any bidder is interested in more than one bid proposal for the work will cause the rejection of all bid proposals in which such bidder is interested. If there is reason to believe that collusion exists among the bidders, none of the participants in such collusion will be considered. Any bid proposal in which the prices obviously are unbalanced may be rejected.

(20) Attention is directed to the provisions of Public Contract Code section 5100, and following, concerning relief of bidders, and in particular to the requirement therein that if the bidder claims a mistake was made in Contractor’s bid, the bidder shall give the District written notice within five (5) days after opening of the bids of the alleged mistake, specifying in the notice in detail how the mistake occurred. (21) Award of the Contract, if awarded at all, will be to the lowest responsive responsible bidder whose bid proposal complies with the specified requirements. The award, if it be awarded, will be made by the District within ninety (90) days after opening of the bid proposals. The low bid will be determined by adding the sum of the base bid and all alternates (if any). The District reserves the right to include in the Contract, if a Contract is awarded, the base bid only, or the base bid plus any alternate bid or combinations of alternates bid. (22) When the award of the contract has been made, the bid proposal guarantees accompanying the three lowest bids shall be retained. All other guarantees for bids not to be further considered in making the award will be returned. The retained guarantees will be returned when the Contract has been fully signed. (23) A Contract shall be signed by the successful bidder in quadruplicate on the form provided and returned, together with the contract bonds and Certificates of Insurance, within ten (10) days after receipt of the forms. After signing by the District, one copy will be delivered to the Architect, and one copy shall be returned to the Contractor. If the bidder to whom the award is made fails or refuses to enter



into the Contract within ten (10) calendar days from the time the Contract forms are first received by the Contractor, Section 16, shall be triggered and these Instructions to Bidders shall apply. The District may then award the Contract to the second lowest responsive responsible bidder. This will be done after the failure or refusal of the low bidder to enter into the Contract, as is convenient for the District. If the second lowest responsive responsible bidder fails or refuses to enter into the Contract, then Section 16 of these Instructions to Bidders shall apply to that Contractor. The District may then award the Contract to the third lowest responsive responsible bidder and so on.

(24) Contractor shall, before beginning the work, provide District and Architect with a list of all

subcontractors and material suppliers that Contractor intends to use on or about the work whose contribution is in excess of five (5) percent of the total bid, including for each listed subcontractor or supplier, the amount of the subcontract, the subcontractor or material supplier’s address, telephone number, facsimile number, its contractor’s license number and DIR number (where applicable).

APPRENTICESHIP CLAUSE: If box is checked, the following also applies:

In order to ensure enhanced job safety and the quality of work by properly trained certified

electrical contractors, a minimum of fifty percent (50%) of all journeyman electricians utilized by Contractor shall be graduates of a State of California Approved Apprenticeship Program. A minimum of fifteen percent (15%) of the jobsite electricians utilized by the Contractor shall be OSHA 10-hour General Industry Safety & Health Certified. Further, Contractor shall use at least one jobsite electrician who shall be OSHA 30-hour General Industry Safety and Health Certified.



BID FORM

FOR: SCC South Campus Utility Improvements Bid # 16020 SUBMIT BID TO:

If US Mail If Hand-Delivered TO: LRCCD Board of Trustees TO: LRCCD Board of Trustees

Attn: Purchasing Dept. Attn: Purchasing Dept. 3753 Bradview Drive 3753 Bradview Drive Sacramento, CA 95827 Sacramento, CA 95827 LOCATION OF BID OPENING:

Los Rios Community College District Facilities Management Purchasing Department 3753 Bradview Drive Sacramento, CA 95827

BID FROM: (Name of firm submitting Bid Proposal) (Address) (City, State, Zip Code) (Telephone) (Fax) DATE BID SUBMITTED: NOTE: 1) All portions of the bid form must be completed before the bid is submitted. Failure to do so may result in the bid being rejected as non-responsive. Attached to and submitted with this bid form, bidder must provide the completed Contractor Qualifications, Non-Collusion Declaration signed by bidder, Statement of Compliance, Designation of Subcontractors-Bid Form, the appropriate bid security and any other documents required by the Contract Documents. Failure to submit all required documents may result in the bid being rejected as non-responsive. 2) The bidder agrees that each addendum received and acknowledged herein shall become a part of and included in this bid proposal. The bidder agrees the bid proposal includes the following addenda (SEPARATELY LIST EACH ADDENDUM RECEIVED): Addendum No. ____ Dated __________ Addendum No.____ Dated__________

Addendum No. ____ Dated __________ Addendum No.____ Dated__________ Addendum No. ____ Dated __________ Addendum No.____ Dated__________

The bidder agrees to perform the Base Bid work for the lump sum of:



Dollars $________________ (Specify total dollar amount in words printed or typed) (In figures) TOTAL BID _________________________________________Dollars $____________________ Total bid amount shall include the base bid amounts and the sum of all alternates The lowest responsive bid shall be determined based on the sum of the base bids, all additive and all deductive alternates. 3) There is herewith enclosed cash, a bid bond for the benefit of, or a certified check or cashier’s check for ten percent (10%) of the amount of the bid submitted, made payable to Los Rios Community College District in the amount of: Dollars $________________ (Specify total dollar amount in words printed or typed) (In figures)

4) The bidder, having the appropriate active license required by the State of California; and

having carefully read and examined the plans, specifications, and all related bidding documents as prepared by the Los Rios Community College District for the project described as: SCC South Campus Utility Improvements- BID # 16020 having performed a full and complete examination of the site of the proposed work and all information available to bidder, and being familiar with all the conditions related to the proposed work, including the availability of materials, equipment, and labor, hereby offers to furnish all labor, materials, tools, transportation, services, equipment and taxes necessary to complete the work of the described project in accordance with the Contract Documents, and to complete all requirements of the Contract Documents for the sums quoted in this Bid Form. The bidder agrees that it will not withdraw its bid within ninety (90) days after the bid deadline. If the bidder is selected as the apparent lowest responsive responsible bidder, the bidder agrees, within ten (10) days after receipt of notice of selection, to sign and deliver the Contract, and to furnish the Performance Bond, the Payment Bond, Certificates of Insurance, and other required items.

5) The bidder agrees that if the bidder is selected as the apparent lowest responsive responsible

bidder, and the bidder fails to sign the Contract and furnish the Performance Bond, the Payment Bond, Certificates of Insurance, or any other required items in proper form and in proper amounts within the time limit specified in the Contract Documents, the Los Rios Community College District may award the work to another bidder or call for new bids. In such event, the bidder shall be liable to the Los Rios Community College District for the difference between the amount of the disqualified bid and the larger amount for which the District procures the work plus all of the District’s costs, damages, expenses and liabilities arising from bidder’s failure to sign the Contract and/or furnish the required documents.

6) The bidder, if awarded the Contract, agrees to complete all work required by these Contract

Documents, in strict compliance with these Contract Documents, within the prescribed calendar days from the start date specified in the Notice to Proceed.

BIDDER’S FIRM: Bidder is a: (circle one) Corporation Partnership Individual Joint Venture



Other: ___________________________ (Specify)

Names and Titles of Key Members of Firm:

(Name of person signing the bid on behalf of the bidder and all general partners, if a partnership, must be included.)

Name of President if a Corporation: ________________________________________________ (Print or Type Name) Name of Secretary if a Corporation: ________________________________________________ (Print or Type Name) Corporation is organized under the laws of the State of: _________________________________________________

DIR Number: _________________________________________________ California Contractors License(s): _________________________________________________

Name of License(s): ____________________ ____________________ _________________ Classification(s) Number Expiration Date (For Joint Ventures, list Joint Venture’s license or licenses for all Joint Venture partners.) By submission of this bid, bidder certifies: I am aware of the provisions of section 3700 of the Labor Code which requires every employer to

be insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the award of this Contract.

Corporate Seal:



Name of Bidder’s Firm: Address: ___________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ By: ______________________________________________________________________ (Signature) ______________________________________________________________________ (Print Name) ______________________________________________________________________ (Title) By: ______________________________________________________________________ (Signature) ______________________________________________________________________ (Print Name) ______________________________________________________________________ (Title)

(If signature is by other than the sole proprietor, general partner, or corporate officers, attach an original Power of Attorney.)

The Los Rios Community College District and its Board of Trustees reserves the right to reject any or all bids received and/or waive any minor irregularity of a bid as the public good may require.



CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS This form must be completed, signed by bidder, and submitted to Los Rios Community College District along with bidder’s bid. Failure to complete, sign and submit with bidder’s bid may result in bidder’s bid being rejected as not responsive. Los Rios Community College District has determined that bidders must meet the following minimum qualifications to bid the work of improvement contemplated herein:

1. Have possessed a valid, active and in good standing with the State Contractor’s License Board, Class A-General Engineering Contractor or Class B-General Building Contractor for a minimum of 5 years.

2. Have completed to the owner’s satisfaction, no less than 3 projects as a California licensed

contractor performing construction work of the type required under this bid, 2 of which must have an original contract price of no less than $2,826,250.00 within the past five years prior to the date of bid opening

3. Currently (as of the date of bid opening) or within the preceding three years, not have any

adverse final disciplinary actions by the Contractor’s State License Board, suspensions, disbarments, or similar proceedings (including stipulated agreements), restricting, limiting or prohibiting bidder from bidding or performing other contracts for any other public agency.

4. Currently (as of the date of bid opening), have registered and paid the fee to the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5.

I, being the ________________________________ (insert title, must be an officer of bidder) of bidder herein, declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California, that bidder meets all of the minimum criteria set forth above. Signature Print Name Title Date



NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION

“NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID”

In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 7106, the bidder shall include with its bid the following declaration signed under penalty of perjury: “The undersigned declares: I am the [TITLE] of [BIDDER], the party making the foregoing bid. The bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation. The bid is genuine and not collusive or sham. The bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid. The bidder has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or to refrain from bidding. The bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder. All statements contained in the bid are true. The bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof, to effectuate a collusive or sham bid, and has not paid, and will not pay, any person or entity for such purpose. Any person executing this declaration on behalf of a bidder that is a corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited liability company, limited liability partnership, or any other entity, hereby represents that he or she has full power to execute, and does execute, this declaration on behalf of the bidder. I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct and that this declaration is executed on _____________________ [DATE], at ____________________ [CITY], ___________________________ [STATE].”

Bidder’s Signature: Bidder’s Name and Title (Print): Date:



STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE

(Company Name)

(hereinafter referred to as "prospective Contractor") hereby certifies, unless specifically exempted, compliance with Government Code section 12990 and California Administrative Code, Title II, Division 4, Chapter 5, in matters relating to the development, implementation, and maintenance of a nondiscrimination program. Prospective Contractor agrees not to unlawfully discriminate against any employee or applicants for employment because of race, religion, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition, genetic information, marital status, sex, gender, gender identify, gender expression, age (over 40), sexual orientation, or military or veteran status.

(Name of Official)

hereby swear that I am duly authorized to legally bind the prospective Contractor to the above-described certification. I am fully aware that this certification, signed on _________________________[DATE] in the County of ______________________________[COUNTY], is made under the penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California. ___________________________________________ (Signature) ___________________________________________ (Print Title) (Name of person signing the bid on behalf of the bidder and all general partners, if a partnership, must be included.)



NAME OF CONTRACTOR:

DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS - BID FORM

In compliance with the provisions of section 4100 through 4114, inclusive, of the Public Contract Code, and any amendments thereto, each bidder shall set forth in his or her bid, the name and location of the place of business of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the prime contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement, or a subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the prime contractor, specifically fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor’s total bid and the portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor under this act. The prime contractor shall list only one subcontractor for each portion as is defined by the prime contractor in his or her bid. Where no subcontractor is listed for any portion of the work listed, the prime contractor represents that he/she is competent, experienced, licensed and equipped to do that portion of the work and that it will not be subcontracted. Contractor shall verify that each subcontractor has registered and paid a fee to the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5.*

PORTION OF WORK NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR

DIR REG. VERIFIED* (YES/NO)

LICENSE NUMBER

BUSINESS LOCATION



NAME OF CONTRACTOR:

PORTION OF WORK NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR

DIR REG. VERIFIED* (YES/NO)

LICENSE NUMBER

BUSINESS LOCATION



BID BOND

Know all persons by these presents: That we, , as Principal, and , as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto Los Rios Community College District, hereinafter called District, the sum of ten percent (10%) of the total bid amount of Principal for payment of which in lawful money of the United States, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of the above obligation is such that, whereas, the Principal has submitted a bid for the work described as follows: SCC South Campus Utility Improvements - BID # 16020.

Now, therefore, if Principal shall not withdraw said bid within the time period specified after the bid date, as defined in the bidding documents, or within ninety (90) days after the bid date if no time period is specified, and, if selected as the apparent lowest responsive responsible bidder, Principal shall, within the time period specified in the bidding documents: Enter into a written agreement, in the form prescribed in the bidding documents, in accordance with its bid; file with the District all bonds required to be filed, including but not limited to faithful performance and payments bonds; and, furnish certificates of insurance and all other items required by the bidding documents.

In the event of the withdrawal of said bid within the time period specified, or within ninety (90)

days if no time period is specified, or the failure of Principal to enter into such agreement and furnish such bonds, certificates of insurance, and all other items as required by the bidding documents, if Principal shall pay to the District an amount to the difference, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the District procures the work covered by the bid, if the latter is in excess of the former, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

In the event suit is brought upon this bond by District, in addition to the penal sum of this Bid

Bond, Surety shall pay reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs incurred by District in such suit. Surety hereby expressly waives the provisions of California Civil Code section 2845. In witness whereof, we have hereunto set our hands this day of , 20 . Principal: Surety:

(Name of firm) (Name of firm) By: By: Title: Title:

Broker Name or Agent Name:

License Number:

Bond or company appointment must be listed with the CA Department of Insurance

Notary acknowledgments for Surety and Surety’s Power of Attorney must be attached. Address for Notices:



CONTRACT

SCC South Campus Utility Improvements - BID # 16020 THIS CONTRACT, made and entered into this day of , 20 between Los Rios Community College District, a political subdivision of the State of California, hereinafter referred to as District, and , hereinafter referred to as Contractor;

WITNESSETH: WHEREAS, the Board of Trustees of said District heretofore caused plans and specifications for the work hereinafter mentioned to be prepared, and thereafter did approve and adopt said plans and specifications; and, WHEREAS, the Board of Trustees of said District did cause to be noticed for the time and in the manner required by law a Notice inviting sealed bids for the performance of said work; and, WHEREAS, Contractor, in response to such Notice, submitted to the Board of Trustees of said District within the time specified in said Notice, and in the manner provided for therein, a sealed bid for the performance of the work specified in said plans and specifications, which said bid proposal, and the other bid proposals submitted in response to said Notice, the Board of Trustees of said District publicly opened and canvassed in the manner provided by law; and, WHEREAS, Contractor was the lowest responsive responsible bidder for the performance of said work, and said Board of Trustees of said District, as a result of the canvass of said bids, did determine and declare Contractor to be the lowest responsive responsible bidder for the work and award to him/her a contract therefore. NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the above, it is mutually agreed between the parties hereto as follows, to wit:

SCOPE OF WORK:

The work shall consist of, but not limited to installation of new boiler, boiler and chiller area modifications, installation of new hydronic, water, gas, electric and signal underground infastructure, and associated site modifications. TERMS AND CONDITIONS

This Contract, and the Contract Documents, consist of the Contract Documents identified in the

General Conditions, Article 2, all of which are incorporated herein by reference as though set forth in full, and all of which are part of this Contract, and Contractor and District agree to comply with and fulfill all obligations, promises, covenants and conditions imposed upon each of them in the Contract Documents. All of said work done under this Contract shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Board of Trustees of said District, or its representative, who shall have the right to reject any and all materials and supplies furnished by Contractor which do not strictly comply with said plans and specifications, together with the right to require Contractor to replace any and all work furnished by Contractor which shall not either in Workmanship or material be in strict accordance with said plans and specifications.



Upon condition the Contractor faithfully performs its obligations herein, District agrees to authorize and make payment to Contractor (subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents) the sum of:

Dollars $________________ (Specify total dollar amount in words printed or typed) (In figures)

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, District and Contractor have caused this Agreement to be signed as of the day and year first above written.

DISTRICT: Los Rios Community College District By the Board of Trustees By:

Date: CONTRACTOR: By:

(Signature of Authorized Agent) Date:

(If signature is by other than the sole proprietor, general partner, or corporate officers, attach an original Power of Attorney.)



Bond Number: _____________ Premium: ________________

PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT WHEREAS, the Los Rios Community College District, State of California, hereinafter designated as the "Obligee," has on [DATE], awarded to [CONTRACTOR] hereinafter designated as "Principal," a contract for:

SCC South Campus Utility Improvements - BID # 16020

WHEREAS, said Principal is required to furnish a bond in connection and with said contract, providing that if said Principal, or any of his/her or its subcontractors, shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, or other supplies used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or for any work or labor done thereon of any kind, the Surety on this bond will pay the same to the extent hereinafter set forth: NOW, THEREFORE, We, the Principal, and ___________________________________ as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the Obligee in the penal sum of: ______________________________________________________ Dollars ($________________) lawful money of the United States for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if said Principal, or any of his/her or its subcontractors, shall fail to pay any of the persons named in section 9100 of the Civil Code of the State of California, or any amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such work or labor performed under the contract, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department of the State of California, from the wages of employees of the Principal and subcontractors pursuant to section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code of the State of California with respect to such work or labor, as required by the provisions of section 8150 and following of the Civil Code of the State of California, then said Surety will pay the same in, or to an amount not exceeding the amount, herein above set forth, and also will pay, in case suit is brought upon this bond, reasonable attorneys’ fees to such claimant and to the Obligee to be fixed by the Court. This bond is issued pursuant to Civil Code sections 9550 through 9566, inclusive, of the State of California, and shall inure to the benefit of any and all persons, companies, and corporations named in section 9100 of said Civil Code so as to give a right of action to them or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond. The said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying the same shall, in any way, affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work or to the specifications. Said Surety hereby waives the provisions of sections 2819 and 2845 of the Civil Code of the State of California. If the contract amount increases by issuance of change order(s), the amount specified in this bond shall increase by the same amount.



IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bounden parties have signed this instrument under their seals this _____ day of _________________, 20___, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed, and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representatives, pursuant to authority of its governing body. (SEAL) Principal Signature for Principal Title of Signatory (SEAL) Surety Signature of Surety Title of Signatory Broker Name or Agent Name

License Number Bond or company appointment must be listed with the CA Department of Insurance

The signature of the Attorney-In-Fact for the Surety must be acknowledged by a Notary Public. These bonds must be accompanied by a current Power of Attorney appointing such Attorney.



Bond Number: _____________ Premium: ________________

FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT WHEREAS, the Los Rios Community College District, State of California, hereinafter designated as the "Obligee," has on [DATE], awarded to [CONTRACTOR] hereinafter designated as "Principal," a contract for:

SCC South Campus Utility Improvements- BID # 16020

WHEREAS said Principal is required, under the terms of the Contract, to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of said Contract: NOW, THEREFORE, We, the Principal, and ___________________________________ as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the Obligee in the penal sum of ____________________________________________________Dollars ($___________________) lawful money of the United States for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that, if the above bounden Principal, his/her or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns shall in all things stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and faithfully perform the covenants, conditions, and agreement in the said Contract and contract documents, the terms of which are incorporated herein by this reference as if set forth in full and any alterations made as therein provided, on his, its or their part to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Obligee, its officers and agents as therein stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect, and Surety, in the event suit is brought on this bond, will pay to the Obligee such reasonable attorneys’ fees to be fixed by the Court, in addition to the penal sum. As a condition precedent to the satisfactory completion of the said Contract, the above obligations shall remain in full force and effect for the maximum period of time allowed by applicable law (including any and all applicable statutes of limitation or repose), and commensurate with the obligations owed by the Principal to the Obligee, both before and after the completion and acceptance of the said work; during which time if the above bounden Principal, his/her or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns shall fail to complete said work or make full, complete, and satisfactory repair and replacements or totally protect the Obligee from any loss or damage made evident during said period and resulting from or caused by defective materials or faulty workmanship in the prosecution of the work done, the Surety shall well and truly keep and faithfully perform the covenants, conditions, and agreement in the said Contract and contract documents, and as required under any and all applicable laws. The obligation of the Surety hereunder shall continue in full force and effect for so long as any obligation of the Principal remains in accordance with the Contract and under any applicable law. The said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the



specifications accompanying the same, shall, in any way, affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work or to the specifications. Said Surety hereby waives the provisions of section 2819 and 2845 of the Civil Code of the State of California. If the contract amount increases by the issuance of change order(s), the penal sum specified in this bond shall increase by the same amount. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounden parties have signed this instrument under their seals this _______________ day of ______________, 20___, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed, and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body. (SEAL) Principal Signature for Principal Title of Signatory (SEAL) Surety Signature of Surety Title of Signatory Broker Name or Agent Name

License Number Bond or company appointment must be listed with the CA Department of Insurance The signature of the Attorney-In-Fact for the Surety must be acknowledged by a Notary Public, and this bond must be accomplished by a current Power of Attorney appointing such Attorney-In-Fact.



ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION

THIS ESCROW AGREEMENT made this day of , 20 , is entered into by and between Los Rios Community College District 1919 Spanos Court Sacramento, CA 95825 hereinafter called “District” and

hereinafter called “Contractor” and Banner Bank 1750 Howe Avenue, Suite 100 Sacramento, CA 95825 (916) 648-2785 hereinafter called “Escrow Agent”. For the consideration hereinafter set forth, the District, Contractor, and Banner Bank agree as follows: (1) Pursuant to section 22300 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, Contractor has the option to deposit securities with the Banner Bank as a substitute for retention earnings required to be withheld by District pursuant to the Construction Contract entered into between the District and Contractor for the SCC South Campus Utility Improvements - BID # 16020 in the amount of Dollars ($ ) dated _____________________________ (hereinafter referred to as the "Contract"). Alternatively, on written request of the Contractor, the District shall make payments of the retention earning directly to Banner Bank. When Contractor deposits the securities as a substitute for Contract earnings, Banner Bank shall notify the District in the form of Exhibit ‘A’ within ten days of the deposit. The market value of the securities at the time of the substitution shall be at least equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of the Contract between the District and Contractor. Securities shall be held in the name of Los Rios Community College District, and shall designate the Contractor as the beneficial owner. (2) The District shall make progress payments to the Contractor for such funds which



otherwise would be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions, provided that Banner Bank holds securities in the form and amount specified above. (3) When the District makes payment of retentions earned directly to Banner Bank, Banner Bank shall hold them for the benefit of the Contractor until the time that the escrow created under this contract is terminated. The Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities. All terms and conditions of this agreement and the right and responsibilities of the parties shall be equally applicable and binding when the District pays Banner Bank directly. (4) Contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by Banner Bank in administering the escrow account and all expenses of the District. These expenses and payment terms shall be determined by the District, Contractor and Banner Bank. (5) The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to withdrawal by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to the District. (6) Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the Escrow Account only by written notice to Banner Bank accompanied by written authorization from District to Banner Bank that District consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor. (7) The District shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the Contractor. Upon seven days’ written notice in the form of "Exhibit C" to Banner Bank from the District of the default, Banner Bank shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as instructed by the District. (8) Upon receipt of written notification from the District in the form of Exhibit ‘B’ certifying that the Contract is final and complete, and that the Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the Contract, Banner Bank shall release to Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less escrow fees and charges of the Escrow Account. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon disbursement of all monies and securities on deposit and payments of fees and charges. (9) Banner Bank shall rely on the written notifications from the District and the Contractor pursuant to sections (5) to (8), inclusive, of this agreement and the District and Contractor shall hold Banner Bank harmless from Banner Bank’s release and disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth above. (10) The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notice or to receive written notice on behalf of the District and on behalf of Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows:



On behalf of District: On behalf of Contractor: Title Title Name Name Signature Signature Address Address Address Address On behalf of Banner Bank: Escrow No. Title Name Signature Address Phone Number Escrow Account Number At the time the Escrow Account is opened, the District and Contractor shall deliver to Banner Bank a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement.



IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on the date first set forth above. District Contractor Title Title Name Name Signature Signature



ESCROW AGREEMENT EXHIBIT A

CERTIFICATION OF DEPOSIT OF SECURITIES Banner Bank as Escrow Agent in that certain Escrow Agreement for Deposit of Securities in Lieu of Cash Retention on Public Works Project between the Los Rios Community College District, a political subdivision of the State of California (referred to as District) and ______________________________________________________________, (referred to as Contractor) and Banner Bank (referred to as Escrow Agent), dated __________________________, hereby certifies to the District that the said Escrow Agent has received from the specified Contractor, securities eligible for investment under section 22300 of the Public Contract Code having a value of not less than Dollars ($___________________) The said Escrow Agent agrees to hold said Contractor securities until such time as the said Escrow Agent has received notification from the District that the construction contract has been accepted and the Escrow Agent is authorized to release the securities. The Escrow Agent further certifies that upon written demand by the District, the Escrow Agent shall cause sufficient securities to be sold from those so deposited by the said Contractor and shall pay to the District the amount specified in the demand, provided such demand does not exceed the amount specified as the minimum value of the securities herein. Date: ______________________, at _____________________________________________, California Banner Bank By:



ESCROW AGREEMENT EXHIBIT B

To: Escrow Agent Re: AUTHORIZATION TO RELEASE SECURITIES DEPOSITED BY CONTRACTOR You, as Escrow Agent in that certain Agreement for Deposit of Securities in Lieu of Cash Retention on Public Works Project between the Los Rios Community College District, a political subdivision of the State of California (referred to as District) and __________________________________________________________ (referred to as Contractor), and Banner Bank (referred to as Escrow Agent) dated are hereby authorized to release to the aforesaid escrow agreement, except that you shall be required to retain as security and pursuant to the terms of the said escrow agreement securities having a value of not less than Dollars ($____________________), until such time as you may be further notified by the District as to further release or as to sale. Dated: Los Rios Community College District a political subdivision of the State of California By: Vice Chancellor, Finance and Administration



ESCROW AGREEMENT EXHIBIT C

NOTIFICATION OF FAILURE OF PERFORMANCE DEMAND FOR SALE OF SECURITIES AND DEMAND FOR PAYMENT You, as Escrow Agent in that certain Escrow Agreement for Deposit of Securities in Lieu of Cash Retention on Public Works Project between the Los Rios Community College District, a political subdivision of the State of California (referred to as District) and ___________________________________________________________ (referred to as Contractor), and Banner Bank (referred to as Escrow Agent) dated________________ are hereby notified that the said Contractor has failed to perform all or part of that certain construction contract described in the said escrow agreement after having been given written notice of lack of performance. You are hereby directed to cause to be sold securities deposited by the said Contractor with you and in accordance with the escrow agreement, said securities having a minimum value of ____________________________________ Dollars ($_________________), and to deliver forthwith to the District the sum of ______________________________________________ Dollars ($________________). Any remaining securities deposited pursuant to the terms of the said escrow agreement shall be retained by you pursuant to further written notice by the District. Dated: Los Rios Community College District a political subdivision of the State of California By: Vice Chancellor, Finance and Administration



ESCROW AGREEMENT EXHIBIT D

PROJECT NAME: South Campus Utility Improvements CONTRACTOR: PROJECT NUMBER: 16020 APPLICATION NUMBER: CERTIFICATION OF CURRENT MARKET VALUE OF SECURITIES IN ESCROW IN LIEU OF RETENTION As of ______________________________________________, 20___ (not earlier than five (5) days prior to the date of the Application for Payment of which this certification is a part), the aggregate market value of securities on deposit in Escrow Account No. [ACCOUNT NUMBER] with Banner Bank (Escrow Agent) is ____________________________________________ Dollars ($___________________). Banner Bank (Escrow Agent) (Contractor) By: By: (Name) (Name) (Title) (Title) (Date) (Date) Note: Notary acknowledgment for Contractor and Escrow Agent must be attached.



Los Rios Community College District Board Policy Waste Reduction and Recycle Program, P-8370

Adherence to the District’s Waste Reduction and Recycle Program will be required of vendors doing business with Los Rios Community College District. Specific reporting parameters developed will be provided to vendors in order to comply with this policy. Each campus is mandated by the state to report all waste leaving the facility to include construction waste (remodels and new construction). In order to track this, the campus contact will need weight tickets showing where the waste went and the tonnage of the material. Weight tickets will need to be given to the construction manager on the job. The construction manager turns in all tickets to the campus contact for reporting to the California Integrated Waste Management Board (CIWMB). This work shall consist of reporting disposal and recycling of construction solid waste. For the purposes of this section, solid waste includes demolition and construction wastes, but not hazardous waste.

SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL AND RECYCLING REPORT On the last working day of each month the Contractor shall complete and submit to the Project Manager, “Solid Waste Disposal and Recycling Report,” form quantifying solid waste generated by the work performed and disposed of in Landfills or recycled. The amount and type of solid waste disposed of or recycled shall be reported in either tonnage or cubic meters.

Full compensation for preparing and submitting the “Solid Waste Disposal and Recycling Report,” form shall be considered as included in the contract price for the various items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. If you are looking for facilities that collect specific types of construction and demolition debris for reuse or recycling, there is a database available through The California Integrated Waste Management Board. Go to: http://www.ciwmb.ca.gov/ConDemo/Recyclers

http://www.ciwmb.ca.gov/ConDemo/Recyclers



SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL AND RECYCLING REPORT INSTRUCTIONS

FIELD INSTRUCTIONS

Project Name Description of the project

Type of Work General work description (Example: demolition, AC grinding)

Bid Number District – Assigned Project Bid Number

Reporting Period (Month and Year): From and To

Start and end dates of the reporting quarter

Contractor Name Contractor’s full name

Street Address, City, State, Zip Contractor’s street address, including city, state and zip code

Phone and Fax Contractor’s telephone and fax number

Preparer’s Signature Signature of the person who completed the report

Date Completed Date the form was completed

Name and Location of Recycling or Disposal Facility

Full name and address of recycling or disposal facility

Type of Material Enter one of the following code letters: A = Asphalt C = Concrete M = Metal D = Mixed Debris W = Wood or cleared vegetation O = Other (please describe)

Type of Activity Enter one of the following activity numbers: 1 = Source-Separated Materials Recycling 2 = On-Site Reuse 3 = Mixed Debris Recycling 4 = Reuse of Salvageable Items 5 = Disposal at Landfill or Transfer Station 6 = Other (please describe)

Amount of Material taken to Landfills Include all material disposed of that has not been recycled, reused, etc. Quantity shall be reported in tonne or cubic meters.

Amount of Material Diverted from Landfills

Quantity shall be reported in tonne or cubic meters. If scales are available, report tonne. Attach legible copies of weight tickets, receipts or invoices that specifically identify the construction and demolition waste.



SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL AND RECYCLING REPORT Project Name: ______________________________________________ Bid Number: _______________________ Type of Work: _________________________________________________________________________________ Reporting Period (Month and Year): From ______________________________To___________________________

Contractor Name: _____________________________________________________________________________ Street Address: _______________________________________________________________________________ City, State, Zip: _______________________________________________________________________________ Phone: ________________________________________ Fax: ________________________________________ Preparer’s Signature: ____________________________ Date Completed: _______________________________

NAME AND

LOCATION OF RECYCLING

OR DISPOSAL FACILITY

TYPE OF MATERIAL (Enter code letter as

follows:

A = Asphalt C = Concrete M = Metal D = Mixed Debris W = Wood/cleared

Vegetation O = Other [please describe])

TYPE OF ACTIVITY

(Enter number as follows:

1 = Source-Separated Materials Recycling

2 = On-Site Reuse 3 = Mixed Debris Recycling 4 = Reuse of

salvageable items 5 = Disposal at

Landfill or Transfer Station

6 = Other [please describe])

AMOUNT OF MATERIAL TAKEN TO LANDFILLS

(in tonnage or cubic

meters)

AMOUNT OF

MATERIAL DIVERTED FROM LANDFILLS

(in tonnage or cubic

meters)

Note: According to the California Integrated Waste Management Board guidelines, rock and

soil are not recycling materials.



CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE If requested by District, bidder agrees to complete, sign and return this Contractor Qualification Questionnaire, including all required supporting documentation, within ten (10) days of being requested by District. If bidder fails or refuses to complete the Contractor Qualification Questionnaire, furnish all required attachments, sign the Contractor Qualification Questionnaire, or return it to the District within ten days of District’s written request, bidder will not be considered for award of the contract, and further, bidder agrees that the District may award the work to another bidder or call for new bids. In such event, the bidder shall be liable to the District for the difference between the amount of the disqualified bid and the larger amount for which the District procures the work plus all of the District’s costs, damages, expenses and liabilities. Bidder shall fully and completely answer each question set forth below. If necessary attach additional sheets. Print or type each response. If your response to any question is "no" or "none," you must state "no" or "none." "Not applicable" or other similar response, will not be accepted. (a) State the full legal name of the bidder. (b) State the form of the bidder’s business entity. (Sole proprietorship, joint venture, partnership, corporation, or other [describe]). (c) State the name and address of each person or other legal entity, which has a legal or equitable ownership of ten percent (10%) or more of the bidder. For each such person or legal entity, state that person or entity’s ownership interest, title and responsibilities, if any. (d) Has any person or legal entity holding a legal or equitable ownership of ten percent (10%) or more of the bidder, ever been accused of a civil violation of California Government Code section 12650, and following, (False Claims Act)? If so, describe in detail all facts, circumstances and the outcome. (e) Has any person or legal entity holding a legal or equitable ownership of ten percent (10%) or more of the bidder, ever been determined by a public agency to not be a responsible bidder? If so, state the name, address and telephone number of the public agency, including the name of the agencies’ contact person. (f) State the bidder’s contractor’s license number.



(g) State the date bidder first began business. (h) State any other names that bidder has used or done business under in the past five (5) years. (i) Describe in general, bidder’s experience. (j) Has bidder ever failed to complete a construction contract? If so, describe in detail all facts, circumstances and the outcome. (k) Has bidder’s control over a work of improvement, ever been terminated? If so, describe in detail all facts, circumstances and the outcome. (l) For each installation of new boiler, boiler and chiller area modifications, installation of new hydronic, water, gas, electric and signal underground infastructure, and associated site modifications that bidder has furnished labor, services, materials or equipment in the past five years, state: the name of each project; the contract amount for each project; the name, address and telephone number of the owner and owner’s representative, for each project; and a general description of the work performed by bidder on each project. (m) For every work of improvement upon which bidder has furnished labor, services, materials or equipment in the past five years, whether completed or not, for which the bidder’s original contract was equal to or greater than the amount as determined in the “Contractor Statement of Qualifications” page 13, item 2 of bid documents, state the name, address and telephone number of the owner and principal designer (architect or engineer). (n) For every lawsuit or arbitration between bidder and the owner of any work of improvement, limited to such lawsuits or arbitrations initiated or completed within the past five (5) years, state the name and address of the tribunal, the matter number, the parties, a general description of the nature of the dispute, and the outcome, if any. (o) Has bidder or bidder’s RMO ever been convicted of a felony? If so, describe in detail all facts, circumstances and the outcome, furnishing the name and address of the court in which the charge(s) were filed, including the matter name and case number.



(p) Has bidder ever been accused of presenting false claims to a public agency or public owner, as such claims are defined in California Government Code section 12650, et seq, or 31 United States Code section 3729, and following? If so, describe in detail all facts, circumstances and the outcome. (q) Has any public agency ever determined or ruled that bidder is not a responsible bidder? If so, state the name, address and telephone number of the public agency, including the name of the agencies’ contact person. (r) Within the past seven (7) years, has bidder ever failed to complete a public works construction project, within the time allowed by the contract, plus written agreed upon contract time extensions? If so, state the name, address and telephone number of the owner of such public works construction project including the name of the agencies’ contact person, and further, describe in detail the nature of the work of improvement. (s) Has any surety of bidder ever paid or satisfied any claim on behalf of bidder? (t) For each project or work of improvement that bidder is either (a) currently furnishing labor, services, materials or goods, or (b) under contract to furnish labor, services, materials or goods, state: A general description of the project; the current status of the project and bidder’s work thereon; the owner’s name, address and telephone number; the amount of bidder’s contract on such project. (u) State bidder’s annual gross sales for each of the last five fiscal years. (v) Contractor must furnish, YES X or NO , a current financial statement. As used herein, "current financial statement" means a balance sheet and profit and loss statement prepared and presented in a format that complies with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP), covering a period of time that is no less than the most recent fiscal year for bidder. If bidder’s most recent fiscal year ended more than six (6) months prior to the date when the Contract Documents require this Contractor Qualification Questionnaire be completed and returned to District, then "current financial statement" shall also include an interim balance sheet and profit and loss statement covering the period of time from the end of bidder’s most recent fiscal year to a period of time no greater than sixty (60) days prior to the date when the Contract Documents require this Contractor Qualification Questionnaire be completed and returned to District. All proprietary and other information received from you by the District will be disclosed upon receipt of a request for disclosure, pursuant to the California Public Records Act; provided, however, that, if any information is set apart and clearly marked “trade secret” when it is provided to the District, the District shall give notice to you of any request for the disclosure of such information. You will then have five (5) days from the date you receive such notice to enter into an agreement with the District, satisfactory to



legal counsel for the District, providing for the defense of, and complete indemnification and reimbursement for all costs (including plaintiff’s attorney fees) incurred by the District in any legal action to compel the disclosure of such information under the California Public Records Act. Failure to timely respond or enter into an acceptable agreement shall be deemed to be a waiver of any and all rights regarding the information designated “trade secret” by you, and such information will be disclosed by District pursuant to applicable procedures required by the Public Records Act. Upon the District’s final review of any “trade secret” produced, it shall return them to you without retaining copies. The following certification must be signed by an owner, general partner, or officer of bidder. I DECLARE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA, AND DO PERSONALLY CERTIFY AND ATTEST THAT: I HAVE THOROUGHLY REVIEWED THE ATTACHED CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE AND ATTACHMENTS, IF ANY, AND KNOW ITS CONTENTS, AND SAID CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE AND ATTACHMENTS, IF ANY, ARE TRUTHFUL, COMPLETE AND ACCURATE; AND THAT DISTRICT MAY REASONABLY RELY UPON THE CONTENTS AS BEING COMPLETE AND ACCURATE; AND, FURTHER, THAT I AM FAMILIAR WITH CALIFORNIA PENAL CODE SECTION 72 AND CALIFORNIA GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 12650, ET SEQ, PERTAINING TO FALSE CLAIMS, AND FURTHER KNOW AND UNDERSTAND THAT SUBMISSION OR CERTIFICATION OF A FALSE CLAIM MAY LEAD TO FINES, IMPRISONMENT AND/OR OTHER SEVERE LEGAL CONSEQUENCES. EXECUTED ON THE DATE INDICATED BELOW, AT THE LOCATION INDICATED BELOW. Dated: Bidder By: (Signature) (Printed name) (Title)


General Conditions Page 1 of 47 REV: June 25, 2015

INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE NO. PAGE #

1. BASIC DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................. 3 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................ 4 3. SITE CONDITIONS ...................................................................................................... 4 4. CONTRACT BONDS .................................................................................................... 4 5. NOTIFICATION OF SURETY COMPANIES ............................................................. 5 6. INSURANCE ................................................................................................................. 5 7. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ..................................................................... 8 8. INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATION ............................................................. 8 9. CLARIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ................................................... 9 10. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO BE FURNISHED ............................................ 10 11. SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS ........................................... 10 12. CONFORMANCE WITH CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................. 10 13. SUBCONTRACTORS ................................................................................................... 10 14. PERSONAL ATTENTION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ........................................... 10 15. BEGINNING OF WORK .............................................................................................. 11 16. PROGRESS SCHEDULE .............................................................................................. 11 17. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCURACY ........................................................................ 11 18. EFFECT OF INSPECTION OR USE ............................................................................ 12 19. INSPECTION ................................................................................................................ 12 20. RESERVED ................................................................................................................... 12 21. USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS ............................................................................. 12 22. MEANS AND METHODS ............................................................................................ 13 23. TIME .............................................................................................................................. 13 24. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY ................................................................... 16 25. EFFECT OF EXTENSION OF TIME ........................................................................... 16 26. CHANGES ..................................................................................................................... 17 27. CLAIMS; DISPUTE RESOLUTION ............................................................................ 21 28. FALSE CLAIMS ........................................................................................................... 31 29. PAYMENTS .................................................................................................................. 32 30. COST AND PRICING DATA ....................................................................................... 32 31. PROCEED WITH WORK ............................................................................................. 32 32. ACCESS TO RECORDS ............................................................................................... 32 33. DISMISSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY EMPLOYEES ................................................ 34 34. TERMINATION OF UNSATISFACTORY SUBCONTRACTS ................................. 34 35. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK ................................................................... 34 36. TERMINATION OF CONTRACTOR’S CONTROL OVER THE WORK ................. 34 37. FINAL INSPECTION, FIELD ACCEPTANCE, AND ACCEPTANCE ..................... 36 38. CLEANING UP ............................................................................................................. 36 39. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS AND REGULATIONS ............................................... 37 40. RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR ............................................................. 41 41. INDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................................... 41 42. PERMITS AND LICENSES .......................................................................................... 42 43. PROTECTION OF DISTRICT AGAINST PATENT CLAIMS ................................... 43 44. PROTECTION OF WORKERS .................................................................................... 43

INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS (CONTINUED):



ARTICLE NO. PAGE #

45. PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................... 43 46. SANITARY PROVISIONS ........................................................................................... 44 47. EXISTING UTILITIES ................................................................................................. 44 48. COOPERATION WITH OTHERS ................................................................................ 44 49. AIR POLLUTION CONTROL ...................................................................................... 44 50. WATER POLLUTION ................................................................................................. 45 51. SOUND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 45 52. UNFAVORABLE WEATHER AND OTHER CONDITIONS .................................... 45 53. WEEKEND, HOLIDAY, AND NIGHT WORK ........................................................... 45 54. OVERLOADING ........................................................................................................... 45 55. SUBCONTRACTING AND ASSIGNMENT ............................................................... 45 56. NON-RECOGNITION OF SUBCONTRACTORS ...................................................... 46 57. LANDS AND RIGHTS OF WAY ................................................................................. 46 58. LIABILITY OF DISTRICT OFFICIALS ...................................................................... 46 59. CONTRACTOR NOT AN AGENT OF THE DISTRICT ............................................ 46 60. THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS ............................................................................................. 46 61. GUARANTEE ............................................................................................................... 46 62. ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST ACTIONS .............................................................. 46 63. LEGAL ADDRESS OF THE CONTRACTOR............................................................. 46 64. SURVEYS ..................................................................................................................... 47 65. MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED BY NAME .......................................... 47 66. PROPERTY RIGHTS IN MATERIAL ......................................................................... 47 67. CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT ................................................................................. 47 68. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS .............................................................................. 47



GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. BASIC DEFINITIONS:

1.1 The term "Architect" means the design professional in responsible charge of the design services, or portion of the design services, in connection with the Project, its representative, officers, and employees. The District may, at any time, without prior notice to or approval by Contractor, replace Architect with a new Architect. Upon Contractor’s receipt of notice from District of such replacement, Contractor shall recognize such person or firm as Architect for all purposes under the Contract Documents. 1.2 The term "Change Order" shall refer to a written agreement in the form included in these Contract Documents, signed by the District, Architect, Construction Manager (if any), Deputy Chancellor, Vice Chancellor, Finance and Administration, and Contractor, modifying the Contract. 1.3 The term "Claim" (see Article 27). 1.4 The term "Construction Change Directive" (C.C.D.) shall refer to a written directive, signed by District, directing Contractor to perform and/or omit certain work as specified within the Construction Change Directive. The Contractor shall promptly comply with the Construction Change Directive and promptly perform and/or omit the work specified in the Construction Change Directive. 1.5 The term "Contract" means the Contract Documents. 1.6 The term "Contract Documents" means the documents listed in Article 2, Contract Documents, of these General Conditions, and identified as Contract Documents. 1.7 The term "Contract Sum" means the total compensation specified in the Contract. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by Change Order. 1.8 The term "Contract Time" means the number of days set forth in the Bid Form within which the Contractor must complete all work required by the Contract Documents. The Contract Time may be adjusted by Change Order. 1.9 The term "Contractor" means the person or firm identified as such in the Contract, or its authorized representative.

1.10 The term “Day” means “calendar day” unless otherwise specified. 1.11 The term “DSA” means the State of California, Division of State Architect.

1.12 The term "District,” “LRCCD” and/or "Owner" means the Los Rios Community College District, its representatives, construction manager (if any), inspectors, agents, Trustees, officers, and employees. 1.13 The term "Project" means the total of the work and obligations agreed to be performed by Contractor under the Contract.



2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents consist of the Notice to Contractor; Instructions to Bidders; Bid Form; Contractor Qualifications; Non-Collusion Declaration; Statement of Compliance; Designation of Subcontractors; Payment Bond; Performance Bond; Contract; General Conditions; Supplementary General Conditions (if any); specifications, and drawings prepared by Los Rios Community College District and/or Consultants; any addenda issued; Change Orders; and any other documents described as such within these Contract Documents. Only documents specifically identified as Contract Documents, make up the Contract and other documents not so identified are not Contract Documents.

3. SITE CONDITIONS:

3.1 The Contractor shall immediately, and in any event, no later than 24 hours after discovery, and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify the District and Architect, in writing, of any:

A. Material that the Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law, including but not limited to PCB’s, lead or asbestos. B. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site which Contractor asserts differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents. C. Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, which Contractor asserts differ materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. D. Material(s) that the Contractor believes may be material(s) of historical archaeological remains.

3.2 Upon notice, the District shall promptly cause an investigation of the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do materially so differ, or do involve hazardous waste, or are of historical archaeological remains, and cause a decrease or increase in the Contractor’s cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the work, shall issue a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. The District shall provide the contractor with a copy of its conclusions of the investigation. 3.3 In the event that a dispute arises between the District and the Contractor whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or are of historical archaeological remains, or cause a decrease or increase in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the work, the Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date required by the Contract, but shall proceed with all work to be performed under the Contract.

3.4 Nothing contained within this section or the Contract Documents relieves the Contractor of its obligations set forth in the Instructions to Bidders. 3.5 Contractor has no right to any adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time unless Contractor promptly and timely submitted the written notice required in this Article.

4. CONTRACT BONDS: As a part of the signing of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish corporate surety bonds to the benefit of the District, issued by a surety company United States



of America Treasury listed and AM Best rated, acceptable to the District and admitted to do business in the State of California, as follows: 4.1 Faithful Performance Bond: In a sum not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the total contract price as set forth in the Contract to guarantee the Contractor’s faithful performance of all covenants and stipulations of the Contract. The bond shall contain a provision that the surety thereon waives the provisions of sections 2819 and 2845 of the Civil Code of the State of California. 4.2 Payment Bond: In a sum not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the total contract price as set forth in the Contract to guarantee the payment of wages, and bills contracted for materials, supplies, or equipment used in the performance of the Contract. The bond shall be in accordance with the provisions of sections 8152, 8154, and 9550 to 9566, inclusive, of the Civil Code of the State of California, sections 995.310 and 995.660 of the Code of Civil Procedure of the State of California, and section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code of the State of California. Said bond shall also contain a provision that the surety thereon waives the provisions of sections 2819 and 2845 of the Civil Code of the State of California.

4.3 Stop Notice Release Bond: Within ten (10) work days after the filing of a stop notice or notice to Contractor from the District, of the same, whichever shall first occur, Contractor shall pay the claim in full or obtain and deposit with the District a Stop Notice Release Bond in compliance with Civil Code section 9364 from a surety other than that which issued the payment bond described in paragraph 4.2 above. The bond shall be accompanied by a statement of the Contractor, in form and substance acceptable to District, disputing the correctness or validity or enforceability of the stop notice. Failure of the Contractor to comply with this provision shall be a material breach of the Contractor’s duty to faithfully perform all of the covenants of this agreement and District shall withhold 100% of the amount of any stop notice until compliance with the terms hereof or an interpleader has occurred. Costs reasonably incurred by the District due to the failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements expressed hereinabove shall be paid to District within ten (10) days of presentation or District shall be authorized to withhold the same as a deductive change order against Contractor. 4.4 Documents required under this Article shall include the following: A certified copy of the power of attorney of the person who executed the bond; A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the surety; A certificate of the county clerk stating that the surety’s certificate of authority is still in force. Faithful Performance Bond and Payment Bond shall be on the forms provided by the District.

5. NOTIFICATION OF SURETY COMPANIES: The surety companies shall familiarize themselves with all provisions and conditions of the Contract. It is understood and agreed that the surety or sureties waive the right of special notification of any modifications or alterations, omissions or reductions, extra or additional work, extensions of time, or any other act or acts by the District or its authorized agents under the terms of the Contract; and failure to so notify the surety companies of such changes shall in no way relieve the surety or sureties of their obligations under this Contract.

6. INSURANCE: As a part of the signing of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish a Certificate of Insurance substantiating the fact that he/she has taken out the insurance hereinafter set forth for the period covered by the Contract with an insurance carrier admitted to do business in California, rated no less than A:VII by Bests, and acceptable to the District and under terms satisfactory to the District. Insurance industry’s standard Accord Certificate of Insurance or



binder forms shall bear an endorsement precluding the cancellation or reduction of coverage of any policy covered by such Certificate or binder before the expiration of thirty (30) days after the District shall have received notification of such cancellation, suspension, reduction, or voided coverage and each policy shall be endorsed to require the insurer to provide at least thirty (30) days written notice to the District prior to any cancellation, suspension, reduction, or voided coverage. Contractor shall furnish copies of his/her/its insurance policies required under this Contract to the District upon request. In the event Contractor does not have a Certificate of Insurance or binder evidencing the proper insurance coverage’s, the Contractor shall not be allowed on the work site. Any deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the District, including the terms and conditions that may be applicable to any self-insured retention; and in no event shall any deductible or self-insured retention program include an express or implied limitation with respect to the identity of the payee of any such amount(s). At the option of District, either: the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retentions as respects the District, its trustees, officers, employees, agents, inspectors, project managers, consultants, sub consultants, their employees, and each of them, or the Contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations, claim administration and defense expenses. 6.1 The insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against the District, its trustees, officers, employees, agents, Architects (including all subconsultants), inspectors, project managers consultants, subconsultants, their employees and each of them, for losses arising from work performed by the Contractor for District. 6.2 All insurance policies (except the workers’ compensation policy) shall be endorsed to include the Los Rios Community College District, its trustees, officers, employees, agents, Architects (including all subconsultants), inspectors, project managers, consultants, sub-consultants, their employees, and each of them, as additional insureds (using Insurance Services Organization, Inc. form CG2010 Ed. 11-85 or equivalent) to protect, as well as to provide the defense of, from all suits, actions, damages, liability, or claims of every type and description to which they may be subjected or put by reason of, or resulting from, the Contractor’s performance of the Contract. With respect to claims asserted against any policy of insurance on behalf of the Contractor, Contractor’s insurance shall apply as primary insurance, and any other insurance carried by the additional insureds identified above shall apply as excess and will not contribute with this insurance. 6.3 Each insurance policy shall include the following provisions: (1) The standard severability of interest clause in the policy and when applicable the cross liability insurance coverage provision which specifies that the inclusion of more than one insured shall not operate to impair the rights of one insured against another insured, and the coverage afforded shall apply as though separate policies had been issued to each insured; (2) It acts as primary insurance, and that no insurance held or owned by the District shall be called upon to cover, either in full or in part, any loss covered under the policy acquired by Contractor; and (3) The stated limits of liability coverage for Commercial/Comprehensive General Liability, and Business Automobile Liability, assumes that the standard "supplementary payments" clause will pay in addition to the applicable limits of liability and that these supplementary payments "are not included as part of the insurance policies limits of liability." If any of the policies indicate that defense costs are included in the general aggregate limit, then the required general aggregate limits shall be a minimum of Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000) or more at the District’s discretion. 6.4 If the Contractor fails to maintain such insurance, the District may take out insurance to



cover damages of the below-mentioned classes for which the District might be held liable on account of the Contractor failing to pay such damages and deduct and retain the amount of the premium for such insurance from any sums due the Contractor under the Contract. Failure of the District to obtain such insurance shall in no way relieve the Contractor from any of its responsibilities under the Contract. 6.5 The minimum insurance coverage to be obtained by the Contractor as herein above referred to are as follows:

(a) Commercial General Liability Insurance: (Insurance Services Organization, Inc. form CG-00-01, Ed. 10-01 or equivalent); Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability Insurance for Premises and Operations; Personal Injury for Premises and Operations; Independent Contractors; Incidental Contracts; Contractual Liability; and Products and Completed Operations; which shall be in the amount of not less than a combined single limit of Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000) per occurrence for one or more persons injured and property damaged on an occurrence form insurance policy. The aggregate limit of liability for products and completed operations shall not be less than Three Million Dollars ($3,000,000).

(b) Business Automobile Liability Policy Insurance: Protection against loss as a

result of liability to others caused by an accident and resulting in bodily injury and/or property damage, arising out of the ownership or use of any automobile (Insurance Services Organization, Inc. form CA-00-01, Ed. 10-01 or equivalent) the limits of liability shall not be less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) combined single limit each accident for bodily injury and property damage combined.

(c) Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability Insurance: The Contractor

shall be a qualified self-insurer or shall carry full Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability insurance coverage, either through the State Compensation Insurance Fund or a standard approved policy obtained from a licensed insurance carrier for all persons employed, either directly or through subcontractors, in carrying out the work under this Contract in accordance with the "Workers’ Compensation and Insurance Act," Division IV thereof. Employers’ limits of liability shall be the prevailing statutory limits of liability.

(d) Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance (construction

projects) or an installation floater (installation projects) in a form acceptable to the District upon the entire project in an amount equal 100% of total contract amount. The Contractor’s insurance shall include as named insured, the District, the Contractor, his subcontractors and their sub-subcontractors and shall insure against all risks of physical loss or damage from the perils of fire, vandalism, malicious mischief, windstorm, aircraft, civil commotion, riot, explosion, hail, smoke, theft, collapse, whether on site, in storage off premises or in transit to the site. Contractor will be responsible for any co-insurance penalties, deductibles or self-insured retentions as a result of any losses insured against or losses caused by defective workmanship or materials or by the Contractor’s negligent acts, errors or omissions, or any such loss caused by his subcontractors or others for whose acts Contractor may be liable. Such insurance shall remain in force until acceptance of the completed project by



District as a result of the full compliance by the Contractor of all provisions required in the Contract between the parties.

6.6 Any exceptions to the provisions of this Article must be delineated in the Contract Documents. In addition, it is understood and agreed that an excess insurance policy or an umbrella policy (following form) may be utilized to meet the above-required limits of liability for Commercial/Comprehensive General Liability, Business Automobile Liability policy, and the Workers’ Compensation Employers’ Liability. 6.7 No later than the time the Notice to Proceed is issued, or at any other time as may be directed in writing by the District, the Contractor shall provide written evidence of insurance coverages, in a form acceptable to the District (i.e., insurance certificates and policy endorsements appropriately issued), for each supplier, subcontractor and sub-subcontractor whose initial subcontract and/or purchase order price is equal to or in excess of 5% of the Contract Sum. The insurance coverages (both as to types and amounts) to be procured by each supplier, subcontractor or sub-subcontractor performing work having a value equal to or in excess of 5% of the Contract Sum shall meet or exceed the minimum insurance coverages as set forth at Article 6.5, and, further, said coverages shall otherwise fully satisfy all other insurance requirements applicable to the Contractor as set forth in this Article 6 and the Contract Documents. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to promptly provide acceptable written evidence to the District demonstrating that each supplier, subcontractor or sub-subcontractor that will perform work having a value equal to or in excess of 5% of the Contract Sum has obtained and possesses all insurance coverages in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

7. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE: Prior to the start of construction, a conference may be

called by the District or for the purpose of reviewing the construction program with the Contractor. At this conference, the sequence of work, methods of access to the construction site and temporary facilities shall be reviewed by the Contractor and District. Coordination of utilities within the project limits, including relocations and maintenance of existing facilities and additions thereto, shall be confirmed in writing by utility representatives and the Contractor at this conference, or within five (5) working days thereafter.

8. INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: It is the intent of these Contract Documents that the work performed under the Contract shall result in a complete operating system in satisfactory working condition with respect to the functional purposes of the installation, and no extra compensation will be allowed for anything omitted but fairly implied. The prices paid for the various items in the bid proposal shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, overhead, profit, incidentals, and doing all work necessary to complete the finished product as provided in the Contract Documents. 8.1 The specifications and drawings are intended to be explanatory of each other. Any work shown on the drawings, and not in the specifications, or vice versa, is to be treated as if indicated in both. In the case of conflict or inconsistency, the specifications shall control over the drawings. Figured dimensions shall control over scaled measurements. In all cases, the more costly or stringent interpretation is deemed to control and be the interpretation incorporated into the Contract Documents and Contract Sum. 8.2 Organization of the specifications into various subdivisions and the arrangement of the drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among subcontractors or in establishing the extent of work to be performed by any trade.



8.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, technical words and abbreviations contained in the Contract Documents are used in accordance with commonly understood construction industry meanings, and non-technical words and abbreviations are used in accordance with their commonly understood meanings. 8.4 The Contract Documents may omit modifying words such as "all" and "any", and articles such as "the" and "an", but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. The use of the word "including," when following any general statement, shall not be construed to limit such statement to specific items or matters set forth immediately following such word or to similar items or matters, whether or not non-limiting language (such as "without limitation," "but not limited to," or words of similar import) is used with reference thereto, but rather shall be deemed to refer to all other items or matters that could reasonably be deemed to fall within the broadest possible scope of such general statement. 8.5 Whenever the context so requires, the use of the singular number shall be deemed to include the plural and vice versa. Each gender shall be deemed to include any other gender, and each shall include corporation, partnership, trust, or other legal entity whenever the context so requires. The captions and headings of the various subdivisions of the Contract Documents are intended only as a matter of reference and convenience, and in no way define, limit, or prescribe the scope or intent of the Contract Documents or any subdivision thereof. 8.6 Contractor shall assume responsibility for the design of any systems and/or fabrications needed to meet performance criterion described in the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, aspects of the Contract Documents which may require or involve the deferred approval of any portion of the work, or the design of the work, by regulatory or compliance entities. Design shall be governed by descriptive criterion specified for each item. Contractor shall also assume responsibility for temporary structures used to implement construction such as shoring and scaffolding.

9. CLARIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Should it appear that the work to be done, or any of the matters relative thereto, are not sufficiently detailed or explained in the Contract Documents, or in the event of any doubt or question arising respecting the true meaning of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall apply to the Architect for such further explanations as may be necessary, and the Architect shall render his or her decisions thereon within fifteen (15) days of the Architect’s receipt of the Contractor’s Request for Information (RFI). The Contractor shall thoroughly review all RFI’s submitted by subcontractors prior to submission to the Architect to determine whether such RFI is already answered in the Contract Documents. Contractor represents to District and Architect, that by submission of an RFI, Contractor has thoroughly reviewed the RFI and thoroughly reviewed the Contract Documents, and determined that the RFI is not answered or reasonably inferable in the Contract Documents, and that the RFI pertains to an unforeseen condition or circumstance that is not described in the Contract Documents, that there is a conflict or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, or there is an error or omission in the Contract Documents. In the event any RFI is answered or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents, Contractor agrees to pay the Architect and District the reasonable cost for their time and expenses associated with reviewing and responding to RFI’s, which are already answered or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. In the event of a disagreement over such compensation, the judgment of the District’s construction representative shall be final and conclusive.



10. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO BE FURNISHED: The Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, all plans returned by bidders following the opening of bids. District does not warranty the quality, condition or completeness of the plans returned by bidders. Additional sets are available to the Contractor for the cost of printing. The Contractor shall retain an approved set of plans and specifications on the job at all times during the progress of the work.

11. SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS: In addition to the drawings incorporated in the Contract at the time of signing, the Architect may furnish such working drawings and supplemental drawings from time to time as may be necessary to make clear, or to define in greater detail, the intent of the Contract drawings and specifications. In furnishing such additional drawings and/or instructions, the Architect shall have authority to make minor changes in the work, not involving extra cost, and not inconsistent with the nature of the work. These working drawings and supplemental drawings shall become a part of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall make its work conform to them.

12. CONFORMANCE WITH CODES AND STANDARDS: All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest adopted standards and regulations and Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations (including but not limited to the California Building Standards Administrative Code, the California Building Code, the California Electrical Code, the California Mechanical Code, the California Plumbing Code, the California Energy Code, the California Elevator Safety Construction Code, The California Fire Code and the California Reference Standards Code); Americans With Disabilities Act; and all other applicable codes, laws, or regulations. Nothing in these Contract Documents is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these requirements. Should Contractor discover work within the Contract Documents not in conformance with these requirements, Contractor agrees to immediately notify Architect in writing of said nonconformance, and to not proceed with nonconforming work. When the work detailed in the Contract Documents differs from governing codes, it is understood and agreed that the Contract Sum is based upon the more costly or expensive standard.

13. SUBCONTRACTORS: Subcontracts or agreements between Contractor and any subcontractor or

supplier, as well as subcontracts and purchase orders between subcontractors and suppliers of every tier, shall: (i) require each subcontractor or supplier, to the extent of the work or scope of services to be performed by the subcontractor or supplier, to be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents; and (ii) to assume all the obligations and responsibilities which Contractor, through the Contract Documents, assumes towards the Owner. This expressly includes, without limitation, all aspects of the Contract Documents regarding the performance of the Work, the dispute resolution provisions, the indemnity and insurance provisions, and the warranties and guarantees set forth in the Contract Documents. Nothing contained in this Article shall be construed to create any contractual relationship, express or implied, between the Owner and any subcontractor or supplier.

14. PERSONAL ATTENTION AND SUPERINTENDENCE: The Contractor shall give

Contractor’s personal attention to, and shall supervise the work to the end that it shall be diligently implemented and at all times in conformance with the Contractor’s duties under Title 24, California Code of Regulations. Contractor shall keep a competent superintendent on the work at all times throughout its progress, who shall represent the Contractor in Contractor’s absence, and shall have complete authority to represent and act for the Contractor. Whenever the Contractor or Contractor’s superintendent is not present on a particular part of the work,



the Architect or District may stop the work until the Contractor or Contractor’s superintendent arrives. 14.1 The Contractor shall be liable for the faithful observation of any instructions delivered to Contractor or to Contractor’s authorized representatives. Any order given by the Architect not otherwise required by the specifications to be in writing will, on request of the Contractor, be given or confirmed by the Architect in writing.

15. BEGINNING OF WORK: The Notice to Proceed shall constitute authority for the Contractor to enter upon the site of the work and to begin operations, upon condition that the Contractor has strictly complied with all requirements of these Contract Documents, including but not limited to, furnishing all required documentation and certificates of insurance. If Contractor has not provided District with all documents required by these Contract Documents as of the date of the Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall not be allowed on the site of the work or allowed to start work on the Project, notwithstanding the issuance of a Notice to Proceed. 15.1 When the Contractor has started work on the Project, the Contractor shall diligently prosecute the work to completion within the time limit provided in the Contract Documents. 15.2 The Contractor shall give the District and Architect at least two (2) working days’ notice of Contractor’s intention to start work, specifying the time, date, and location at which the Contractor intends to begin. 15.3 The counting of contract days shall begin on the date of the Notice to Proceed, whether or not Contractor is allowed on the work site due to Contractor’s failure to furnish District with all documentation required by these Contract Documents. In no event shall there be a period of time greater than thirty (30) days, from the time the Contract forms are first received by the Contractor and the commencement of the Contract Time, regardless of the receipt or lack thereof by District of all documents required by these Contract Documents.

16. PROGRESS SCHEDULE: The District’s receipt of Contract Schedules in strict compliance with Specification section 01 32 16, Contract Schedule, shall be a condition precedent to the Architect’s or District’s approval of the Contractor’s periodic payment applications and the District’s obligation to pay the Contractor. 16.1 The Contractor shall, to every reasonable extent, carry on the work of construction of the various elements of the project concurrently, and shall not defer construction of any portion of the work in favor of any other portion without the express written approval of the Architect or District.

17. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCURACY: The Contractor shall obtain all necessary measurements for and from the work, and shall check dimensions, elevations, and grades for all layout and construction work and shall supervise such work, the accuracy for all of which Contractor shall be responsible. Contractor shall adjust, correct, and coordinate Contractor’s work with the work of others so that no discrepancies occur in the whole work. 17.1 Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that all information and data contained and set forth in all of Contractor’s submittals that may be required by the Contract Documents, comply in all respects with the Contract Documents.



18. EFFECT OF INSPECTION OR USE: Neither the inspection by an inspector or by the Architect, nor any measurement, approved modification, submittal, shop drawing, order, or certificate, nor acceptance of any part or whole of the work, or payment of money, nor any possession or use by the District or its agents, shall operate as a waiver of any provisions of the Contract or of any power or authority reserved therein, or of any right to damages there under; nor shall the waiver of any breach of this Contract be held to be a waiver of any subsequent or other breach.

19. INSPECTION: Inspectors of Record, approved by the Division of the State Architect, are required under Group 1, Articles 1 through 6, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, section 4-301 and following. The District will employ and be responsible for payment of all wages associated with the employment of the Title 24 inspectors, excepting that if, in the District’s sole determination, its costs or expenses associated with the employment of the Title 24 inspectors is increased by any act or omission of Contractor or any of its subcontractors or material suppliers, including but not limited to, costs and expenses associated with re-inspection or overtime compensation for the District’s inspector(s), weekend or holiday work, Contractor agrees to pay said increased costs and expenses. If Contractor fails or refuses to pay said increased costs and expenses, the District may withhold the increased costs and expenses from payments due to the Contractor.

19.1 Contractor shall give District’s inspector written notice at least two workdays in advance, of when required tests and inspections are needed. 19.2 The inspection of the work by District, the District’s inspector(s), the Architect or their consultants, does not relieve the Contractor of any of Contractor’s obligation to fulfill the Contract as prescribed. Any work, materials, or equipment not meeting the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents shall be rejected, and unsuitable work or materials shall be made good, notwithstanding the fact that such work or materials may have previously been inspected or approved and payment therefore may have been made. If nonconforming work, materials, or equipment not meeting the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents is discovered, and the Contractor fails to remedy the nonconforming work, materials, or equipment, or the District agrees in writing to accept the nonconforming work, materials, or equipment, Contractor agrees to sign a Change Order or otherwise reimburse District in a sum equal to the cost to remedy the nonconforming work, materials, or equipment. It is expressly understood and agreed that the District will be entitled to recover from Contractor the full cost of remedying nonconforming work, materials, or equipment, and that diminution in value will not be considered as a method for valuing the District’s damages for nonconforming work, materials, or equipment, and further that the doctrine of economic waste will not be a defense to the District’s recovery from Contractor of the full and complete cost and expense of remedying nonconforming work, materials, or equipment.

20. RESERVED.

21. USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS: The District shall have the right at any time during the progress of this work to take over and place in service any completed or partially completed portion of the work, notwithstanding the time for completion of the entire work or such portions which may not have expired; but such taking possession thereof shall not be deemed an acceptance of any of the work, nor work on those portions not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.



22. MEANS AND METHODS: Neither Architect, District nor the Inspector of Record will have

control over, be in charge of, nor be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the work, since these are solely Contractor’s responsibility, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

23. TIME: Time is of the essence in the performance of this Contract. Contractor must complete the entire Work of the Project, and all designated portions thereof, within the Contract Time (s) stated in section 01 11 00.1.2.B (“Project Completion Date”), or any authorized extension(s) thereof pursuant to the Contract Documents. Failure of Contractor to include an element of the Work required for performance of the Contract in the Baseline Schedule (or any earlier version of the Baseline Schedule), or inaccuracy in the Baseline Schedule, does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for accomplishing the Work within the Contract Time(s) designated in the Contract Documents and will not constitute grounds for delay in completion of the Work or designated portion of the Work. The Contractor must provide an adequate workforce, materials of proper quality, and equipment to properly execute the Work and to ensure completion of each part of the Work in accordance with the Baseline Schedule. 23.1 Notice to Proceed: District’s Notice to Proceed will state the first Day of the Contract Time. Notwithstanding other provisions of the Contract Documents, District is not obligated to accept or to pay for Work provided by the Contractor prior to the first Day of the Contract Time designated in the Notice to Proceed, whether or not District has knowledge of the furnishing of such Work. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or Directed by District, Contractor must begin Work within 10 Days following the start date for the Work as stated in the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor will not be allowed on the site of the Work until the Contractor’s Contract Bonds and insurance comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. 23.2 Acceleration: District reserves the right to direct Contractor to accelerate performance of the Work or any portion of the Work. No action or direction of District other than an express written Order by the District to accelerate performance of the Work shall be construed by Contractor to be direction to accelerate the Work. If the Contractor believes that some action or inaction on the part of District constitutes an acceleration directive, Contractor must immediately notify District in writing, in accordance with the requirements of Article 23, that Contractor considers the actions or inaction an acceleration directive. This written notification shall explain in detail the circumstances of the acceleration directive. Contractor shall keep daily cost and other Project records related to any asserted/constructive or actual acceleration directive separate from other Project costs and records, and must submit a written daily record of allowable acceleration costs to District at the end of each Day. With respect to acceleration costs that Contractor shall track and separately submit to Owner as required pursuant to this paragraph 23.2, allowable labor costs are limited to overtime or shift premium costs, and allowable equipment costs are only the cost of added equipment mobilized to the site to accomplish the accelerated Work effort. 23.3 Delays and Time Extensions: The District will consider extensions to the Contract Time(s) for the following reasons only if they affect the controlling work activities on the longest Critical Path of the Baseline Schedule, or accepted schedule update, as may be adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents.

(a) Acts of God or of the public enemy, acts of Government, acts of District, fires,



floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, sanctioned strikes, freight embargoes, unusually severe weather, or delays of Subcontractors or Suppliers arising from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of both Contractor and such Subcontractors or Suppliers;

(b) Delays in progress due to an act of neglect by District only for the amount of delay time that occurs after Contractor has notified District in writing and the District has had a reasonable time to respond to the notification;

(c) An Approved Change Order that extends the Contract Time, or a Contract Change Directive which authorizes an extension of Contract Time; or

(d) Adjustments to the Contract Time(s) due to weather will be allowed only for unusually severe weather or resulting site conditions that affect the progress of controlling work activities on the longest Critical Path of the Baseline Schedule, or accepted schedule update. Adjustments to the Contract Time on account of weather, if any, will be in accordance with Specification section 01 32 16, Contract Schedule.

23.3.1 Whenever the Contractor foresees any delay in the prosecution of the Work,

the Contractor must notify the District in writing of any potential delay or impact, including any anticipated impact on the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. Within three (3) Days from the beginning of any longest Critical Path delay to the Baseline Schedule, or accepted schedule update, or the occurrence(s) giving rise to the delay, whichever occurs earlier, Contractor must provide written notice of the delay event to the District. Said written notice shall include a description of the event or occurrence giving rise to the delay, the estimated duration of the delay, and the impact of the event or occurrence upon the longest critical path and completion of the Project. Contractor expressly waives any claim for delay or adjustment to the Contract Time and/or Contract Sum if Contractor fails to provide such written notice to District.

23.3.2 Within fifteen (15) Days after the initial written notice of the Contractor,

Contractor shall submit all supporting information to validate the claimed impact of the delay on the Contract Time, including a Time Impact Analysis (“TIA”) in accordance with section 01 32 16.1.8 (“Adjustment of Times for Completion”). If requested by the District, Contractor shall promptly, and no later than seven (7) Days after the District’s request, provide updated or further supporting information, including an updated or revised TIA, with respect to the claimed delay or impact. Contractor expressly waives any claim for delay or adjustment to the Contract Time and/or Contract Sum if Contractor fails to promptly and timely provide all supporting information, including the TIA and any additional/supplemental supporting information as may reasonably be requested by the District. The costs for development and submission for the TIA and all supporting documentation is part of the base contract price and normal business practice and is not compensable.

23.3.3 District will ascertain the facts and the extent of the delay and adjust the

Contract Time(s) for completing the Work (and/or adjust the Contract Sum) if, in District’s sole discretion and judgment, the facts justify such an adjustment(s). The District’s written determination in this regard shall be considered final and conclusive. In the event Contractor disputes the District’s written determination under this paragraph 23.3 with respect to any claimed delay, or the adjustment (or lack thereof) with respect to Contract Time and/or Contract Sum, Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy shall be to pursue a claim in strict accordance with the requirements of Article 27 (“Claims; Dispute Resolution”).



23.4 Definitions: As used in this Article 23, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

(a) "Excusable Delay" means any delay of the completion of the Project beyond the expiration of the Contract Time caused by conditions beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor such as strikes, embargoes, fire, unavoidable casualties, unusual delays in transportation, national emergency, and stormy and inclement weather conditions in which the controlling item of work on the longest critical path of the Baseline Schedule, or accepted schedule, cannot continue. The financial inability of the Contractor or any subcontractor and default of any subcontractor, without limitation, shall not be deemed conditions beyond the Contractor’s control. An Excusable Delay may entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in the Contract Time, but shall not entitle the Contractor to any adjustment in the Contract Sum.

(b) "Compensable Delay" means any delay of the completion of the work beyond the expiration date of the Contract Time for which the District is responsible and which delay is unreasonable under the circumstances involved, and not within the contemplation of the parties. A Compensable Delay may entitle the Contractor to an extension of the Contract Time and/or Contract Sum. Except as provided herein, the Contractor shall have no claim for damage or compensation for any delay, interruption, hindrance, or disruption.

(c) "Inexcusable Delay" means any delay of the completion of the Project beyond the expiration of the Contract Time resulting from causes other than those listed above. An Inexcusable Delay shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of the Contract Time or an adjustment of the Contract Sum.

23.5 The Contractor may request an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Contract Sum, for a Compensable Delay, and may request an adjustment in the Contract Time for an Excusable Delay, subject to the following:

(a) If an Excusable Delay and a Compensable Delay occur concurrently, the maximum extension of the Contract Time shall be the number of days from the commencement of the first delay to the cessation of the delay which ends last. The period of concurrency is excusable but is not compensable.

(b) If an Inexcusable Delay occurs concurrently with either an Excusable Delay or

a Compensable Delay, the maximum extension of the Contract Time shall be the number of days, if any, by which the Excusable Delay or the Compensable Delay exceeds the Inexcusable Delay.

(c) If an Inexcusable Delay occurs concurrently with both an Excusable Delay and

a Compensable Delay, the maximum extension in the Contract Time shall be the number of days, if any, by which the number of days determined pursuant to Subparagraph (a) exceeds the number of days of the Inexcusable Delay.

(d) For a Compensable Delay, the Contractor shall only be entitled to an

adjustment in the Contract Sum in an amount equal to the actual additional labor costs, material costs, temporary facilities costs and unavoidable



equipment costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of the Compensable Delay, plus the actual additional wages or salaries and fringe benefits and payroll taxes of supervisory and administrative personnel necessary and directly employed at the Project site for the supervision of the work during the period of Compensable Delay. Except as provided herein, the Contractor shall have no claim for damage or compensation for any delay including but not limited to extended field costs, extended home overhead costs, impact, inefficiency, unabsorbed home office overhead, under absorbed home office overhead, hindrance, disruption or any other damage arising from delay, no matter how characterized. There shall be no Compensable Delay unless the event or occurrence giving rise to the Compensable Delay delays the actual completion of the Project past the Contract Time.

23.6 The District shall not consider any request for an adjustment to the Contract Time(s) and/or Contract Sum unless the Contractor satisfies the requirements set forth in the Contract Documents for providing prompt and timely written notice of the potential delay and submission of supporting information (including the TIA, and any further or additional supporting information as may be reasonably requested by the District) establishing the impact of the delay on the longest Critical Path of the Baseline Schedule, or accepted schedule update. No adjustment of the Contract Time and/or Contract Sum will be considered, or granted, as a consequence of any claimed delay event in the absence of Contractor’s strict compliance with Article 23 and the Contract Documents. 23.7 The District shall not be responsible to the Contractor for any constructive acceleration due to Contractor’s failure to comply with the submission and justification requirements of the Contract Documents for Contract Time and/or Contract Sum adjustment requests. The Contractor’s failure to perform in accordance with the Baseline Schedule, or accepted schedule update, shall not be excused because the Contractor has submitted a request for adjustment of the Contract Time, unless and until the District approves such request.

24. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY: It is agreed by the parties to this Contract that in case all work called for under the Contract is not completed in all respects and requirements within the time called for in the Contract Documents, plus any agreed upon extensions of time, damage will be sustained by the District, and that it is and will be impracticable to determine the actual amount of damage by reason of such delay; and the Contractor agrees that the sum set forth within these Contract Documents is a reasonable amount to be charged as liquidated damages; and it is therefore agreed that the Contractor will pay to the District the sum set forth in the Contract Documents, for each and every calendar day’s delay beyond the time prescribed; and the Contractor further agrees that the District may deduct and retain the amount thereof from any monies due the Contractor under the Contract.

25. EFFECT OF EXTENSION OF TIME: Any extension of Contract Time(s) granted the Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents shall not constitute a waiver by the District of, nor a release of, the Contractor from, the Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work within the Contract Time(s) specified by the Contract Documents, as modified by the particular extension in question. The District’s decision to grant an extension of the Contract Time(s) due to one circumstance set forth in one request, shall not be construed as a grant of an extension for any other circumstance or the same circumstance occurring at some other time, and shall not be viewed by the Contractor as a precedent for any other request for extension of the Contract Time(s).



26. CHANGES: The District may at any time, without notice to the sureties, by written order, make changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to additions, deletions or other revisions, changes in the Contract Documents and in the method and manner of performing the Work. Such changes shall be ordered or documented by:

(a) Field Modification, which is a written instruction, clarification or additional

information communicated by the District or its authorized representative to Contractor directing or authorizing a minor adjustment in the Work or the requirements of the Contract Documents that does not change the Contract Sum or Contract Time;

(b) Change Order, which is a written amendment to the Contract Documents,

changing the Work, and/or the Contract Documents, and/or the Contract Sum, and/or the Contract Time; or

(c) Construction Change Directive.

26.1 Upon request by the District or pursuant to a proposed change order by the Contractor, Contractor shall promptly, but in no event more than three (3) days of the event or occurrences giving rise to the issue, provide District with Contractor’s proposed cost and time estimates detailing the amount to be added to or deducted from the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time due to the proposed change. Within five (5) Days, or as otherwise directed in writing by the District, Contractor shall promptly provide District with Contractor’s detailed, itemized proposal, which must include: (i) detailed estimates and other documentation supporting the proposed cost; and (ii) any required adjustments to the Contract Time known by the Contractor to be directly or indirectly attributable to the proposed change. All requests for adjustment to the Contract Time must be supported by a detailed schedule analysis as specified in section 01 32 16 (“Contract Schedule”). 26.1.1 If Contractor fails to promptly submit the required information and

documentation as required or requested by the District, the District may issue a Construction Change Directive, which shall constitute the District’s final determination with respect to the adjustment, if any, to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time due to the proposed change request, and Contractor must immediately proceed with the Work as directed by the District. If warranted in the judgment of the District, the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time may be changed pursuant to the Construction Change Directive in accordance with the District’s estimate of cost and time associated with the change request. In the event Contractor disputes the adjustment, if any, to the Contract Sum and/or Time pursuant to the Construction Change Directive, Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy shall be to pursue a claim in strict accordance with the requirements of Article 27 (“Claims; Dispute Resolution”).

26.1.2 If, after Contractor has submitted its cost and time proposal, the District and

Contractor fail to successfully negotiate or agree on the adjustment, if any, to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time associated with the proposed changed, the District may issue a Construction Change Directive, which shall constitute the District’s final determination with respect to the adjustment, if any, to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time due to the proposed change request, and Contractor must immediately proceed with the Work as directed by the District. If warranted in the judgment of the District, the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time may be changed pursuant to the



Construction Change Directive in accordance with the District’s estimate of cost and time associated with the change request. If Contractor disputes any portion of the Construction Change Directive, Contractor must maintain all time and materials records for “Force Account” Work as specified in paragraph 26.3.3. If Contractor fails to maintain such records or fails to submit such records within ten (10) Days following completion of the added Work, the District’s estimate will be used for the purpose of final adjustment, if any, to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time. In the event Contractor disputes the adjustment, if any, to the Contract Sum and/or Time pursuant to the Construction Change Directive, Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy shall be to pursue a claim in strict accordance with the requirements of Article 27 (“Claims; Dispute Resolution”).

26.1.3 At the request of the District, a representative(s) on behalf of the Contractor

and the District with authority to execute Change Orders shall promptly meet in person at the District’s offices to attempt to resolve any disputes regarding adjustments to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time arising from any proposed change request.

26.1.4 When Work is deleted, the District is entitled to a credit for the deleted Work.

The credit adjustment to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time for deleted Work will be determined in accordance with Articles 26 and/or 23. If Contractor has ordered acceptable material for the deleted Work before the date of notification of such deletion by the District, and if orders for such material cannot be canceled, such material will be paid for by the District at Contractor’s actual cost. In such case, the material paid for will become the District’s property and the District will pay the actual cost of any further handling. If the material is returnable to the vendor and if the District so directs, Contractor must return the material and the District will pay the actual costs of returning the material, including reasonable and verifiable handling and restocking charges. The actual costs or charges to be paid by the District to Contractor for deleted materials as provided in this paragraph will be computed in the same manner as if the Work were to be paid for on a “Force Account” basis in accordance with paragraph 26.3.3.

26.1.5. Contractor’s written acceptance of a Change Order constitutes final and

binding agreement to the provisions thereof and a waiver of all claims in connection therewith, whether direct, indirect or consequential. Pursuant to Public Contract Code section 7100, Contractor may specifically exclude individual Change Order items from operation of the Contractor’s written acceptance of the Change Order and waiver of all claims in connection therewith. However, a general statement that Contractor reserves its right to seek a further adjustment of the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time at a future date for the Work, including Work associated with the Change Order, is not permitted. If Contractor disagrees with any terms or conditions of a Change Order, Contractor must sign it with the statement "Signed Under Protest" and attach a written statement detailing the basis of the disagreement. The written statement detailing the basis of the disagreement must specifically identify each item to be excluded from the Contractor’s waiver and state why Contractor is unable to determine the adjustment of the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time arising from the items excluded in the Contractor’s release.

26.2 Reserved.

26.3 Adjustments, if any, to the Contract Sum by reason of any modifications of the Work as



set forth in a proposed change or Construction Change Directive shall be determined by one or more of the following methods as elected by the District: 26.3.1 Lump Sum Price: By an acceptable lump sum proposal from the Contractor; 26.3.2 Unit Price(s): By unit prices fixed by agreement between the District and the Contractor; and/or 26.3.3 Force Account: By ordering the Contractor to proceed with the work and to keep and present a correct account of the cost of the change, together with all vouchers therefore in accordance with this Article, and in such other form or content as the Architect or District may direct. The Contractor will be paid for labor, materials, and equipment rental actually used on the Change Order work as follows:

(a) Labor: the Contractor will be paid the reasonable cost of labor for the workers used in the actual and direct performance of the work. The cost of labor, whether the employer is the Contractor, subcontractor, or other forces, will be the sum of the following:

(1) Actual Wages: The actual wages paid shall include any

reasonable employer payments to or on behalf of the workers for health and welfare, pension, vacation, and similar purposes.

(2) Labor Surcharge: The labor surcharge to be added to the actual

wages shall be the reasonable cost of all additional payments made to, or on behalf of the workers, other than actual wages, as required by state or federal laws, including by way of example but not limited to, workers’ compensation, SUTA, FUTA and FICA.

(3) Subsistence and Travel Allowance: The actual reasonable and

necessary subsistence and travel allowance paid to such workers.

(b) Materials: The actual cost of the materials to the purchaser, whether the Contractor, a subcontractor, or other forces. If the Contractor does not furnish satisfactory evidence of the cost of such materials, it shall be deemed to be the lowest current wholesale price at which such materials are available in the quantities concerned delivered to the job site. The District reserves the right to furnish such materials as it deems advisable, and the Contractor shall have no claims for costs or profit on such District furnished materials.

(c) Equipment: The use of equipment shall be paid for at the rates listed for such equipment in the current compilation of rental rates of the California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) or competitive local rental rates of established rental agencies serving the area of the work, whichever is less. If the equipment is not shown on the above-mentioned list, Contractor shall be paid such hourly rental rates as are agreed upon by the Contractor and the District prior to use of the equipment, except that in no case shall such agreed hourly rate exceed the rental rates of established distributors or equipment rental agencies serving the area, plus thirty-three and one-third percent (33-1/3%) for the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, and field repairs and



maintenance. If the equipment is moved on to the work and used exclusively for extra work, the Contractor will be paid for the cost of transporting it to the job and returning it to its original location. The rental period shall begin when the equipment is unloaded at the site of the extra work, and shall include each day that the equipment is at the site of, and performing or utilized for, such extra work, excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, unless extra work is performed on such days, and shall terminate at the end of the day on which such extra work is completed or the Architect directs the Contractor to discontinue the use of such equipment. The rental time to be paid for equipment already on the work, or which is used for other than such extra work, shall be the actual time the equipment is in operation on the extra work, plus the time required to move the equipment to the site of the extra work and return it to its original location.

(d) With respect to the Force Account labor, equipment and materials as computed

above, Contractor may profit and overhead in an amount no greater than the following percentages:

Labor Fifteen Percent (15%) Materials Fifteen Percent (15%) Equipment Rental Fifteen Percent (15%) (e) Records: Contractors must maintain records (including daily reports) that

provide a clear distinction between the performance of the Force Account Work and the performance of all other operations and Work. With respect to the documentation of its labor, materials and equipment, Contractor shall furnish to District completed daily Force Account Work reports, on forms furnished by or acceptable by the District for each day’s Force Account Work.

The daily Force Account Work reports shall be signed by Contractor, and: (i) must be

submitted not later than one (1) workday following the performance of said Work; (ii) must itemize the materials used; (iii) must cover the direct cost of labor and the charges for equipment rental, whether Provided by Contractor, Subcontractor, or other forces; and (iv) must provide names or identifications and classifications of workers, the hourly rate of pay and hours worked, and the size, type and identification number of equipment and hours operated.

Material charges must be substantiated by valid copies of vendor’s invoices. Such invoices must be submitted with the daily Force Account Work reports, or if not available, they must be submitted with subsequent daily Force Account Work reports.

Contractor’s cost records (including those of its subcontractors and suppliers)

pertaining to the Work, including Force Account Work, shall be subject to inspection or audit by the District in accordance with Article 32.

(f) For Force Account Change Order work performed by a subcontractor,

compensation for such work shall be based on all direct costs as listed in the subcontractor’s portion of the proposal plus the above percentages. Overhead and profit for all tiers of subcontractors shall in no event exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the cost of the work. The Contractor may add ten percent (10%) to the subcontractor’s proposal for overhead and profit.



(g) The allowances for overhead and profit as enumerated in the preceding subparagraphs shall include full compensation for any and all items of overhead or profit including but not limited to, superintendence, field overhead, home office overhead (absorbed, unabsorbed and under absorbed), impact, inefficiency, interference, acceleration, disruption, suspension, lost profits, Contractor bonds, insurance, general conditions, clean-up, safety meetings, mandated programs and processing of Claim and Change Order documents

(h) A change order shall be treated as an accord and satisfaction of any and all

known or unknown claims on behalf of contractor and all individuals and entities performing work and/or supplying materials on behalf of contractor.

26.4 The adjustment, if any, to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time, shall be set forth in the Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

27. CLAIMS; DISPUTE RESOLUTION: A Claim is a written request by Contractor, in accordance

with the requirements set forth in this Article, to adjust, alter, modify, or otherwise change the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, or both, or the terms, conditions and provisions of the Contract Documents. In strict accordance with the Contract Documents, each Claim must be stated with specificity and satisfy all requirements set forth in this Article. It is the intent of the District that all Claims arising under and by virtue of the Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of the District at the earliest possible time in order that the matters may be resolved, if possible, or other appropriate action promptly taken, and, further, that all Claims shall be subject to the dispute resolution proceedings set forth in this Article. Contractor’s surety or sureties shall be bound by and subject to the dispute resolution provisions set forth herein, and Contractor’s surety or sureties shall, at the request of the District (or Contractor), participate in any dispute resolution proceedings, including mediation or litigation. 27.1 Compliance with Conditions Precedent: No matter or issue may be considered as a Claim hereunder unless Contractor has fully complied with all notice requirements and/or other procedures as may be applicable in accordance with the General Conditions and Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, all notice and other requirements pursuant to Article 26 (“Changes”)). All such applicable notice requirements and/or other procedures shall constitute conditions precedent to the assertion of any Claim(s) on behalf of Contractor. Contractor hereby expressly waives any Claim(s) of which Contractor was aware, or should have been aware through the exercise of reasonable diligence, whether or not the exact amounts of such Claims were ascertainable, which was/were not submitted to the District prior to Contractor proceeding to perform the Work, or portions of the Work, giving rise to such Claims. 27.2 Notice of Potential Claim: Contractor shall submit to the District, within fifteen (15) days after the event or occurrence giving rise to a Claim, or along with its application for final payment, whichever time period expires first, a Notice of Potential Claim (“NOPC”) presented in strict accordance with, this Article. The receipt by Contractor of the District’s final determination with respect to a proposed Change Order, change request or notice of delay seeking an adjustment of the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, or both, and/or any other action or conduct that may give rise to a Claim as defined in this Article, shall trigger the commencement of the time in which Contractor must issue the NOPC. Contractor hereby expressly waives all Claims not made within the aforesaid time limit. 27.2.1 Each written NOPC shall furnish the documentation to substantiate the request



for time and/or money (or any other relief) in the following format: (a) Introduction and Issue Identification; (b) Narrative Background; (c) Chronology of Pertinent Events and Facts; (d) Contractor’s Position (Reasons for District’s Potential Liability or

Basis for Relief Sought); (e) Supporting Documentation of Merit; (f) Supporting Documentation of Damages; (g) Schedule Analysis and Time Impact Analysis (if an adjustment of

Contract Time is sought); and (h) Supporting Documentation and Explanation of Relief Sought. 27.2.2 Supporting Documentation, as referenced in 27.2.1, must be cited by express reference, photocopies or detailed explanation. Supporting Documentation may include, without limitation, General Conditions, General Requirements, Technical Specifications, Plans and Drawings, Submittals, inspection records, schedules, test reports, daily reports, subcontracts, schedule analysis and fragmentary critical path schedules, photographs, technical reports, Requests for Information, field instructions, and any and all other related documentation, records, information or data necessary to support the merit of any Claim(s) asserted by Contractor. Upon the written request of the District, Contractor shall promptly augment or provide additional or further documentation, records, information or data regarding the merit of any Claim(s) asserted by Contractor. 27.2.3 Supporting Documentation of Damages, as referenced in 27.2.1(f), must be cited by express reference, photocopies or detailed explanation. Supporting Documentation of Damages may include, without limitation, all documentation and data related to the submission of the Contractor’s bid (or the bid of any subcontractor) and the performance of Work by Contractor or subcontractors, vendor and supplier files and cost records, invoices, general ledger, job cost reports and summaries, certified payroll reports, cost data associated with labor, materials, equipment, and services associated with the performance of the Work (or any aspect of the Work), purchase orders, documentation detailing as-planned and as–built costs, payment documentation and evidence of payments, material quantity reports, labor reports, accounting data and materials, and any and all other related documentation, records, information or data necessary to support the damages sought pursuant to any Claim(s) asserted by Contractor. Upon the written request of the District, Contractor shall promptly augment or provide additional or further documentation, records, information or data regarding the damages sought pursuant to any Claim(s) asserted by Contractor. 27.2.4 Within thirty (30) days after receipt of a written NOPC in strict compliance with this Article, representatives of the District and Contractor shall informally meet and confer, in person, at the offices of the District, to attempt to resolve the matters and issues identified in the NOPC. 27.3 Notice of Claim: If Contractor and District are unable to resolve all disputed matters and issues through the informal meet and confer process described in paragraph 27.2.4, Contractor shall submit a written Notice of Claim, certified under, and in strict accordance with, this Article, on or before the date the Contractor tenders its request for final payment to the District. A Notice of Claim may include multiple matters and issues; however, each Claim identified within the Notice of Claim must be separately identified and substantiated. Issues not separately identified and substantiated in the Notice of Claim will not be considered by the



District. Claim documentation must be complete when submitted, and may not be augmented by Contractor except with the advance written permission of the District. The evaluation of the Contractor’s Claim will be based on the District’s records and the documentation submitted in support of the Notice of Claim. Contractor hereby expressly waives all Claims not timely submitted, in complete and proper form and in strict accordance with this Article, on or before the date of final payment. 27.3.1 The written Notice of Claim shall conform to generally accepted accounting and auditing standards, and the documentation furnished by Contractor to substantiate the Claim shall be in the following format: (a) Introduction and Issue Identification; (b) Narrative Background; (c) Chronology of Pertinent Events and Facts; (d) Contractor’s Position (Reasons for District’s Potential Liability or

Basis for Relief Sought); (e) Supporting Documentation of Merit; (f) Supporting Documentation of Damages; (g) Schedule Analysis and Time Impact Analysis (if an adjustment of

Contract Time is sought); and (h) Supporting Documentation and Explanation of Relief Sought. 27.3.2 Supporting Documentation, as referenced in 27.3.1, must be cited by express reference, photocopies or detailed explanation. Supporting Documentation shall be complete at the time submitted to the District, and may include, without limitation, General Conditions, General Requirements, Technical Specifications, Plans and Drawings, Submittals, inspection records, schedules, test reports, daily reports, subcontracts, schedule analysis and fragmentary critical path schedules, photographs, technical reports, Requests for Information, field instructions, and any and all other related documentation, records, information or data necessary to support the merit of any Claim(s) asserted by Contractor. 27.3.3 Supporting Documentation of Damages, as referenced in 27.3.1(f), must be cited by express reference, photocopies or detailed explanation. Supporting Documentation of Damages shall be complete at the time submitted to the District, and may include, without limitation, all documentation and data related to the submission of the Contractor’s bid (or the bid of any subcontractor) and the performance of Work by Contractor or subcontractors, vendor and supplier files and cost records, invoices, general ledger, job cost reports and summaries, certified payroll reports, cost data associated with labor, materials, equipment, and services associated with the performance of the Work (or any aspect of the Work), purchase orders, documentation detailing as-planned and as–built costs, payment documentation and evidence of payments, material quantity reports, labor reports, accounting data and materials, and any and all other related documentation, records, information or data necessary to support the damages sought pursuant to any Claim(s) asserted by Contractor. 27.3.4 The Notice of Claim shall be submitted with a claim certification in strict accordance with Article 28 of the General Conditions. Failure to timely submit the claim certification shall be sufficient cause for the District to reject the Notice of Claim submission, and in such case, the Contractor’s Claim(s) shall be deemed waived. 27.3.5 Within thirty (30) days after receipt of a written Notice of Claim in strict compliance with this Article, and including the required claim certification, representatives of the District and Contractor possessing full settlement authority shall informally meet and



confer, in person, at the offices of the District, to attempt to resolve the matters and issues identified in the Notice of Claim. The Contractor representative shall be an owner or officer of the Contractor. In the event that the Contractor and District are unable to resolve all disputed matters and issues through the informal meet and confer process, the District shall publish a written response to the Contractor’s Notice of Claim within fifteen (15) days after the conclusion of the meet and confer process, and the District’s written response shall constitute the final written decision of the District with respect to the Notice of Claim. Contractor further understands and agrees that submission of a Notice of Claim, in strict conformance with all of the requirements of these Contract Documents, and rejection of all or part of said Claim by District, is a condition precedent to any action by Contractor against District, including but not limited to, the filing of a claim pursuant to Government Code section 900, and following, or the filing of a lawsuit against District.

27.4 Claims Equal To Or Less Than $375,000: This paragraph 27.4 is intended to apply solely to the resolution and handling of a Claim(s) denied or rejected by the District through its final decision issued pursuant to paragraph 27.3.5, and where the cumulative amount of such unresolved Claim(s) is/are Three Hundred Seventy-Five Thousand Dollars ($375,000), or less. With respect to any such unresolved Claim(s), the provisions of Public Contract Code section 20104 and following, shall apply and are hereby incorporated into these General Conditions and are reproduced below in italics. The documentation that is necessary to substantiate any Claim(s) submitted pursuant to this paragraph 27.4 must comply with the format and certification requirements for the Notice of Claim as set forth in paragraph 27.3. (A) Claims for $375,000 or below (Public Contract Code - §20104) Application of

article; provisions included in plans and specifications:

(a)(1) This article applies to all public works claims of three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000) or less which arise between a contractor and local agency.

(2) This article shall not apply to any claims resulting from a contract between a contractor and a public agency when the public agency has elected to resolve any disputes pursuant to Article 7.1 (commencing with §10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2.

(b)(1) "Public work" means "public works contract" as defined in Section 1101 but does not include any work or improvement contracted for by the state or the Regents of the University of California.

(2) "Claim" means a separate demand by the contractor for (A) a time extension, (B) payment of money or damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of, the contractor pursuant to the contract for a public work and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for or the claimant is not otherwise entitled to, or (C) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the local agency.

(c) The provisions of this article or a summary thereof shall be set forth in the plans or specifications for any work which may give rise to a claim under this article.



(d) This article applies only to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 1991.

(B) Claims for $375,000 or below (Public Contract Code - §20104.2) Claims; requirements; tort claims excluded:

(a) The claim shall be in writing and include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim. Claims must be filed on or before the date of Final Payment. Nothing in this subdivision is intended to extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by contract for the filing of claims.

(b)(1) For claims of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to any written claim within 45 Days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 Days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant.

(2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant.

(3) The local agency’s written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 15 Days after receipt of the further documentation or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information, whichever is greater.

(c)(1) For claims of over fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) and less than or equal to three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to all written claims within 60 Days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 Days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant.

(2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant.

(3) The local agency’s written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 30 Days after receipt of the further documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information or requested documentation, whichever is greater.

(d) If the claimant disputes the local agency’s written response, or the local agency fails to respond within the time prescribed, the claimant may so notify the local agency, in writing, either within 15 Days of receipt of the local agency’s response or within 15 Days of the local agency’s failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issue in dispute. Upon a demand, the local agency shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 Days for



settlement of the dispute.

(e) Following the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion remains in dispute, the claimant may file a claim as provided in Chapter 1 (commencing with §900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with §910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the claimant submits his or her written claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time that claim is denied as a result of the meet and confer process, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer process.

(f) This article does not apply to tort claims and nothing in this article is intended nor shall be construed to change the time periods for filing tort claims or actions specified by Chapter 1 (commencing with §900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with §910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code.

(C) Claims for $375,000 or below (Public Contract Code - § 20140.4) Civil action procedures; mediation and arbitration; trial de novo; witnesses:

(a) Within 60 Days, but no earlier than 30 Days, following the filing or responsive pleading, the court shall submit the matter to nonbinding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties. The mediation process shall provide for the selection within 15 Days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be commenced within 30 Days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within 15 Days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause showing to the court or by stipulation of both parties. If the parties fail to select a mediator within the 15-Day period, any party may petition the court to appoint the mediator.

(b)(1) If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with §1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the code of Civil Procedure, notwithstanding § 1141.11 of that code. The Civil Discovery Act (Title 4 (commencing with §2016.010) of Part 4 of the Code of Civil Procedure) shall apply to any proceeding brought under this subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration.

(2) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, upon stipulation of the parties, arbitrators appointed for purposes of this article shall be experienced in construction law, and, upon stipulation of the parties, mediators and arbitrators shall be paid necessary and reasonable hourly rates of pay not to exceed their customary rate, and such fees and expenses shall be paid equally by the parties, except in the case of arbitration where the arbitrator, for good cause, determines a different division. In no event shall these fees or expenses be paid by state or county funds.

(3) In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with § 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, any party who after receiving an arbitration award requests a trial de novo but does not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that chapter, pay the



attorney’s fees of the other party arising out of the trial de novo.

(c) The court may, upon request by any party, order any witnesses to participate in the mediation or arbitration process.

(D) Claims for $375,000 or below (Public Contract Code - §20140.6) Payment on undisputed portion of claim; interest on arbitration awards or judgments:

(a) No local agency shall fail to pay money as to any portion of a claim which is undisputed except as otherwise provided in the contract.

(b) In any suit filed under § 20104.4, the local agency shall pay interest at the legal rate on any arbitration award or judgment. The interest shall begin to accrue on the date the suit is filed in a court of law.

27.4.1 Agreement to Opt-Out: Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Contract Documents, the District and Contractor may mutually agree at any time, in writing, that any Claim(s) to which the obligations set forth in paragraph 27.4 apply (i.e., unresolved Claims in an amount equal to or less than $375,000) shall be subject to the dispute resolution requirements as set forth in paragraph 27.5 applicable to the resolution and handling of claims in an amount in excess of $375,000. Should the District and Contractor so agree in writing, the parties shall follow the requirements with respect to mediation and, if necessary, judicial reference, in accordance with paragraph 27.5.

27.5 Claims Exceeding $375,000: This paragraph 27.5 shall apply solely to the resolution and handling of a Claim(s) denied or rejected by the District through its final decision issued pursuant to paragraph 27.3.5, and where the cumulative amount of any such unresolved Claim(s) is/are in excess of Three Hundred Seventy-Five Thousand Dollars ($375,000).

27.5.1 Mediation: The District and Contractor (and Contractor’s surety or sureties, if requested to participate) agree to engage in good faith efforts to seek to resolve any outstanding Claims by mediation prior to proceeding with further dispute proceedings. This includes any claims or contentions raised by the District which remain unresolved. Mediation is a non-binding process intended to provide an opportunity for the parties to evaluate each other’s cases and arrive at a mutually agreeable solution. These provisions relating to consensual mediation shall not be construed or interpreted as mandatory arbitration. Contractor’s surety or sureties shall, at the request of the District (or Contractor), participate in any mediation proceedings.

27.5.1.1 Initiation of Mediation: Within ten (10) days after the District

issues its final decision pursuant to paragraph 27.3.5 either party may initiate mediation of a Claim or dispute by notifying the other party, in writing, of its intent to mediate any Claim(s) denied or rejected by the District or dispute. Contractor hereby expressly waives all Claims not timely submitted to mediation in accordance with paragraph 27.5.1.

27.5.1.2 Request for Mediation: A request for mediation must be in writing and set forth a brief statement that identifies the Claim(s), the asserted damages, the names, addresses, and phone numbers of the parties, and identify their authorized representative, if any, that will



participate in the mediation.

27.5.1.3 Selection of Mediator: Upon receipt of a request for mediation, within fourteen (14) calendar days, the parties will meet and confer to select an appropriate mediator agreeable to all parties. If the parties cannot agree on a mediator, they hereby agree to accept a mediator to be appointed by a recognized alternative dispute resolution organization, such as the American Arbitration Association or JAMS, Inc. The parties agree that any neutral selected or appointed to preside over the mediation shall be an attorney admitted to practice law in the State of California or a retired judge, and he or she shall possess at least 15 years experience practicing law in the substantive areas of public contracting, public construction contracts and construction litigation.

27.5.1.4 Times and Place of Mediation: The mediator, using advice and input from the parties, shall set the time of each mediation session, as well as the mediation protocol (i.e., submission of briefs, statement of damages, etc.). The mediation will be held at any convenient location agreeable to the mediator and the parties, as the mediator determines. All reasonable efforts will be made by the parties and the mediator to schedule the first session within thirty (30) calendar days after selection of the mediator.

27.5.1.5 Expenses: All fees paid to the mediator, including any required traveling and other expenses of the mediator, will be shared equally among the parties to the mediation.

27.5.1.6 Termination of Mediation: The mediation may be terminated: (a) by the execution of a settlement agreement by the parties; (b) by a written declaration of the mediator to the effect that further efforts at mediation are no longer worthwhile; or (c) by a writing on behalf of a party or parties to the effect that the mediation proceedings are terminated.

27.5.1.7 Privileges and Protections: All meetings, communications and correspondence relative to the mediation procedures set forth in this paragraph 27.5.1 shall be subject to any applicable mediation or settlement-related privilege afforded under California law, including, without limitation, California Evidence Code sections1115, and following and section 1152.

27.5.1.8 Statutory Claims Procedure: For purposes of the mediation

procedure set forth in this paragraph 27.5.1, the running of the time period within which a claim (other than a tort claim) must be filed pursuant to Chapter 1 (commencing with section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code shall be tolled from the time the Contractor submits a written request for mediation until the time that the mediation process is terminated. However, nothing in this provision is intended nor shall be construed to change the time periods for filing



tort claims or actions specified by Chapter 1 (commencing with section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code.

27.6 Presentation of Statutory Claim: If, at the termination of the mediation proceedings pursuant to this paragraph 27.5.1, the Claim(s), or any portion thereof, remain(s) in dispute, and as a condition precedent to the commencement by Contractor of any litigation arising from or related to the Contract Documents, the provisions of California law applicable to the presentation of claims and prosecution of disputes by the Contractor shall apply to Claims asserted by the Contractor, including, without limitation, Chapter 1 (commencing with section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. Contractor shall be responsible to fully satisfy and comply with all such requirements as may be applicable with respect to any such Claim(s) presented by Contractor. 27.7 Judicial Reference: The portions of this Article requiring the resolution of certain Claims and disputes pursuant to judicial reference shall be applicable to all litigation arising out of the Contract Documents involving the District, the Contractor and Contractor’s surety or sureties. Any litigation arising out of the Contract Documents shall be brought in Sacramento County Superior Court (“Court”), and Contractor expressly waives the removal provisions of California Code of Civil Procedure section 394. Contractor’s surety or sureties shall be bound by and subject to the dispute resolution provisions set forth herein, including the terms set forth in paragraph 27.7.

27.7.1 Governing Law: Any controversy or dispute between the District and Contractor arising under or related to the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, Claim(s) asserted on behalf of the Contractor against the District to which paragraph 27.5 may apply, shall be decided by general reference procedures pursuant to Code of Civil Procedure section 638, as modified by the provisions of this paragraph 27.7. Any variations from the statutory reference procedures set forth herein shall be deemed to be a stipulation by the parties to such revised procedures. Should any court or referee determine that the procedures set forth herein violate any statute, case law, rule or regulation, the terms of such statute, case law, rule or regulation shall control and govern.

27.7.2 Commencement: The general reference proceeding shall be commenced by a request or a motion filed with the Presiding Judge of the Superior Court of the County of Sacramento. Except to the extent modified herein, the reference shall be conducted in accordance with California law, including, but not limited to, the Code of Civil Procedure and the Evidence Code.

27.7.3 Referee; Reference: The referee appointed by the Court shall be an attorney admitted to practice law in the State of California, or a retired judge, and he or she shall possess at least 15 years experience practicing law in the substantive areas of public contracting, public construction contracts and construction litigation and having significant experience representing public entities and private entities. The Court shall appoint only one referee. The Referee shall provide the disclosure required by California Code of Civil Procedure section 1281.9, including the significant experience. Each party shall pay one-half (1/2) of the expenses of the general reference at the rate set by the Court pursuant to Code of Civil Procedure sections 645.1 and 1023, subject to a further cost allocation by the referee should the referee award costs, if any, to the prevailing party (however, attorneys’ fees and expert costs



shall not be awarded by the referee unless such an award is provided for in the Contract Documents or authorized by statute).

The District and Contractor hereby waive a jury trial or proceeding in

connection with any dispute or Claim(s) subject to this paragraph 27.7.

27.7.4 Location of Reference: All general reference proceedings hereunder shall be conducted in a mutually agreeable location in the County of Sacramento, State of California.

27.7.5 Discovery: Discovery shall be available as provided in the California Code of Civil procedure. The general reference hearing must commence within one hundred eighty (180) days after appointment of the referee, and the hearing shall not exceed twenty (20) days in length absent the agreement of the referee. 27.7.6 Final Statement of Decision: The referee shall report his or her findings to the Court in the form of a final statement of decision within twenty (20) days after the close of testimony, pursuant to Code of Civil Procedure §643. The referee’s final statement of decision shall be binding upon the District and the Contractor provided that the parties first have an opportunity to comment on and seek changes to the proposed statement of decision. Upon filing of the final statement of decision with the clerk of the Court, or with the judge where there is no clerk, the Court may enter judgment hereon. The decision of the referee shall be appealable as if rendered by the Court.

27.7.7 Costs and Expenses: The referee shall be authorized to award costs of the general reference, including, the costs of the referee and related expenses, to the prevailing party. However, the referee shall have no authority to award attorney’s fees or expert costs to the prevailing party absent express authorization to award attorneys’ fees and expert costs to the prevailing party under any applicable provision of the Contract Documents or pursuant to statutory authority.

27.8 Contractor’s Representations and Warranty: Contractor represents and warrants that it has the ability to generate and maintain complete and accurate cost accounting records that, if required, will reflect the actual costs of the Work incurred or avoided for multiple items of costs, and, on an event-by-event basis, the effect of multiple and concurrently occurring or caused delays on the progress of the Work. Accordingly, Contractor agrees that all Change Order Requests and Claims shall be itemized in a manner that, with reasonable mathematical certainty and without reliance upon probabilities or inferences, segregates on a discrete, event-by-event basis the direct, actual costs associated with each individual request for adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. 27.9 Exclusive Remedy: Contractor’s performance of its duties and obligations specified in this Article 27 and submission of a claim as provided in this Article 27 is Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the payment of money, extension of time, the adjustment or interpretation of contract terms or other relief in contract or in tort arising from the Contract Documents. This exclusive remedy and the limitation of liability (expressed herein and elsewhere throughout the Contract Documents) apply notwithstanding the completion, termination, suspension, cancellation, breach or rescission of the Work or the Contract Documents, negligence or strict liability of the District, its representatives, consultants, or agents, or the transfer of the Work or the Project to the District for any reason whatsoever. Contractor waives all claims of waiver,



estoppel, release, bar, or any other type of excuse for non-compliance with the claim submission requirements. Strict compliance with the notice and claim submission procedures stated in this Article is a condition precedent to Contractor’s right to commence litigation, file a claim under the Government Claims Act or commence any other legal proceeding of any nature whatsoever. No claim or issue not specifically raised in a timely protest and timely claim submitted under this Article 27 may ever, under any circumstances, be asserted in any claim under the Government Claims Act, subsequent litigation or other legal proceeding of any nature whatsoever. 27.10 Disputes Involving Architect, Engineer or Design Professionals: In the event that any Claim(s) asserted by the Contractor arise from or is/are related, in any manner, to conduct or actions for which the Project Architect or Engineer or other design professional may be responsible, the parties acknowledge and agree that the District may, in its sole discretion, require the participation and/or joinder of the Project Architect or Engineer or other design professional in any dispute proceeding under this Article. This right shall remain solely within the discretion of the District, and Contractor shall have no rights under the Contract Documents to require or seek to compel the participation and/or joinder of the Project Architect or Engineer or other design professional in any dispute proceeding under this Article. 27.11 Application of Article: The procedures and remedies set forth in Article 27 shall not apply to: (i) any claim by the District against the Contractor or its surety or sureties; (ii) any claim or dispute relating to stop notices; or (iii) any claim relating to the approval, refusal to approve or substitution of any subcontractor, regardless of tier, pursuant to Public Contract Code section 4700, and following; except, however, that any claim, demand, cause of action or damage asserted by the District against the Contractor or its surety or sureties shall be subject to the judicial reference requirements set forth at paragraph 27.7.

28. FALSE CLAIMS: California Penal Code section 72, provides that any person who presents for payment with intent to defraud any district board or officer, any false or fraudulent claim, bill, account, voucher, or writing, is punishable by fines not exceeding ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00) and/or imprisonment in the state prison. 28.1 Government Code sections 12650, and following, pertains to civil penalties that may be recovered from persons (including corporations, etc.) for presenting a false claim for payment or approval, presenting a false record or statement to get a false claim paid or approved, or other acts, to any officer or employee of any political subdivision of the State of California. Any person or corporation violating the provisions of Government Code sections 12650, and following, shall be liable for three times the amount of the damages of the political subdivision, plus a civil penalty, plus costs. 28.2 All Claims by Contractor, shall include the following certification, properly completed and executed by Contractor or an officer of Contractor: 28.3 I, , BEING THE (MUST BE AN OFFICER) OF (CONTRACTOR), DECLARE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA, AND DO PERSONALLY CERTIFY AND ATTEST THAT: I HAVE THOROUGHLY REVIEWED THE ATTACHED CLAIM FOR ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION AND/OR EXTENSION OF TIME, AND KNOW ITS CONTENTS, AND SAID CLAIM IS TRUTHFUL AND ACCURATE; THAT THE AMOUNT REQUESTED ACCURATELY REFLECTS THE CONTRACT ADJUSTMENT FOR WHICH THE OWNER



IS LIABLE; AND, FURTHER, THAT I AM FAMILIAR WITH CALIFORNIA PENAL CODE SECTION 72 AND CALIFORNIA GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 12650, ET SEQ, PERTAINING TO FALSE CLAIMS, AND FURTHER KNOW AND UNDERSTAND THAT SUBMISSION OR CERTIFICATION OF A FALSE CLAIM MAY LEAD TO FINES, IMPRISONMENT AND/OR OTHER SEVERE LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.

29. PAYMENTS: Contractor warrants and represents that upon submission of an application for

payment, all work for which certificates of payment have been previously issued and payment has been received from District, shall be free and clear of all claims, stop notices, security interests, and encumbrances in favor of Contractor, subcontractors or other persons or firms entitled to make claims by reason of having provided labor, materials, or equipment related to the work and all work covered by that application for payment has been performed in strict compliance with the Contract Documents.

30. COST AND PRICING DATA: All cost and pricing data submitted by the Contractor to the District with respect to any change, prospective or completed, or any claim for extra compensation shall be a true, complete, accurate, and current representation of actual cost and pricing of the work. The District or its authorized representative may require a formal certification as to cost and pricing data submitted by the Contractor. Certification shall be in the form acceptable to District.

31. PROCEED WITH WORK: Notwithstanding any Change Order or Construction Change Directive, or the existence of any dispute or Claim, Contractor shall not cause any delay, cessation, or termination in or of Contractor’s performance of the work, but shall diligently proceed with performance of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

32. ACCESS TO RECORDS: The Contractor must maintain all books, records, documents, electronic

data, and other information directly pertinent to the performance of the Work, all in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and practices consistently applied, and which shall include, without limitation, all bid worksheets, bids and bid files, subcontractor bids and proposals, estimates, cost accounting data, accounting records, payroll records, time sheets, cancelled checks, profit and loss statements, balance sheets, general ledgers, job cost reports, Project correspondence including, but not limited to, all correspondence and communications between Contractor and its sureties and subcontractors/vendors, Project files, scheduling information, and other records of the Contractor and all subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, or materialmen directly or indirectly pertinent to the Work, original as well as change and claimed extra work, to verify and evaluate the accuracy of cost and pricing data and/or schedule impacts submitted with any Application for Payment, Change Order or Change Order Request, prospective or completed, or any Claim(s) for which additional compensation or an extension of Contract Time has been requested, or Notice of Potential Claim which has been or will be tendered. The Contractor must also maintain all financial information and data, in hard copy and electronic formats, used by the Contractor as it pertains to the Project and the discharge of the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. The District or its representative (including, without limitation, the Project Architect) shall be allowed have access upon 24 hours advanced written notice, at all times during normal business hours, to all Contractor’s documents and data referenced herein (in both hard-copy and electronic formats), as well as all of Contractor’s books, summary reports, records, accounts, estimates, documents, detailed financial information, certified payroll records, and all other relevant information and documentation for the purposes of inspection, audit, and copying. Electronic data and information shall be made available for inspection, audit, and copying in addition to any hard copies of said documents, records and data, even if originals and/or hard copies are also



produced. The Contractor will, at no cost to District, provide proper facilities for such access, inspection and copying purposes. However, the costs associated with the reproduction of such data shall be borne by the District. 32.1 The documents, records and data referenced in this Article 32, which must be maintained and produced for inspection, audit, and copying, shall include not only original documents, records and data and/or hard-copies of the same, but also any and all documents, records and data which are kept on computer hard-drives, disks, tape or digital back-up, servers or networks in their native electronic format. 32.2 Contractor agrees to include and make the requirements of this section applicable to all Subcontracts (of any tier), agreements/contracts or purchase orders pertaining to the performance of the Work in excess of $10,000. 32.3 Contractor agrees to provide all information and reports (in hard copy and electronic formats) resulting from its access to records of lower tier entities and/or suppliers to the District within the time periods set forth above. 32.4 Records as maintained in the Contractor’s ordinary course of business (i.e., paper format, electronic format or both) must be maintained and made available during the performance of Work and for five (5) years after Final Payment, and until final settlement of all disputes, Claims, or litigation, whichever occurs later. In addition, those records which relate to any portion of the Contract Documents, to any Change Order or Change Order Request, to any dispute, to any litigation or other legal proceeding, to the settlement of any Claim(s) arising out of such performance, or to the cost or items to which an audit exception has been taken, must be maintained and made available until Final Payment or final resolution of such dispute, litigation, Claim(s), whichever occurs later. 32.5 The right of access provisions of this Article shall apply to all records, including all financial records and data compilations, pertaining to the Contractor’s performance of the Work:

(a) to the extent the records pertain directly to Contract performance, or the performance of any subcontractor (of any tier), supplier, fabricator, or materialman;

(b) to the extent required for verification of the costs incurred where such costs are the basis for billings pursuant to this Contract, including Applications for payment and evaluation of Change Orders Requests and Claims;

(c) to the extent there is any indication to the District of a violation of the California False Claims statute or that fraud, gross abuse, or corrupt practices may be involved; and/or

(d) if the Contract is terminated for default or convenience.

32.6 The parties agree that in the event Contractor or any subcontractor (of any tier), supplier, fabricator, or materialman fails to comply with this Article, it would be difficult for the District to determine its actual damages; therefore, Contractor agrees to pay District, as liquidated damages, the sum of Two hundred Dollars ($200.00), which Contractor agrees is reasonable under the circumstances, for each and every calendar day which Contractor or a subcontractor,



supplier, fabricator, or materialman fails or refuses to provide the District, Architect, and/or their authorized representatives, access to the materials specified in this section.

32.7 Access to records is not limited to the required retention period(s) as set forth in the Contract Documents or as otherwise required by applicable law. The District’s Authorized Representative or designee will have access to records at any reasonable time for as long as the records are maintained.

33. DISMISSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY EMPLOYEES: If any person employed by the Contractor, or any subcontractor, shall fail or refuse to carry out the directions of the Architect or District; or, in the opinion of the Architect or District, is incompetent, unfaithful, intemperate, or disorderly; uses threatening or abusive language to any person representing the Architect or District on the work; or is otherwise unsatisfactory, he or she shall be removed from the work immediately, and shall not again be employed on the work.

34. TERMINATION OF UNSATISFACTORY SUBCONTRACTS: When any portion of the work which has been subcontracted by the Contractor is not being prosecuted in a satisfactory manner, the subcontract for such work shall be terminated immediately by the Contractor upon written notice from the Architect or District, and the subcontractor shall not again be employed on the type of work in which his or her performance was unsatisfactory.

35. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK: The District shall have the authority to suspend the work wholly or in part for such period as it may deem necessary (up to 120 days), due to unsuitable weather, or to any other conditions it considers unfavorable for the suitable prosecution of the work, or for such time as it may deem necessary, due to the failure on the part of the Contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any provisions of the Contract, or for any other reason. The Contractor shall immediately comply with such written order of the District to suspend the work wholly or in part. The suspended work shall be resumed only when conditions are favorable or methods are corrected, as ordered or approved in writing by the District. 35.1 If a suspension of the work is ordered by the District due to the failure on the part of the Contractor to carry out orders or to perform any provisions of the Contract, the days on which the suspension order is in effect shall be considered working days, and shall not in any way modify or invalidate any of the provisions of this Contract, and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any damages or compensation on account of such suspension or delay.

36. TERMINATION OF CONTRACTOR’S CONTROL OVER THE WORK: Whenever, in the opinion of the District, the Contractor has failed to supply an adequate force of labor, equipment, or materials of proper quality, or has failed in any other material respect to prosecute the work with the diligence specified in the Contract; or if Contractor should refuse or fail to comply with laws, ordinances, or directions of the District or Architect; or if Contractor should fail to make prompt payments to subcontractors or for labor or materials; or otherwise be in material breach of this Contract; the District may give written notice of at least five (5) calendar days to the Contractor and Contractor’s sureties that if the defaults are not remedied within a time specified in such notice, the Contractor’s control over the work will be terminated. 36.1 If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt, or make an assignment for the benefit of Contractor’s creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of Contractor’s insolvency, the District may declare the Contractor’s control over the work terminated, and so



notify the Contractor and Contractor’s sureties. 36.2 Upon such termination, the District may take possession, and use all or any part, of the Contractor’s materials, tools, equipment, and appliances upon the premises to complete the work; the District assuming responsibility for the final relinquishment of such equipment at the conclusion of the work, or sooner, at its option, in as good condition as when it was taken over, reasonable wear and tear excepted; and the District agrees to pay for such materials and the use of said equipment at a reasonable compensation. 36.3 Whenever Contractor shall be and declared by District to be in default under the Contract, the surety shall promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: (1) Undertake through its agents or independent contractors, reasonably acceptable to District, to complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions and to pay and perform all obligations of Contractor under the Contract, including without limitation, all obligations with respect to warranties, quality of workmanship, guarantees, and payment of liquidated damages, or at surety’s election, or, if required by District; (2) Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, and, upon determination by the District of the lowest responsive responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and District and make available as work progresses (even though there should be a default or a succession of defaults under the contract or contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract Sum, and to pay and perform all obligations of Contractor under the Contract, including, without limitation, all obligations with respect to warranties, guarantees, and the payment of liquidated damages; or (3) Tender to the District via cashier’s draft the full penal sum of the performance bond. The need for the surety to act promptly in response to a demand by the District is material to the overall completion of the project. The use of the word "promptly" in this article means "within thirty (30) calendar days". The failure of the surety to perform timely as required hereunder shall enable the District, in its discretion, to complete the work or designated portion of the work by whatever reasonable method(s) District may deem expedient and appropriate and in such event District shall have the right to recover from surety the amount of actual damages incurred by District in excess of the amount of unpaid contract sum. "Actual damages" as used herein includes all reasonably necessary costs incurred to complete the work, including, but not limited to, the construction administration, management and project management costs incurred by the District’s personnel as well as third parties retained by the District, as well as those incidental and consequential costs incurred due to delays, loss of use, storage, personnel and interest expenses incurred. 36.4 If the Contractor’s control over the work is terminated as provided above, the Contractor is not entitled to receive any portion of the amount to be paid under the Contract until it is fully completed. After completion, if the unpaid balance exceeds the sum of the amount expended by the District in finishing the work, plus all damages sustained, or to be sustained, by the District, plus any unpaid claims on account of labor, materials, tools, equipment, or supplies contracted for by the Contractor for the work herein contemplated, the excess not otherwise required by these Contract Documents to be retained shall be paid the Contractor. If the sum so expended exceeds the unpaid balance, the Contractor and Contractor’s surety are liable to the District for the amount of such excess. If the surety completes the Contract work as provided above, such surety shall be subrogated to money due under the Contract, and to money which shall become due in the course of completion by the surety. However, Contractor and surety agree that any subrogation rights of surety are subordinate to and inferior to rights of District. 36.5 The District reserves the right to terminate the work for its convenience upon written



notice to Contractor. Upon such termination, Contractor agrees to waive any claims for damages, including loss of anticipated profits, on account thereof; and, as the sole right and remedy of Contractor, the Contractor shall be paid its reasonable, actual and direct costs for that portion of the work performed to the date of termination, reasonable costs associated with demobilization, plus fifteen percent (15%) of all such direct costs for overhead and profit. However, in no event shall the costs paid to Contractor pursuant to this Article exceed the costs (exclusive of any overhead and mark-up) allocated to those portions of the work performed to the date of termination as set forth in Contractor’s accepted cost-loaded schedule of values. Upon this written notice, Contractor shall, unless the notice directs otherwise, do the following: (1) Immediately discontinue the work to the extent specified in the notice; (2) Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, equipment, services, or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the work as is not discontinued; (3) Promptly cancel, on the most favorable terms reasonably possible, all subcontracts to the extent they relate to the performance of the discontinued portion of the work; and (4) thereafter do only such work as may be necessary to preserve and protect work already in progress and to protect materials, plants, and equipment on the Project site or in transit thereto. In no event shall District be liable for costs incurred by Contractor or subcontractors after the date of the notice of termination. Such non-recoverable costs include, but are not limited to, anticipated profits on contract, post termination employee salaries, post-termination administrative expenses, post-termination or unabsorbed overhead, costs of preparing and submitting bid, attorney’s fees or other costs related to prosecution of a claim or lawsuit. In determining the amount due Contractor hereunder, there shall be deducted all unliquidated advance or other payments on account made to Contractor applicable to the terminated portion of the contract, and any claim which the District may have against Contractor.

36.6 In the event that a termination for cause is determined to have been made wrongfully or without cause then the termination shall be treated as a termination for convenience and the Contractor shall have no greater rights than it would have had if a termination for convenience had been effected. Any Contractor claim arising out of a termination for default shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents governing claims and calculated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents on Change Orders and claims. No other loss, cost, damage, expense, or liability may be claimed, requested or recovered by Contractor.

37. FINAL INSPECTION, FIELD ACCEPTANCE, AND ACCEPTANCE: Final acceptance by

the District shall cause the commencement of guarantee periods.

38. CLEANING UP: Throughout the construction period, the Contractor shall keep the site of the work in a presentable condition, dispose of any surplus materials, clean out all drainage ditches and structures, and repair any fences or other property damaged during the progress of the work, to the satisfaction of the Architect and District. 38.1 Upon completion of the work, and prior to requesting final inspection, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the site of the work of all rubbish, excess material, and equipment, and all portions of the work shall be left in a neat and orderly condition. The final inspection will not be made until this has been accomplished. 38.2 If Contractor fails or refuses to fulfill these obligations to the District’s satisfaction, District may, at its option, undertake these obligations, and withhold the cost of performing these obligations, plus an additional fee of twenty-five percent (25%) for administrative costs, from payments to Contractor.



39. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS AND REGULATIONS: The Contractor shall keep himself fully

informed of, and shall observe and comply with, and shall cause any and all persons, firms, or corporations employed by Contractor or under him, to observe and comply with all State and federal laws, and county and municipal ordinances, regulations, orders, and decrees which in any manner affect those engaged or employed in the work, or the materials used in the work, or which in any way affect the conduct of the work. Particular attention is called to the following: 39.1 Hours Of Labor: Eight hours of labor shall constitute a legal days’ work, and the Contractor or any subcontractor under him, in the performance of the Contract, shall not require more than eight hours of labor in any calendar day, and forty hours of labor in any calendar week, from any person employed by Contractor in the performance of the work under this Contract, except as permitted under the provisions of section 1815 of the Labor Code of the State of California. The Contractor shall forfeit, as penalty to the District, Fifty Dollars ($50.00) for each worker employed by Contractor or any subcontractor under Contractor in the performance of the Contract for each calendar day during which any worker is required or permitted to labor more than eight hours and for each calendar week during which any worker is required or permitted to labor more than forty hours, in violation of the provisions of such Labor Code. No work other than overtime and shift work shall be done between the hours of 7:00PM and 7:00AM, except such work as is necessary for the proper care and protection of the work already performed or except in case of an emergency; excepting that overtime and shift work may be established by the Contractor as provided in Article 53. 39.2 Prevailing Wage: Pursuant to section 1770, and following, of the California Labor Code, the Contractor shall pay not less than the prevailing rate of per diem wages as determined by the Director of the California Department of Industrial Relations. Copies of such prevailing rate of per diem wages are on file at the office of Los Rios Community College District, 1919 Spanos Court, Sacramento, California, 95825, which copies shall be made available to any interested party on request. The Contractor shall forfeit, as penalty to the District, Fifty Dollars ($50.00) for each calendar day or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the stipulated prevailing rates for any work done under the Contract by Contractor or by any subcontractor under him, in violation of the provisions of such Labor Code. 39.3 Labor Discrimination: Contractor shall comply with section 1735 of the Labor Code of the State of California, which prohibits discrimination in the employment of persons upon public works upon any of the bases listed in Government Code section 12940. 39.4 Apprentices: Attention is directed to section 1777.5 of the Labor Code of the State of California concerning employment of apprentices, and the Contractor is required to comply with the provisions of said section. 39.5 Workers’ Compensation: Pursuant to the requirements of section 1860 of the Labor Code, the Contractor is required to secure the payment of Workers’ Compensation to Contractor’s employees in accordance with the provisions of section 3700 of the Labor Code. Prior to the commencement of work, the Contractor shall sign and file with the Architect a certification in the following form:



"I am aware of the provisions of section 3700 of the Labor Code, which requires every employer to be insured against liability for Workers’ Compensation, or to undertake self insurance in accordance with the provisions of that Code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this Contract." Said certification is included in the Contract, and signature and return of the Contract shall constitute signing and filing of the said certificate. 39.6 Use Of Pesticides: The Contractor shall comply with all rules and regulations of the Department of Food and Agriculture, the Department of Health, the Department of Industrial Relations, and all other agencies that govern the use of pesticides required in the performance of the work on the Contract.

(a) Pesticides shall include, but shall not be limited to, herbicides, insecticides, fungicides, rodenticides, germicides, nematocides, bactericides, inhibitors, fumigants, defoliants, desiccants, soil sterilants, and repellents.

(b) Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing, repelling,

mitigating, or destroying weeds, insects, diseases, rodents, or nematodes, and any substance or mixture of substances intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant shall be considered a pesticide.

39.7 Payroll Records: Attention is directed to section 1776 of the California Labor Code, a portion of which is quoted below. Regulations implementing said section 1776 are located in section 16000, and sections 16401 through 16403 of Title 8, California Administrative Code. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by Contractor’s subcontractors.

(a) Each Contractor and subcontractor shall keep an accurate payroll record showing the name, address, Social Security number, work classification, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker or other employee employed by him or her in conjunction with the public work.

(b) The payroll records enumerated under subdivision (a) shall be certified and

shall be available for inspection at all reasonable hours at the principal office of the Contractor on the following basis:

(1) A certified copy of an employee’s payroll record shall be made available for inspection or furnished to the employee or his or her authorized representative on request. (2) A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (a) shall be made available for inspection or furnished upon request to a representative of the body awarding the contract, the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, and the Division of Apprenticeship Standards of the Department of Industrial Relations. (3) A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (a) shall be made available upon request by the public for inspection and copies thereof made; provided, however, that a request by the public shall be made through



either the body awarding the contract, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards, or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement. If the requested payroll records have not been provided pursuant to paragraph (2), the requesting party shall, prior to being provided the records, reimburse the costs of preparation by the Contractor, subcontractors, and the entity through which the request was made. The public shall not be given access to the records at the principal office of the Contractor.

(d) Each Contractor shall file a certified copy of the records enumerated in

subdivision (a) with the entity that requested the records within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request.

(e) Any copy of records made available for inspection as copies and furnished

upon request to the public or any public agency by the awarding body, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards, or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement shall be marked or obliterated in such a manner as to prevent disclosure of an individual’s name, address, and Social Security number. The name and address of the Contractor awarded the contract or performing the contract shall not be marked or obliterated.

(f) The Contractor shall inform the body awarding the contract of the location of

the records enumerated under subdivision (a), including the street address, city and county, and shall, within five (5) working days provide a notice of a change of location and address.

(g) In the event of noncompliance with the requirements of this section, the

Contractor shall have ten (10) days in which to comply subsequent to receipt of written notice specifying in what respects the Contractor must comply with this section. Should noncompliance still be evident after the ten-day period, the Contractor shall, as a penalty to the state or political subdivision on whose behalf the contract is made or awarded, forfeit twenty-five dollars ($25.00) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker, until strict compliance is effectuated. Upon the request of the Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, these penalties shall be withheld from progress payments then due.

The penalties specified in subdivision (f) of Labor Code section 1776 for noncompliance with the provisions of said section 1776 may be deducted from any moneys due or which may become due to the Contractor. 39.7 Failure to deliver to District specific information, records, reports, certifications, or any other documents required for compliance with these Contract Documents shall be considered noncompliance. 39.8 Contractors found by the District to be in noncompliance are to be advised of the specific deficiencies and urged to make immediate corrections. They should also be advised that monetary deductions might be made for failure to effect corrections or delinquencies. 39.9 Deductions for noncompliance will be in addition to all other deductions provided for in this Contract, and will apply irrespective of the number of instances of noncompliance. Deductions may be made separately and additively for each estimate period in which a new



deficiency appears. When all deficiencies for a period have been corrected, the deduction covering that period will be released on the next progress payment. Otherwise, the deduction will be retained.

39.10 Contractor shall not employ on the Project any subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work pursuant to California Labor Code sections 1777.1, or 1777.7.

39.11 Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the District’s Labor Compliance Program and all governing laws. A copy of the Labor Compliance Program may be obtained from the District if requested in writing by Contractor. 39.12 To the extent the work as set forth in the Contract Documents concerns the repair or renovation of one or more roofs, and the content of the scope of work triggers the duties set forth in Public Contract Code section 3000, and following, relating to Roofing Projects, as defined therein, the parties agree that they shall fully comply with the legal requirements set forth therein. 39.13 Division of State Architect (DSA) Verified Reports and Certificate of Compliance: The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that a material obligation of the Contractor under the Contract Documents is the completion by the Contractor of all actions and activities which by the Contract Documents or by operation of applicable law, code, rule or regulation are the responsibility of the Contractor relating to DSA reporting requirements pursuant to Education Code section 81141 (including amendments thereto) and issuance of DSA’s Certificate of Compliance for the Project pursuant to Education Code section 81147 (including amendments thereto) upon completion of Project construction. The foregoing shall include without limitation, all contractor obligations imposed by DSA PR 13-10, the timely preparation, completion and filing of Verified Reports during Project construction and the filing of the Final Verified Report with DSA within ten (10) days of the determination of Project Final Completion. The Contractor shall provide the Project Inspector, Architect, Construction Manager retained by the District, if any, for the Project and the District with copies of all Verified Reports completed by the Contractor and submitted to DSA; such copies shall be provided to the Project Inspector, Architect, the Construction Manager and the District concurrently with the Contractor’s submission thereof to DSA. 39.14 Final Verified Report Retention: Notwithstanding any provision of the Contract Documents to the contrary, the Contractor and the District stipulate that the amount to be withheld by the District pending completion and filing of the Final Verified Report with DSA by Contractor is Twelve Thousand Dollars ($12,000) (“the Final Verified Report Retention”). The Final Verified Report Retention is part of the retention withheld and retained by the District from Progress Payments disbursed to the Contractor during Project construction. If the Contractor fails to file the Final Verified Report with DSA within ten (10) days of the determination of Project Final Completion, notwithstanding the preparation or filing of such Final Verified Report by the Contractor thereafter, the District may in the sole and exclusive discretion of the District retain and withhold from disbursement that portion of the Final Verified Report Retention which is necessary to compensate the District for the damages sustained by the District as a result of the Contractor’s to have timely discharged its obligations hereunder. 39.15 Equal Opportunity: CONSULTANT shall comply with the Executive Order 11246 as currently amended and as supplemented in Department of Labor regulations (41 CFR Chapter 60), hereinafter collectively referred to as the “Regulations.” CONSULTANT, with regards to



the work performed by it after award and prior to completion of the work pursuant to this Agreement, shall not unlawfully discriminate on the ground of race, color, national origin, ancestry, religion, sex, age, marital status, disability, veteran status, sexual orientation, or medical condition as defined in Section 12926 of the California Government Code. In all solicitations made by CONSULTANT for work to be performed under any subcontract, CONSULTANT shall notify each potential subcontractor or supplier of CONSULTANT’S obligation under this Agreement and the Regulations. CONSULTANT shall not participate either directly or indirectly in discrimination prohibited by the Regulations.

40. RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR: The Contractor shall do all of the work and

furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and appliances, except as otherwise herein expressly stipulated, necessary, or proper for performing and completing the work herein required, including any Change Order or Construction Change Directive work, disputed work or extra work directed by the District or Architect, within the time specified.

40.1 If the Contractor discovers any discrepancies during the course of the work between the Contract Documents and conditions in the field, or any errors or omissions in the Contract Documents and conditions in the field, or any errors or omissions in the Contract drawings, specifications, or layout given by stakes, points, or instructions, it shall be the Contractor’s duty to inform the Architect immediately, and the Architect shall promptly verify the same. Any work done after such discovery until authorized in writing by the Architect will be done at the Contractor’s risk. 40.2 In no case shall the use of subcontractors in any way alter the position of the Contractor or Contractor’s sureties with relation to this Contract. When a subcontractor is used, the responsibility for every portion of the work shall still remain with the Contractor. 40.3 The Contractor shall pay, when due, all valid claims of subcontractors, suppliers, and workers with respect to the project. The mention herein of any specific duty or responsibility imposed upon the Contractor shall not be construed as a limitation or restriction of any other responsibility or duty imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract, said reference being made herein merely for the purpose of explaining the specific duty or responsibility.

41. INDEMNIFICATION: 41.1 Contractor’s Performance: To the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and save harmless District and Architect (including their inspectors, project managers, Trustees, officers, agents, members, employees, affiliates, consultants, sub-consultants, and representatives), and each of them, of and from any and all claims, demands, suits, causes of action, damages, costs, expenses, attorneys’ fees, losses, or liability, in law or in equity, of every kind and nature whatsoever related to, arising out of, or in connection with, Contractor’s operations to be performed under this Contract, including, but not limited to:

(a) Personal injury (including, but not limited to, bodily injury, emotional injury or distress, sickness, or disease) or death to persons, including, but not limited to, any employees or agents of Contractor, District, Architect, or any subcontractor, or sub-consultant, or damage to property of the District or any other person or entity, and inclusive of



the Project and the Work itself (including loss of use thereof), arising out of or resulting from the Contract Documents and/or the performance of the Work, or, except as otherwise prescribed by applicable law, as caused or alleged to be caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, District, or Architect, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable;

(b) Penalties threatened, sought, or imposed on account of the violation of

any law, order, citation, rule, regulation, standard, ordinance, or statute, caused by the action or inaction of Contractor;

(c) Alleged infringement of any patent rights, which may be brought

arising out of Contractor’s work;

(d) Claims and liens for labor performed or materials used or furnished to be used on the job, including all incidental or consequential damages from such claims or liens;

(e) Failure of Contractor to comply with the provisions of the Contract

Documents relating to insurance; and

(f) Any violation or infraction by Contractor of any law, order, citation, rule, regulation, standard, ordinance, or statute in any way relating to the occupational, health, or safety of employees.

The obligations set forth in this section shall not be limited by the insurance requirements set forth in these Contract Documents. Contractor’s indemnification obligations will not include indemnification for claims which arise as the result of the active negligence of District, or the sole negligence or willful misconduct of District, its agents, servants or independent contractors who are directly responsible to District, or for defects in design furnished by such persons. It is intended that this Article shall comply with California Civil Code section 2782, and following, to the extent applicable to the Contractor’s obligations as set forth in this Article. If it is determined by a Court of competent jurisdiction that any aspect of this Article exceeds the restrictions or limitations under California law applicable to indemnity obligations, only that portion which exceeds the restrictions or limitations under California law shall be null and void, and all remaining indemnity obligations shall be fully enforceable to the fullest extent allowed under California law.

42. PERMITS AND LICENSES: The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses necessary for the normal conduct of its business and construction operations, and all costs associated therewith shall be paid by Contractor. The Environmental Quality Act of 1970 may be applicable to permits, licenses, and other authorizations that the Contractor must obtain from local agencies in connection with performing the work of the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of said statutes in obtaining such permits, licenses, and other authorizations, and they shall be obtained in sufficient time to prevent delays to the work. In the event that the District has obtained permits, licenses, or other authorizations applicable to the work in conformance with



the requirements in said Environmental Quality Act of 1970, the Contractor shall comply with the provisions of said permits, licenses, and other authorizations.

43. PROTECTION OF DISTRICT AGAINST PATENT CLAIMS: The Contractor shall assume

all costs arising from the use of patented materials, equipment, devices, or processes used on or incorporated in the work.

44. PROTECTION OF WORKERS: The Contractor shall conform to the rules and regulations

pertaining to safety established by the California Division of Industrial Safety and any other governing body having jurisdiction over the work. The Contractor shall immediately replace or repair any unsafe ladder, scaffolding, shoring, or bracing, or correct any other dangerous or hazardous situation that may exist or that the Architect or Architect may indicate. Failure of the Architect to suspend the work or notify the Contractor of the inadequacy of the safety precautions or noncompliance with the law shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.

44.1 The Contractor is warned that when the work involves existing sewers and appurtenances that have been exposed to sewage and industrial wastes, these facilities shall be considered contaminated with disease-causing organisms. Personnel in contact with contaminated facilities, debris, wastewater, or similar items shall be advised by the Contractor of the necessary precautions that must be taken to avoid becoming diseased. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to urge his/her personnel to observe a strict regimen of proper hygienic precautions, including any inoculations recommended by the local public health officer. 44.2 Because of the potential danger of solvents, gasoline, and other hazardous material in the existing sewers and storm drain pipes; these areas shall be considered hazardous. The Contractor shall be aware of these dangers and shall comply with Article 108, "Confined Spaces," of the General Industrial Safety Orders contained in Title 8 of the California Administrative Code. 44.3 In the event that this Contract requires the excavation of any trench or trenches in excess of five feet in depth, Contractor shall prepare a detailed design plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for worker protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of such trenches. Said detailed design plan and subsequent excavating operations shall fully comply with all local, state and federal regulations including, but not limited to, the Construction Safety Orders, section 1539, Permits and section 1540 and following, Excavation.

45. PROTECTION OF WORK, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: The Contractor shall protect the work, materials, and equipment from damage due to the nature of the work, the action of the elements, trespassers, or other causes. The Contractor shall properly store materials and equipment, and erect such temporary structures as are required to protect them from damage, including, but not limited to, construction fencing.

45.1 Contractor shall obtain permits for, install and maintain in a safe condition whatever scaffolds, hoisting equipment, barricades, walkways or other temporary structures that may be required to accomplish the work. Such structures shall be adequate for the intended use and installed and maintained in accordance with all applicable laws or regulations. 45.2 Contractor shall provide and maintain any and all facilities that may be required for dewatering in order that work may proceed on the project and if it is necessary for dewatering



to occur continually Contractor shall provide such facilities as necessary to allow such to occur without interruption of service.

45.3 Contractor shall be responsible for each operation and all work, temporary and permanent. Contractor shall take whatever care is necessary to avoid damage to existing facilities or utilities to remain, whether on the Project or adjacent to it, and he shall be liable for any damage thereto or interruption of service due to his activities. Contractor shall repair or replace all damage to the satisfaction of the District without cost to the District. 45.4 Contractor shall provide for all shoring , bracing or underpinning necessary to protect property or improvements adjacent to the project work area shown on the drawings, and shall be responsible at Contractor’s sole expense for all legal notices to adjacent owners as the law may require. 45.5 Contractor shall also provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of the exterior roof and walls, as the case may be, for successive areas of the building as the work progresses, including any existing facilities adjacent to or affected by the work, whether occupied by the District or not. Such weather tight enclosure shall provide for acceptable working conditions, weather protection, protection for materials, allow for effective heating and cooling and prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Contractor shall bear all costs of damage to the work or existing facilities caused by weather.

46. SANITARY PROVISIONS: See section 01 50 00 of the Specifications. 47. EXISTING UTILITIES: See section 01 71 23 of the Specifications. 48. COOPERATION WITH OTHERS: The District or adjacent property owner may perform other

work adjacent to or within the project area, concurrent with the Contractor’s operations. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with District in all operations that coincide with other work being performed, and provide District with such scheduling and other information as may be required by District to perform such other work. The Contractor shall conduct operations to minimize interference with the work of other forces or contractors performing such work. This work performed by a second contractor may include work which is incomplete or in dispute with the Contractor. Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its work in such a manner that the work of others will not be interfered with and its work will not be delayed by the work of others.

48.1 Any disputes or conflicts that may arise between the Contractor and any other forces or contractors retained by the District, causing delays or hindrance to each other, shall be referred to the Architect for resolution. 48.2 If the work of the Contractor is delayed because of any acts or omissions of any other forces or contractor, the Contractor shall on that account have no claim against the District other than for an extension of time.

49. AIR POLLUTION CONTROL: The Contractor shall comply with all air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances, and statutes which apply to any work performed pursuant to the Contract, including any air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances, and statutes specified in section 11017 of the Government Code. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, material to be disposed of shall not be burned.



50. WATER POLLUTION: Contractor shall comply with all rules and regulations which apply to water pollution and erosion control. If and to the extent storm water permitting, control, mitigation or discharge control is required by applicable laws Contractor shall file and obtain the Storm Water Permit, furnish all notices required under the Storm Water Permit, prepare the Storm Water Management Plan and Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan prior to the commencement of any work and take all necessary steps to monitor, report, enforce and otherwise implement and comply with the Storm Water Management Plan and the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and all applicable laws pertaining to the elimination or mitigation of storm water pollutant discharge to separate storm sewer systems or other watercourses, including, without limitation, the requirements of the State Water Resources Control Board, The Sacramento Region Water Quality Control board and municipal storm water management programs.

51. SOUND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS: The Contractor shall comply with all sound control and noise level rules, regulations, and ordinances which apply to any work performed pursuant to the Contract.

52. UNFAVORABLE WEATHER AND OTHER CONDITIONS: During unfavorable weather and

other conditions, the Contractor shall pursue only such portions of the work as will not be damaged thereby. No portions of the work the satisfactory quality or efficiency of which will be affected by any unfavorable conditions shall be constructed while these conditions remain, unless, by special means or precautions acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor shall be able to overcome these conditions.

53. WEEKEND, HOLIDAY, AND NIGHT WORK: No work shall be done between the hours of 7:00PM and 7:00AM, or on Sundays or legal holidays, except with written permission of the District and Architect. Requests to work between 7:00 PM and 7:00 AM, or on Sundays or legal holidays must be submitted in writing at least two working days in advance of the intended work. In case of an emergency, the Contractor will be allowed to work at night or on Sundays or legal holidays, but must notify the Architect immediately. An emergency shall be considered an unforeseen event that poses a danger to the public or to the uncompleted work.

53.1 It is understood, however, that the Contractor may establish two or three shift operations as a regular procedure if Contractor first obtains written permission from the District and Architect. Such permission may be revoked by the District or Architect at any time, without cause, or if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate force and equipment for reasonable prosecution and to justify inspection of the work, or fails to provide sufficient artificial light to permit the work to be carried on properly and safely and to permit proper inspection. 53.2 The Contractor shall give the District and Architect two working days prior written notice of any work to be done on a Saturday, with the location and type of work to be done specified; and any work done without such notice and without the supervision of an inspector may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

54. OVERLOADING: The Contractor shall determine safe loading capacities and shall not overload any structure beyond its safe capacity during construction. In addition to assuming full responsibility for bodily injury resulting from any such overloading, the Contractor shall repair to the Architect’s satisfaction or reimburse the District for the costs of repairing damage resulting therefrom.

55. SUBCONTRACTING AND ASSIGNMENT: The performance of the Contract may not be



assigned except upon written consent of the District, and no assignment shall be permitted which would relieve the original Contractor or Contractor’s surety of their responsibilities under the Contract.

56. NON-RECOGNITION OF SUBCONTRACTORS: No subcontractor will be recognized as

such, and all persons engaged in the work under this Contract will be considered as employees of the Contractor, and their work shall be subject to all the provisions of the Contract. The District and its representatives will deal only with the Contractor, who shall be responsible for the proper performance of the entire work. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, or when direct communications have been specifically authorized, the District and Contractor shall communicate through Architect. Communications by Contractor with the District’s consultants and Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by the District and Architect with subcontractors shall be through the Contractor.

57. LANDS AND RIGHTS OF WAY: The District shall provide the lands, rights of way, and easements upon which the work under this Contract is to be done, and such other lands as may be designated on the Contract drawings for the use of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall confine Contractor’s operations to within these limits. 57.1 The Contractor shall provide, at Contractor’s own expense, any additional land and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials.

58. LIABILITY OF DISTRICT OFFICIALS: Neither the Architect, nor officers, employees, agents, or representatives of the District, nor any of them, shall be responsible for any liability arising under this Contract, except such obligations as are specifically set forth herein.

59. CONTRACTOR NOT AN AGENT OF THE DISTRICT: The right of general supervision shall

not make the Contractor an agent of the District, and the liability of the Contractor for all damages to persons or to public or private property arising from the performance of the work shall not be lessened because of such general supervision.

60. THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS: The Contractor shall be responsible for all third-party claims, and for

costs or injuries incurred by a third party which result from the operations of the Contractor, or its performance under the Contract.

61. GUARANTEE: See section 01 78 00 of the Specifications. 62. ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST ACTIONS: Pursuant to section 4552 of the Government Code

of the State of California, the following provisions shall be a part of this Contract: In entering into a public works contract or a subcontract to supply goods, services, or materials pursuant to a public works contract, the Contractor or subcontractor offers and agrees to assign to the awarding body all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. section 15), or under Cartwright Act (Chapter 2, commencing with section 16700) of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, services, or materials pursuant to the public works contract or the subcontract. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the awarding body tenders final payment to the Contractor without further acknowledgment by the parties.

63. LEGAL ADDRESS OF THE CONTRACTOR: Both the address given in the Bid Form and the



Contractor’s office in the vicinity of the work are hereby designated as places to either of which drawings, letters, notices, or other articles or communications to the Contractor may be mailed, transmitted electronically or delivered. The mailing, electronic transmission or delivery at either of these places shall be deemed sufficient notice thereof upon the Contractor. Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to preclude the service of any drawing, letter, notice, article, or communication to, or upon, the Contractor or Contractor’s representative personally. The address named in the Bid Form may be changed at any time by written notice from the Contractor to the Architect.

64. SURVEYS: See section 01 71 23 of the Specifications. 65. MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED BY NAME: See section 01 62 00 of the

Specifications. 66. PROPERTY RIGHTS IN MATERIAL: Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as vesting in

the Contractor any right of property in the materials used, after they have been installed, attached, or affixed to the work, but all such materials shall be the property of the Contractor and the District jointly as their interest may appear, and cannot be removed from the work without the consent of the District.

67. CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT: The Contractor shall provide adequate and suitable equipment and means of construction to meet all the requirements of the work, including completion within the time allotted. Only equipment suitable to produce the quality of work required will be permitted to operate on the project, and specific types of equipment may be requested on component parts of the work.

67.1 In any case where the use of a particular type or piece of equipment has been banned, or in cases where the Architect has condemned for use on the work, any piece or pieces of equipment, the Contractor shall promptly remove such equipment from the site of the work. Failure to do so within a reasonable time may be considered a breach of contract.

68. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS: This Contract shall bind and inure to the heirs, devisees, assignees, and successors in interest of Contractor, and to the successors in interest of District, in the same manner as if such parties had been expressly named herein.

68.1 This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of California. 68.2 If any one or more of the provisions contained in the Contract should be invalid, illegal, or unenforceable in any respect, the validity, legality, and enforceability of the remaining provisions contained herein shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby. 68.3 This Contract constitutes the full and complete understanding of the parties, and supersedes any previous agreements or understandings, oral or written, with respect to the subject matter hereof. The Contract may only be modified by a written instrument signed by both parties. 68.4 Contractor hereby assigns to District all its first-tier subcontracts now or hereafter entered into by Contractor for performance of any part of the work. The assignment will be effective upon acceptance by District in writing, and only as to those subcontracts that District designates in writing. Such assignment is part of the consideration to District for entering into the Contract with Contractor, and may not be withdrawn.

SCC SOUTH CAMPUS UTILITY IMPROVEMENTS-LRCCD Bid #16020

January 19, 2012 Table of Contents, Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 1100 Summary of Work 01 2100 Allowances 01 2500 Substitution Procedures 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 01 2976 Progress Payment Procedures 01 3113 Project Coordination 01 3119 Project Meetings 01 3216 Contract Schedule 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 01 3500 Special Project Procedures 01 4500 Quality Control 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 5713 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controls 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 7123 Field Engineering 01 7700 Closeout Procedures 01 7800 Closeout Submittals DIVISION 22-PLUMBING Section 22 1113 Facility Water Distribution Piping DIVISION 23-HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HAVC) Section 23 0500 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 23 0518 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping 23 0519 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 23 0523 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 0719 HVAC Piping Insulation 23 0900 HVAC Automation 23 1123 Facility Natural-gas Piping 23 2113 Hydronic Piping 23 2116 Hydronic Piping Specialties 23 2123 Hydronic Pumps 23 5233 Water-tube Boilers DIVISION 26-ELECTRICAL Section 26 0010 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding 26 0531 Conduit


January 19, 2012 Table of Contents, Page 2

26 0543 Underground Ducts and Structures DIVISION 31-EARTHWORK Section 31 1000 Site Clearing and Demolition 31 1100 Dewatering 31 2000 Earthwork DIVISION 32-EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 1216 Asphalt Paving 32 1313 Cement Concrete pavement DIVISION 33-UTILITIES Section 33 1216 Valves 33 6113 Underground Hydronic Distribution Piping


January 19, 2012

SECTION 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK, Page 1

SECTION 011100- SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Work Covered by Contract Documents. B. Work by Others. C. Contractor Use of Premises.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:

A. Outline of Work: The work to be performed by Contractor shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to, the General Conditions, specifications, drawings, and other related documents, and include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, plant, and services necessary therefore and incidental thereto to complete the project. The work shall consist of, but not limited to the installation of a new boiler, boiler and chiller area modifications, installation of new hydronic piping systems, installation of electrical and signal infrastructure, installation of new gas and water system infrastructure and associated site modifications as specified within these specifications/drawings.

B. Phasing Plan and Allowable Shutdowns.

1. Work within Buildings.

a. The Contractor shall submit a phasing plan identifying planned shutdowns to the owner for approval prior to beginning physical work within a building.

b. The number of allowed shut-downs per building tie-in is two each for the hot and chilled water systems. The normal maximum shutdown period is for a period of 72 hours except as noted below. Contractor shall assume that shutdowns will commence at 6:00 am Friday and that the system be back up on line no later than 6:00 am Monday.

c. During cold weather periods, the chilled water system may be shut down for up to seven days with the District’s approval. Cold weather periods are considered to be those days where the high temperature is forecasted to be below 70 degrees F.

d. During warm weather periods, the hot water system may be shut down for up to seven days with the District’s approval. Warm weather periods are considered to be those days where the high temperature is forecasted to be above 85 degrees F.

e. The District, at its sole discretion, may allow both the hot and the chilled water to be shut down for periods greater than 72 hours during periods of mild weather and upon written request by the Contractor.

f. A minimum two weeks notice is required for any electrical shut down. Electrical shut down work will be performed after hours, weekends, or holidays without any additional compensation.

g. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation regardless of whether shutdowns greater than 72 hours are approved.

2. Work exterior to Buildings


January 19, 2012


a. The Contractor shall submit a phasing plan identifying site pedestrian

access routes, road closures, and planned shutdowns to the owner for approval prior to beginning physical work outside a building in compliance with the phasing plan included in the contract documents.

b. During cold weather periods, the chilled water system may be shut down for up to seven days with the District’s approval. Cold weather periods are considered to be those days where the high temperature is forecasted to be below 70 degrees F.

c. During warm weather periods, the hot water system may be shut down for up to seven days with the District’s approval. Warm weather periods are considered to be those days where the high temperature is forecasted to be above 85 degrees F.

d. The District, at its sole discretion, may allow both the hot and the chilled water to be shut down for periods greater than 72 hours during periods of mild weather and upon written request by the Contractor.

e. A minimum two weeks notice is required for any electrical shut down. Electrical shut down work will be performed after hours, weekends, or holidays without any additional compensation.

f. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation regardless of whether shutdowns greater than 72 hours are approved.

C. Project Completion Date: All work shall be completed within 270 calendar days after the

construction start date specified in the Notice to Proceed. D. Work Not Included: Except for such auxiliary work as shown or specified, or is necessary

as part of the construction, the following is NOT included in this contract: Any work shown but marked "Not In Contract" (NIC) or otherwise designated to be done under another Contract or by the District.

E. Location of Site: The site of the work is located at Sacramento City College, 3835

Freeport Blvd, Sacramento, CA 95822.

1.3 CONTRACT METHOD

A. Construct the Work under a single Lump Sum Contract.

1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. Contractor shall have use of the premises as described in the Construction drawings for access to and the execution of the Work. Portion of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed.

B. Coordinate use of the premises with the acceptance of the District's Project Manager. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products under this

Contract, stored on the site. D. Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on site. E. Move any stored products under Contractor's control which interfere with the operations

of the District or a separate contractor. F. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.


January 19, 2012


G. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for parking his own and his subcontractors' vehicles.

1.5 SURROUNDING SITE CONDITION SURVEY

A. Prior to commencing the work, the Contractor will implement all necessary provisions of the Special Project Procedures, Section 01 35 00. Contractor shall strictly follow these procedures at all times.

B. Prior to commencing the work, the Contractor, and District’s representative shall tour the

site together to examine and record damage to existing adjacent improvements. Provide photographs as record. This record shall serve as a basis for determination of subsequent damage due to the Contractor’s operations and shall be signed by all parties making tour. Any cracks, sags, or damage to the improvements not noted in the original survey, but subsequently discovered, shall be reported to the District’s Representative.

1.6 DISTRICT-FURNISHED ITEMS

A. The District may assist in providing locations where underground utilities and system control valves are located. Installation is included as part of Work under this Contract.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01 21 00-ALLOWANCES

SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES PART

1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Contingency Allowances have been established for the following items:

a. Unforeseen work associated with Site and Building Work

2. Contingency Allowances are to be included in the base bid 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for allowance items.

B. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of

the Work. 1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work.

1.5 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES

A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Owner's Representative for Owner’s

purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.

B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.

C. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner

by Change Order.


SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

1.6 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.2 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Contingency Allowance No. 1: Include a contingency allowance of $166,250 for use according to Owner's written instructions for unforeseen site and building work.

END OF SECTION 012100

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions.

B. A sample substitution Request Form is included at the end of this Section. This form will

also be used for "Or Approved Equal", and "Approved Equal" requests. Similar requirements for approving "Or Approved Equal", and "Approved Equal" are required as indicated in this Section for substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Section are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.

B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of

construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered



substitutions:

1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the District or Engineer. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract

Documents. 3. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and

orders issued by governing authorities.

C. "Or Approved Equal": Whenever, in Contract Documents, any material, process or article is indicated or specified by patent or proprietary name and/or by name of manufacturer, and is followed by the words "or equal" such name shall be deemed to be used for purpose of facilitating description of material and/or process desired, and Contractor may offer any material or process which shall be equal in every respect to that so indicated or specified; provided, however, that if material, process or article offered by Contractor is not, in opinion of Engineer, equal in every respect to that specified, then Contractor must furnish material, process or article specified.

1.3 SUBMITTAL

A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will only be considered if received within 30 days after the date of the Contract. Substitutions may be considered after the 30 day period when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.

1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit

requests in the form and in accordance with procedures required for Change Order proposals.

2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in

each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:

a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products,

fabrication and installation procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution

with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance, warranty and visual effect.

d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the District and separate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.

e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Progress Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.

f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum, including detailed cost differences with documentation supporting each item of costs.

g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to increases in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, that may subsequently become



necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately, or any additional cost associate to substitution required to conform to design intent.

3. Engineer’s Action: The Engineer will notify the Contractor of acceptance or

rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained, Contractor shall use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order or "minor change in work".

4. Only one substitution request per product will be considered. If proposed

substitution is not accepted by Engineer, Contractor shall submit specified item. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Engineer when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Engineer; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.

1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. 4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the

Contract Documents. 5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the

Contract Time due to no act or omission of Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is legally responsible. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

7. A substantial advantage is offered the District, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the District may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the District may include additional compensation to the Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the District or separate Contractors, and similar considerations.

8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.

10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty.

11. Any product or material submitted for substitution shall be tested as directed by the Engineer, and the expense of such testing shall be paid by the manufacturer or vendor requesting substitution. Requests for substitutions must be accompanied with technical data, drawings, samples, literature and other detailed information as will demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Architect that the proposed substitute material, etc. is equal in quality and utility to that originally specified. If the Engineer considers tests necessary to determine the



quality or utility of any proposed material, etc., such tests shall be made at the expense of the Contractor by an established and unbiased testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. The Engineer's written approval of such substitutions must be obtained before fabrication or delivery to the site of materials, etc., other than those originally specified.

B. The Contractor's submittal and Engineer's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data

or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval.

C. The Contractor is responsible to coordinate with all subcontractors and manufacturers of

any related work associated with substitution. Acceptance of a substitution shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for compliance with all requirements of any portion of Contract Documents, and Contractor shall be responsible, at its own expense, for any changes in other parts of the work which may be caused by substitution.

The substitution must not invalidate warranties or guaranties related to substitution or any

related work associated to substitution. D. The review of any proposed substitution shall be within a reasonable time. If Contractor

believes that the review of a substitution request needs to be accelerated or completed by a certain date it shall conspicuously identify such a need on the transmittal of the request, and further identify and substantiate the reasons therefore.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: SECTION: PAGE: PARAGRAPH: DESCRIPTION: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request. Applicable portions of the data are clearly identified indicating a side-by-side comparison of the major components of the specified and proposed product. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents which the proposed substitution will require for proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing



and construction cost caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule or

specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The undersigned further states that the function, appearance and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted by: Signature: For use by the design consultant Firm: Accepted Address: Accepted as noted Not Accepted Telephone: By: Date: Remarks: Attachments:


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES, Page 1

SECTION 012600-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES


A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the work, not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued by the Engineer and/or the District's Project Manager through the Engineer on AIA form G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions.

1.3 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. District-Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Engineer, with a detailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, if necessary.

1. Proposal requests issued by the Engineer are for information only. Do not

consider them as instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change.

2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, submit to the Engineer and

the District, a detailed, itemized cost breakdown for the cost necessary to execute the proposed change within 10 days of receipt of the proposal request.

a. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs,

along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities and documentation to substantiate each item and sub-item of costs.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the work will have on the Contract Time and related cost for time extensions.

B. Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: When latent or other unforeseen

conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Engineer.

1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the

change on the work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities and documentation to substantiate each item and sub-item of costs.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures if the proposed change in the work requires the substitution of one product or system



for a product or system specified. 5. The Engineer shall review the Contractor's Change Order proposal request with

the District, and submit a written response to the Contractor. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: When the District and Contractor are not in total

agreement on the terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Engineer may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order

1. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the

change in the work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required

by the Construction Change Directive.

1. Documentation of Time and Materials work shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager on a daily basis and, if approved, shall be signed by the Project Manager. a. Contractor shall provide 48 hour notice to the Project Manager prior to

starting Time and Materials work. 2. After completion of the change, submit to the Engineer an itemized account and

supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

1.5 CONTRACT ADJUSTMENTS

A. Adjustments, if any, in the amount to be paid the Contractor by reason of the

modifications of the work as set forth in a Contract Change Order, or Construction Change Directive, shall be determined by one or more of the cost adjustment methods outlined in the Changes Section of the General Conditions.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. Upon the District's approval of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Engineer will issue

a Change Order for signatures of the District and Contractor on AIA Form G701, or similar.

B. All Change orders will contain the following statement and must be acknowledged by Contractor on each Change Order:

This Change Order is full and complete compensation for Contractor and everyone for

whom Contractor is legally responsible, including but not limited to, subcontractors and sub-subcontractors, for all work described, arising from or inferable herein, including but not limited to costs for delays, impact, inefficiency, acceleration, home office overhead (absorbed, unabsorbed and under absorbed), field office overhead, lost profits, lost opportunity, claim preparation costs, change order preparation costs, direct costs, indirect costs, or any other costs, no matter how characterized. Any attempt by Contractor or anyone for whom it is legally responsible, to limit, alter or modify this Change Order may nullify the Change Order.

1.7 UNILATERAL CHANGE ORDERS

A. It is the intent of the District to have change orders issued bilaterally. However,



the District recognizes that there may arise one or more instances where bilateral agreement cannot be reached with the Contractor with regards to a change in contract sum and/or time. If, after the Contractor has submitted its cost and time proposal, and the District and the Contractor fail to successfully negotiate and agree on a time and/or cost for the proposed Change Order, the District may issue a unilateral Change Order to the Contractor in the amount that the District believes is due and the Contractor must proceed with the changed work. If the Contractor disputes any portion of the unilateral Change Order, the Contractor must maintain time and materials records as required by Article 26 of the General Conditions. Failure to create and maintain such records and/or timely submit them, or otherwise to comply with the express provisions of the General Conditions, shall operate as a waiver of the right of Contractor to receive any additional time and/or money for the performance of the unilateral Change Order.

End of Section


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 29 76 - PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES, Page 1

SECTION 01 29 76 - PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for payment. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. See Section 01 32 16, Construction Progress Schedule

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall reflect previous applications and payments.

1. The initial Application for Payment and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

2. All Applications for Payment shall include only materials that have been delivered to the site. Materials that have not been delivered to the site shall not be included in any Application for Payment.

B. Payment Application Times: The District shall pay monthly to the Contractor, subject to

the terms and conditions set forth in these Contract Documents.

1. All materials and work covered by partial payments made shall thereupon become the sole property of the District, but this provision shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor for the sole responsibility for the care and protection of materials and work upon which payments have been made or the restoration for any damaged work, or as a waiver of the right of the District to require the fulfillment of all of the terms of the Contract.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Documents G 702 and Schedule of Values as the form for Application for Payment.

1. The following schedules are attached at the end of this section and incorporated

herein, and made a part of each Application for Payment.

a. EXHIBITA: List of Subcontractors (provided services during payment period)

b. EXHIBIT B: Subcontractor's Unconditional Waiver and Release upon Final Payment (if applicable).

c. EXHIBIT C: Contractor's Unconditional Waiver and Release upon Final Payment

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and

execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. Incomplete applications will be returned without action.

1. The Contractor shall prepare a tabular report from the current Monthly Schedule

Update This report shall include the following information for each activity: a. Activity ID Number b. Activity Description c. Prior Month’s Percent Complete d. Current Percent Complete



e. Total Budgeted Cost f. Cost Completed To Date g. Other Activity Codes As Directed By The District’s Project Manager h. The Report Shall Be Organized By Activity Codes As Directed By The

District’s Project Manager 2. Include amounts of Change Orders duly executed by all parties prior to the date

of the application. 3. Provide applicable exhibits. 4. District's Inspector and/or Project Manager must review and accept the

percentages for work completed prior to submission to Architect. The Project Manager's initials must be on each page of the payment application forms.

5. The amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: a. Add that portion of the Contract Sum allocable to the work that is

completed to date determined by multiplying the percentage of completion of each portion of the work against the budgeted cost;

b. Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for later incorporation into the work (note: only materials and equipment stored at the site are eligible to be billed and paid for);

c. Less the total of all payments made previously by the Owner; d. Less the amount, if any, withheld pursuant to Part 1.5 of this Specification

Section; and e. Less the amount withheld for retention.

E. Transmittal: Submit 4 complete, executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect.

1. Transmit each application for payment with a transmittal form listing attachments,

and record appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

2. A District payment schedule may be provided to the Contractor at the preconstruction meeting. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the Engineer and the District to process the Application for Payment.

F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals (as applicable) that

must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 5. Schedule of principal products. 6. Submittal Schedule. 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of permits. 10. Copies of authorization permits and licenses from governing authorities for

performance of the work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of pre-construction meeting. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire District's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required.

G. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals (as applicable) which

must precede or coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment



include the following: 1. Permits and approvals. 2. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. 3. Test/adjust/balance records. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Meter readings. 6. Start-up performance reports. 7. Change-over information related to District's occupancy, use operation and

maintenance. 8. Final cleaning. 9. Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety. 10. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. 11. Completion of Project close-out requirements. 12. Completion of items specified for completion after Completion. 13. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. 14. Assurance that work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue

delay. 15. Transmittal of required Project construction records to District. 16. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid. 17. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 18. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. 19. Unconditional Waiver and Release forms Exhibits Band C.

H. Final Retention Payment: Final retention payment to the Contractor shall become due

forty (40) days after recordation of a Notice of Completion by the District Board of Trustees. Notice of Completion will be submitted to the Board of Trustees at their first meeting after all work has been complete, inspected and accepted by the Engineer and District, and the Contractor has submitted the following information to the District:

1. Affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment and any other

indebtedness connected with the work for which the District might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied.

2. Release of all Stop Notices arising out of the Contract.

I. Acceptance of Final Payment shall constitute waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made in writing and specifically identified as unresolved in a writing presented with request for final payment.

1.4 PAYMENT RETENTION

A. The District shall retain five percent (5%) of payment as it falls due to ensure performance of all work covered by this agreement.

1.5 PAYMENT WITHHELD

A. District reserves the right to withhold all, or any part, of an Application for Payment

whether certified or not by the Engineer, all or part of a pervious Certificate for Payment may be nullified and that amount withheld from a current Application for Payment for reasons as outlined below:

1. Defective work not remedied; 2. Third-party claims against Contractor or District arising from the acts or

omissions of Contractor or subcontractors; 3. Stop notices; 4. Failure of Contractor to make timely payments due to subcontractors for material

or labor;



5. A reasonable doubt that the work can be completed for the balance of the Contract Sum then unpaid;

6. Damage to the District or others for which Contractor is responsible; 7. Reasonable evidence that the work cannot be completed within the Contract

Time, and the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum would not be adequate to cover District's damages for the anticipated delay;

11. Liquidated damages assessed; 12. Any other failure of Contractor to perform its obligations under the Contract

Documents.

1.6 SECURITY DEPOSIT IN LIEU OF WITHHOLD

A. Pursuant to the Public Contract Code of the State of California, Section 22300, the Contractor may substitute a deposit of securities in lieu of the District withholding any monies from the total amount of the performance by the Contractor as set forth in the estimate prepared by the Engineer under the provisions of Section 13 of said contract code.

1. At the request and expense of the Contractor, securities having a value

equivalent to or greater than the amount to be withheld may be deposited with Bank of Sacramento as escrow agent payable either in whole or in part to the District upon demand and certification by the District that the Contractor has defaulted in the performance of his obligation under Contract and setting forth the amount of said security needed to satisfy the completion of the obligation of the Contractor.

2. Securities eligible for investment under this Section shall include those listed in Section 16430 of the Government Code, and bank or savings & loan certificates of deposit.

3. The Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of any securities substituted for monies withheld and shall receive interest thereon.

4. Any escrow agreement entered into pursuant to this provision shall be essentially on the forms set forth below.

5. See the following forms attached to the Instructions to Bidders section of these documents: a. Escrow Agreement for Security Deposit in lieu of retention b. EXHIBIT A: Certification of Deposit of Securities (if applicable) c. EXHIBIT B: Authorization to Release Securities Deposited by Contractor (if

applicable) d. EXHIBIT C: Notification of Failure of Performance (if applicable) e. EXHIBIT D: Certification of Current Market Value of Securities in Escrow (if

applicable)

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION SEE FOLLOWING PAGES FOR FORMS



EXHIBIT A PROJECT NAME:_______________________________________________________ CONTRACTOR:_________________________________________________________ PROJECT NUMBER:_____________________________________________________ APPLICATION NUMBER:__________________________________________________ LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Subcontractors listed below are all Subcontractors furnishing labor, services, or materials for the period referred to in the Application For Payment referenced above, of which this Exhibit is a part: Subcontracted Date Work Name of Subcontractor Work Activity Activity Completed _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________ (Contractor) By:________________________________ (Name) ___________________________________ (Title) Date:_______________________________



EXHIBIT B PROJECT NAME:________________________________________________________ CONTRACTOR:_________________________________________________________ PROJECT NUMBER:_____________________________________________________ APPLICATION NUMBER:__________________________________________________ SUBCONTRACTOR'S UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON FINAL PAYMENT NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT WAIVES RIGHTS UNCONDITIONALLY AND STATES THAT YOU HAVE BEEN PAID FOR GIVING UP THOSE RIGHTS. THIS DOCUMENT IS ENFORCEABLE AGAINST YOU IF YOU SIGN IT, EVEN IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID. IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID, USE A CONDITIONAL RELEASE FORM. The undersigned has been paid in full for all labor, services, equipment, or material furnished to ____________________________________________________(Name of Contractor or Subcontractor) on the subject Project of the Los Rios Community College District located at ______________________________________________________________(Facility and Project Name) and does hereby waive and release any claims, liens, and stop notice rights, and any rights against a labor and material bond on the subject Project, except for disputed claims for extra work in the amount of ____________________________________________Dollars ($_____________________). Dated: _____________________ ____________________________________________ (Company Name) By: __________________________________ (Name) __________________________________ (Title)



EXHIBIT C PROJECT NAME_______________________________________________________ CONTRACTOR: _______________________________________________________ PROJECT NUMBER:__________________________________________________ APPLICATION NUMBER:___________________________________________ CONTRACTOR'S UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER AND RELEASE UPON FINAL PAYMENT NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT WAIVES RIGHTS UNCONDITIONALLY AND STATES THAT YOU HAVE BEEN PAID FOR GIVING UP THOSE RIGHTS. THIS DOCUMENT IS ENFORCEABLE AGAINST YOU IF YOU SIGN IT, EVEN IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID. IF YOU HAVE NOT BEEN PAID, USE A CONDITIONAL RELEASE FORM. The undersigned has been paid in full for all labor, services, equipment, and material furnished on the subject Project of the Los Rios Community College District located at _______________________________________________________________(Facility and Project Name) and does hereby waive and release any claims, liens, and stop notice rights, except for disputed claims for extra work in the amount of _______________________________________________Dollars ($_________________) Dated: ___________________________ _________________________________ (Company Name) By: _______________________________ (Name) __________________________________ (Title)

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 31 13 - PROJECT COORDINATION, Page 1

SECTION 013113 - PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Sections of Specifications to

assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with

building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which

are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. See paragraph 1.3 below.

D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within

the construction, if applicable. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements as applicable .

E. Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate Sections in preparation for

completion. F. After District occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective

work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of District's activities.

1.2 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL COORDINATION

A. Routing and Coordination of HVAC, Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Installations:

1. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate the work of all subcontractors having installation responsibilities within the work space, of all the remodeled space both with respect to the sequence of work and the allocation of space among the trades. The Contractor's construction schedule shall clearly indicate the planned sequence of work in such areas and any proposed departure from it affecting or potentially affecting coordination of the overall installation shall be brought promptly, in writing, to the attention of the District's Representative.

2. The Contractor shall prepare or have prepared detailed shop drawings in plan view, with cross-sections as necessary, indicating his/her proposed installation plan for all HVAC, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical installations within the area of all the new and remodeled space. These drawings should depict actual elevations and linear dimensions, and all routing changes, transitions, and major offsets deemed necessary to accomplish the installation. Individual shop drawings may be prepared for each trade working within the designated space or area; however, the coordination of the consolidated installation shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor. These shop drawings shall be submitted to the District's Representative for review prior to commencement of installation, and shall be provided to each subcontractor having work in the area.



3. Should unavoidable conflicts be encountered during the preparation or review of

the shop drawings, or during construction, they shall be promptly brought to the attention of the District's Representative, in writing, for resolution. Failure of Contractor to properly plan, sequence, coordinate, layout or schedule the work, does not constitute an unavoidable conflict.

4. Where the drawings are diagrammatic, showing only the general arrangement of the systems, the Contractor shall have responsibility for the fitting of materials and equipment to other parts of the equipment and structure, and to make adjustments as necessary or required to resolve space problems, preserve service room, and avoid architectural and structural elements and the work of other trades. The Contractor may be required to identify certain areas to relocate installations within the spaces depicted on the drawings; i.e., ductwork may be shifted within the space shown to accommodate other systems. Such functional relocations shall not be deemed a change to the requirements of the contract. In the event of a major re-routing of a system appears necessary, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, shop drawings of the proposed rearrangement.

5. Because of the diagrammatic nature and small scale of the drawings, all necessary offsets, adjustments, and transitions required for the complete installation are not shown and are the responsibility of Contractor. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, equipment, valves, accessories, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.

1.3 UTILITIES AND IRRIGATION LINES

A. Send proper notices, make necessary arrangements, perform other services required in construction, care and maintenance of all utilities and irrigation lines and assume all responsibility concerning same. Provide necessary protection to existing utility services and irrigation lines and repair any work damaged as a result of operations of the contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and

recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.

C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation.

Reject damaged and defective items.

D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing work. Secure work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement.

E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed

work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final



decision. F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the

best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.

H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the

necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual

components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. During handling and installation of work at the project the Contractor shall clean and protect work in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration.

B. Clean and perform maintenance on installed work as frequently as necessary

through the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

C. Preserve and maintain trees and other vegetation on site. D. Limiting Exposures: Contractor shall supervise performance of the work in such a

manner and by such means which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Such exposure includes, where applicable, but not by way of limitation the following:

Static or dynamic loading. Internal or external pressures. High or low temperatures. Thermal shock. High or low humidity. Water. Solvents. Chemicals. Light. Radiation. Puncture. Abrasion. Heavy traffic. Soiling. Insect and animal infestation. Combustion. Electrical current. High speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear or other misuse. Incompatible interface. Destructive testing. Misalignment.



Weathering. Unprotected storage. Improper shipping or handling Theft. Vandalism.

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 31 19 – PROJECT MEETINGS, Page 1

SECTION 013119 - PROJECT MEETINGS


A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings including but not limited to:

1. Pre-Construction Conference. 2. Pre-Installation Conferences. 3. Coordination Meetings. 4. Progress Meetings.

B. Construction schedules are specified in another Division-1 Section. 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. The District will schedule a pre-construction conference and organizational meeting at the Project site or other convenient location no later than 15 days after execution of the Contract and prior to commencement of construction activities.

B. Attendees: The District representatives, Engineer and their consultants, the Contractor

and its superintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties shall each be represented at the conference by persons familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the work.

C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topics

as:

1. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract. 2. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions,

applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract close-out procedures.

3. Scheduling and Contractor's Progress Schedule. 4. Scheduling activities of geotechnical Engineer, and testing lab services, if

applicable. 5. Use of premises by District and Contractor. 6. District's requirements. 7. Survey and building layout. 8. Security and housekeeping procedures. 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 10. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 11. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction

period.

1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at the site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Engineer and District's project manager and/or inspector of scheduled meeting dates at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting



dates.

1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each pre-installation conference, including requirements for:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases e. Deliveries. f. Shop Drawings, Product Data and quality control Samples. g. Possible conflicts. h. Compatibility problems. i. Time schedules. j. Weather limitations. k. Manufacturer's recommendations. l. Compatibility of materials. m. Acceptability of substrates. n. Temporary facilities. o. Space and access limitations. p. Governing regulations. q. Safety. r. Inspection and testing requirements. s. Required performance results. t. Recording requirements. u. Protection.

2. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each

conference, along with the approved schedule. Distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, promptly, including the District and Engineer.

3. Do not proceed if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate

whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.

1.4 COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. Conduct Project coordination meetings. These meetings shall be scheduled at the convenience for all parties involved. Project coordination meetings maybe held at same time of meetings as regular progress meetings and special pre-installation meetings.

B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination

or planning for the construction activities involved. District's inspector, project manager, and Engineer shall be invited, but not required to attend these meetings.

C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others

affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Conduct progress meetings at the Project site weekly. Notify the District project manager, inspector, and engineer of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request. The contractor shall record the meeting minutes.



B. Agenda: Agenda will be informal, and include those items of interest requiring discussion

to be addressed. When items of interest are discussed, Contractor will record those decisions made for future review. Review other items of significance that could affect progress, and topics for discussion as appropriate to the current status of the Project.

1. Contractor's Progress Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Progress Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including such items as:

a. Interface requirements. b. Time. c. Sequences. d. Deliveries. e. Off-site fabrication problems. f. Access. g. Site utilization. h. Temporary facilities and services. i. Hours of Work. j. Hazards and risks. k. Housekeeping. l. Quality and Work standards. m. Change Orders. n. Documentation of information for payment requests.

A. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each progress meeting date, make available copies

of the meeting minutes to each party present and to other parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report.

1. Schedule Updating: Revise the progress schedule after each progress meeting

where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 32 16 – CONTRACT SCHEDULE, Page 1

SECTION 013216 - CONTRACT SCHEDULE

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The Contractor shall develop a network plan and schedule for the project demonstrating complete fulfillment of all contract requirements and shall keep the network plan up to date in accordance with the requirements of this section. The Contractor shall employ the Critical Path Method (CPM) in developing the plan and schedule, and in the planning, coordinating, performing and reporting the work under this contract, including all activities of Subcontractors, equipment vendors, suppliers, and any the Owner functions that impact the work. It is explicitly understood that the schedule shall be employed by, and is vital to, the Owner’s Representative and the Owner’s Project Manager in monitoring the progress of the Work and administering this Contract. The Owner may utilize a scheduling consultant to assist in the review of the Contractor’s schedules.

B. The CPM schedule shall be prepared using Primavera Project Planner version 3.1 or

Primavera SureTrak version 3.0. Equivalency of a proposed substitute CPM program shall be determined by the Owner’s Project Manager at his/her sole discretion upon the application from the Contractor. Regardless of which scheduling software is used it must have the capability of a definitive “Data Date” that will illustrate impacts to individual activities and the overall project where an activity’s progress is not proceeding as originally planned or it has not started as planned. If a substitute CPM program is used in the development of the schedule, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to assure that it is readable in Primavera version 3.1.

C. The principles and definition of CPM and the terms used herein shall be as follows:

CPM network is a graphic description of the construction plan, showing the sequential steps needed to reach the completion of the Work. It shall depict events and tasks, and their interrelationships, and shall recognize the progress that must be made in one task before subsequent tasks can begin. The CPM network shall be comprehensive and shall include all interdependencies and interactions required to perform the Work of the Project. The only activity in the schedule that will not have a predecessor is the Project Start or Notice to Proceed Milestone. The only activity in the schedule that will not have a successor is the Project Completion Milestone. All other activities in the schedule shall have predecessor and successor logic ties.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Within ten (10) calendar days following receipt of Notice of Award and prior to the full execution of the Agreement, and prior to engaging a scheduling consultant or commencing performance of the work specified in this Section with its own forces, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Project Manager:

1. Contractor’s scheduler(s) Information;

a. If the schedules are to be prepared by any outside consultant, the name and the address of the proposed scheduling consultant;

b. Information sufficient to show that the Contractor's own organization or the Contractor’s proposed scheduling consultant has scheduling support staff and computer facilities meeting the requirements herein.



c. A list of prior projects, with the Owner’s telephone contact numbers, where services similar to those required for this Contract were performed.

d. The acceptability of the proposed scheduler will be at the sole discretion of the Owner’s Project Manager.

e. The scheduling software and version to be used.

B. The “Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule” shall be submitted no later than seven (7) days after the Notice to Proceed.

C. Submit the “(Proposed) Contract Schedule” within 30 calendar days after the Owner’s

issuance of the Notice to Proceed to the Contractor. Upon acceptance, the (Proposed) Contract Schedule shall become the “Baseline Schedule”.

D. Submit monthly updated Contract Schedules (hereinafter referred to as the Monthly

Schedule Updates) along with each monthly pay application in accordance with Specification Section 01 2976 – Progress Payment Procedures.

E. All other required reports referenced herein, typically three (3) each per occurrence.

Submit three (3) color plots on “E” size sheets (approximately 34” x 44”) of each required schedule and three (3) copies of all required reports. The Contractor shall also submit a copy of the computer data disks used to produce hard copy submittals. The computer data disks will contain the schedule computer files in Primavera version 3.1 compatible format. A PDF file format is not acceptable.

Schedule of Submittal Items Due:

Submittal Item Due Date No Later Than

Contractor Scheduler Information 10 calendar days from Notice to Award

Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule 7 calendar days from Notice of Proceed

(Proposed) Contract Schedule 30 calendar days from Notice to Proceed

Monthly Schedule Updates 5 calendar days before the monthly pay application

1.03 APPROVAL

A. The Owner’s Project Manager shall have the right to accept or reject the Contractor’s proposed scheduler. The Contractor shall re-propose qualified alternates at no additional cost to the Owner within three (3) calendar days thereafter and until the Owner’s Project Manager’s approval is received.

B. Approval of the Contractor’s Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule by the Owner’s Project

Manager will be a condition precedent to the making of any progress payment. C. The required schedules and reports shall be prepared and submitted for review and

approval in accordance with the General Conditions and this Section. D. The Monthly Schedule Updates and reports shall be an integral part and basic element of

the estimate upon which progress payments will be made. Submittal, review and approval by the Owner’s Project Manager of these items shall be a condition precedent to the making of progress payments. If in the judgment of the Owner’s Project Manager, the



Contractor fails or refuses to provide a complete Monthly Schedule Updates or reports, as specified, the Contractor will be deemed to have not provided the required estimate upon which progress payments may be made, and shall not be entitled to such progress payments unless or until it has furnished the aforesaid schedules.

E. In the event the Contractor submits a workable, contractually compliant (Proposed)

Contract Schedule which indicates project completion at a date earlier than the contract completion date, the acceptance of such a schedule will not change the contract time. In such an event, a schedule activity entitled “project float”, of a duration equal to the difference between the proposed early completion date and the contract completion date, will be added to the schedule. All project float is a project resource for the Contractor and the Owner, and is not for the exclusive use of either party.

1.04 CONSTRUCTION ANALYSIS

A. The Contractor shall use Primavera Project Planner version 3.1 or Primavera SureTrak version 3.0 or some other Planner approved by District Project Manager. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s Project Manager to produce the following minimum information with the (Proposed) Contract Schedule:

1. Activity identification; 2. Activity description; 3. Status date (data date); 4. Activity percentage complete; 5. Activity original and remaining durations; 6. Early start/finish and late start/finish; 7. Total float; 8. The predecessor and successor activities for each individual activity; 9. Designation of the planned work day/work week for each activity (calendar

identification); 10. A near-critical item list of activities with ten (10) working days or less total float; 11. Scheduled and actual progress payment for each activity.

B. Should the Contractor develop the schedule in any version of a Primavera product newer

than Primavera Project Planner version 3.1 or SureTrak version 3.0 the schedule will be developed utilizing the “Project Level” coding not the “Enterprise” or “Global” Level. It is the Contractor’s sole responsibility to insure that all coding included in its schedulesis transferred and readable by the Owner in the electronic format in Primavera Project Planner version 3.1.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. To assist in the preparation and for the production of the required submittal of the Schedules and Reports outlined in this Section, the Contractor shall engage, at his own expense, a CPM consultant having the following qualifications, except that the Contractor may perform these services with its own organization if the Contractor itself has such qualifications:

1. Have at least one employee regularly engaged and skilled in the application of

computerized CPM scheduling methods on similar or larger size construction projects.

2. Possess or have access to computer programs for preparation and production of schedules and reports.

3. Have computer facilities or access on short notice to computer facilities with the



capability of delivering a CPM plot and readout within 48-hours, and; 4. Scheduling Software

a. The Contractor shall utilize a Windows-based computer-software program compatible with Primavera Project Planner version 3.1 or Primavera SureTrak version 3.0.

b. If the Contractor requests and receives authorization from the Owner to utilize scheduling software other than Primavera Project Planner version 3.1 or Primavera SureTrak version 3.0;

i. The Contractor will still be obligated to provide schedules, reports and all other data required by this Section to the Owner in Primavera Project Planner version 3.1.

ii. Any conversions of schedule files that may be required to accommodate the Primavera Project Planner version 3.1 will be performed by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

5. In the event that there is a difference between the schedule as developed in the software utilized by the Contractor and the schedule as converted to and used by Primavera Project Planner version 3.1, the schedule that is used in Primavera Project Planner version 3.1 shall have primacy.

1.06 CONTRACT SUBMITTALS AND DETAILS

A. Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule:

1. Submission: a. The Contractor shall submit a Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule to

the Owner’s Project Manager as indicated in Paragraph 1.02 Submittals. The Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule will include all activities that are required or anticipated to be completed within the first 90-calendar days of the project. The Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule shall also contain a summary of the remaining activities formatting the remaining work areas, overall contract duration, milestones, etc. for the remainder of the project.

b. Any revisions deemed necessary by the Owner’s Project Manager as a result of its review (allow 14 calendar days for this review) shall be incorporated into the Contractor’s Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule and re-submitted to the Owner’s Project Manager for review within fourteen (14) calendar days after the Contractor's receipt of the Owner’s Project Manager Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule comments.

2. Form: a. Prepare the Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule as a time-scaled CPM

barchart showing continuous flow from left to right. Durations and specific calendar dates shall be clearly shown for the start and finish of each work activity in sufficient detail to represent a practical plan to complete the Work within the Contract Time.

3. The Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule shall include but not be limited to: a. A legend of scheduled activities; b. Scheduled work activities that clearly indicate the scope of work to be

completed; c. Major milestones, which are critical to the completion of the work,

including but not limited to the following: NTP date; mobilization; coordination review and detailing activities; the Contractor quality control review activities; and contract completion. Major work activity categories that are to be included in the (Proposed) Contract Schedule;

d. Submittals Section, containing activities for submittals, approvals, fabrication and delivery of materials or other components that affect any



work activity that has total float of 60 calendar days or less; e. OFCI/OFOI items; f. Start up, Testing, Inspections and Commissioning; g. Punch list formulation; h. The Contractor closeout documentation and training; i. The Contractor punch list corrective work; j. Demobilization and project completion; k. A plot of the Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule with a clearly

highlighted critical path; l. Calendar designations identifying all holidays and non-working days; m. The Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule shall be cost loaded. Once

the (Proposed) Contract Schedule is approved and becomes the Baseline Schedule , the costs reflected in the Baseline schedule will be the official Schedule of Values for the project and utilized for each payment application;

n. The Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule shall contain an activity code structure sufficient to allow sorting/grouping by the following categories: a.) Responsibility or Subcontractor; b.) Area; c.) Location, d.) CSI division; e.) A code entitled “Update” that will identify the schedule

submission when specific activities were added to the network (new activities, Change Orders, RFI’s, etc.);

B. (Proposed) Contract Schedule:

1. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Project Manager a (Proposed) Contract Schedule as indicated in Paragraph 1.02 Submittals, and in sufficient time to allow for review and approval. The (Proposed) Contract Schedule shall be a computerized detailed task level CPM diagram in precedence diagramming method (PDM) format. A clear delineation of construction activities shall be shown on the (Proposed) Contract Schedule. This schedule shall be cost loaded. a. The Contractor and requested Subcontractors shall participate in a

review of the proposed (Proposed) Contract Schedule by the Owner’s Project Manager when requested to do so. Any revisions deemed necessary by the Owner’s Project Manager as a result of this joint review shall be re-submitted within ten (10) days after said meeting.

2. All activities in the Initial Contract Schedule shall have sufficient code structure to enable a sort by activity code, or "rollup" of the activities in the form of a Summary Schedule. The code structure will allow sufficient sorting capabilities to group by responsibility (by Subcontractor), location (building, floor, etc.), area, type (submittal, approval, change, update, etc), milestones and CSI division at a minimum.

3. The work activities comprising the (Proposed) Contract Schedule shall be of sufficient detail to ensure adequate planning and execution of the Work and such that the schedules provide an appropriate basis for monitoring and evaluating the progress of the Work. A work activity is defined as a singular task that requires time and resources (manpower, equipment, and/or material) to complete in a continuous operation (excepting submittal activities including review and approval activities; and material fabrication and procurement activities). No activity shall be less than one (1) or more than twenty (20) working days in duration for any on-site operation. All holidays and non-working days shall be identified by way of calendar designations.



4. The (Proposed) Contract Schedule shall contain activities for submittals, approvals, fabrication and delivery of materials or other components that affect any work activity that has total float of 60 calendar days or less.

5. The (Proposed) Contract Schedule shall be a cost-loaded CPM schedule. Mobilization, bond and insurance costs may be shown separately. Other general condition costs, overhead, profit, etc., shall be prorated throughout all the activities. The cost-loaded activities of the (Proposed) Contract Schedule shall be basis for establishing the distribution of costs. Costs relating to each activity shall be distributed evenly over the duration of the activity. Contractor agrees that the cost given by Contractor to each activity is the reasonable value thereof and may be used by the District

6. Failure by the Contractor to include any element of the work required for the performance of this Contract and completion of the Project, including all submittals, shall not excuse The Contractor from completing all work required within the time for completion, notwithstanding the Owner’s Project Manager's approval of the (Proposed) Contract Schedule.

7. No more than 25% of the total number of activities shown on the schedule shall be critical or near critical. Near critical is defined as float equal to or less than ten (10) working days.

8. The schedule shall indicate the sequence and interdependency of all work activities. All activities should be linked by finish-to-start (FS) relationships. Other types of relationships shall be prohibited (including, but not limited to start-to-start, finish-to-finish, and start-to-finish relationships and relationship lags) unless specific permission is granted by the Owner’s Project Manager. Any logic usage other than finish to start must be identified in a separate report to be submitted with the (Proposed) Contract Schedule to the Owner’s Project Manager for approval. Constraints in the schedule shall be limited to those called for in the contract. Any additional constraints on activities shall be kept to a minimum and must be identified in a separate report to be submitted with the (Proposed) Contract Schedule to the Owner’s Project Manager for approval. Finish-to-start relationships are permitted to have negative lags, but in no case will positive lags be permitted. Milestones shall also be limited to those specifically called for in the contract. Unless otherwise called for in the contract, there shall be only two milestones, one for the Notice to Proceed and one for Project Completion.

9. Critical Work activities are defined as Work activities which, if delayed or extended, will delay the scheduled completion date of the Work. All other Work activities are defined as non-critical Work activities and are considered to have float.

10. Float is defined as the time that a non-critical Work activity can be delayed or extended without delaying the scheduled completion of milestones specified in this Section or the scheduled completion date of the Work, or both. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Owner or the Contractor. Neither the Contractor nor the Owner shall have an exclusive right to the use of float.

11. Delays of any non-critical Work shall not be the basis for an extension of Contract Time until the delays consume the float associated with that non-critical Work activity and cause the Work activity to become critical.

12. The Contractor shall not sequester float through strategies including extending activity durations to consume available float, use of preferential logic; use float suppression techniques like Zero Total Float constraints; use of special lead/lag logic restraints or imposed dates. Use of float time disclosed or implied by the use of alternate float suppression techniques shall be shared to the benefit of both the Owner and the Contractor.

13. Include a critical path activity titled “Inclement Weather Days” on the (Proposed) Contract Schedule. This activity shall have an initial duration of one and one-half (1.5) working days for each month of contract time. Inclement Weather Days shall be the last activity in the schedule prior to the milestone activity entitled



“Contract Completion”. All predecessor activities must pass through the Inclement Weather Days activity. The Contractor shall apply to the Owner’s Project Manager to use an Inclement Weather Day when a critical path activity has been delayed because of inclement weather. An Inclement Weather Delay day is defined as when the weather or effect thereof prevents the Contractor from working on the current critical path with at least 75% of its normal work force for more than 50% of the normal workday. The Contractor must apply for use of Inclement Weather Days in the same month as the inclement weather delay. The Owner’s Project Manager shall determine if the Contractor’s request for use of Inclement Weather Days is approved or denied. The Inclement Weather Days activity shall not be statused with an actual start or finish date, or percentage of completion. Rather, it is a graphical accounting tool where the original duration shall be reduced by the agreed to weather impact. Inclement Weather Delays to non-critical activities will not be the basis for adjustment under this Paragraph. If, at Completion, there are inclement weather days remaining, the Completion date shall not be adjusted. If, at completion, additional inclement weather days are required, the Owner shall adjust the Completion date accordingly. Any time extension granted the Contractor due to inclement weather delays shall be in the form of excusable non-compensable days

14. Once approved by the Owner’s Project Manager, the Contractor's (Proposed) Contract Schedule shall be known as the Baseline Schedule and shall be used by the Contractor for executing the Work of the Contract, including planning, organizing and directing the Work, and reporting its progress until further revised. No unilateral changes shall be made to the Baseline Schedule without the prior approval and consent of the Owner, excepting only the reporting of Actual Start, Actual Finish, and Activity Progress.

15. The Contractor shall provide a contract compliant schedule suitable for approval as the Baseline Schedule as indicated in Paragraph 1.02 Submittals.

16. A combined three (3) week Look-Ahead Schedule with a one (1) week As-Built Schedule for the previous week (a total of four (4) weeks depicted) shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner’s Project Manager for review and approval at each progress meeting. The Contractor shall status the schedule on a weekly basis, by using data that is actual and current as of the “status” date. This Look-Ahead Schedule shall be derived from this weekly statusing. The cumulative status of the Look-Ahead schedules shall be the basis for the Monthly Schedule Updates. In no event shall the Contractor utilize a separate schedule for generation and maintenance of the Look-Ahead schedules. Depending on the stage of the Project, the Look-Ahead Schedule will be based upon the Preliminary 90-Day Contract Schedule, (Proposed) Contract Schedule, Baseline Schedule or Monthly Schedule Update.

C. Baseline Schedule Updating and Progress Payments:

1. The Baseline Schedule shall be updated on a monthly basis for the purpose of

recording and monitoring the progress of the work (“Monthly Schedule Updates”), or at lesser intervals if deemed necessary by the Owner’s Project Manager without additional cost to the Owner for reasons such as work activities being thirty (30) calendar days or more behind schedule. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner’s Project Manager each month to review actual progress made to date, activities started and completed to date, and the percentage of work completed to date on each activity started but not completed. Upon completion of the joint review, the Contractor shall prepare the Monthly Schedule Update and submit it to the Owner’s Project Manager. Each Monthly Schedule Update shall be saved with an individual file name that separately preserves the data for each Monthly Schedule Update.



2. The Monthly Schedule Updates shall incorporate all changes mutually agreed upon by the Contractor and the Owner during the preceding periodic reviews and all changes resulting from approved Change Orders and Field Orders. Activities for approved change orders shall be cost loaded. The Contractor shall not make unauthorized or unilateral changes to the activities or logic.

3. Prior to submission of the monthly payment application, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Project Manager a report generated from the previously approved Monthly Schedule Update that reflects the percent of completion by activity. The Contractor and the Owner’s Project Manager shall jointly walk the project to verify the percentage of completion of each activity. Once the percent of completion of each activity is agreed upon, the Contractor shall incorporate this data into the schedule update and these percentages shall be the basis for development of that month’s payment application. The Contractor shall not separate the percentage of completion from the remaining durations in the calculation of the schedule.

4. The schedule calculation setting for the monthly updates shall be “Retained Logic”. The “Progress Override” setting may only be utilized to identify the differential in the calculated finish date due to “Out of Sequence Progress”. Should the differential in the project completion exceed 10 days utilizing the Retained Logic setting versus the Progress Override setting, the successor logic of the Out of Sequence activities shall be revised to eliminate the differential. The Retained Logic setting is the setting that will be used for the analysis of any time extension requests or delay claims

5. Approval of the Monthly Schedule Update will be a condition precedent to the making of any progress payments for work performed.

6. It is explicitly understood that the Monthly Schedule Update are vital to the Owner in managing, monitoring, and administrating the Project. Delays in submitting the schedule updates will have a detrimental effect on the Owner’s ability to perform its responsibilities under the contract.

D. Reports:

1. The (Proposed) Contract Schedule submittal shall include the following:

a. Detailed Bar Chart (“E” size plot); b. Project calendar indicating all non-working periods. c. Activity codes dictionary which shall identify all code values and code

titles used. d. Primavera version 3.1 schedule data for the (Proposed) Contract Schedule

on CD or e-mailed in compressed format to the Owner’s Project Manager. e. After approval of the (Proposed) Contract Schedule as the Baseline

Schedule, Primavera version 3.1 schedule data for the Baseline Schedule shall be submitted on CD or e-mailed in compressed format to the Owner’s Project Manager.

2. Monthly Schedule Updates shall include the following: a. Detailed Bar Chart (“E” size plot). b. Proposed Revisions Report. c. Primavera version 3.1 schedule data for the Monthly Schedule

Update on CD or e-mailed in compressed format to the Owner’s Project Manager.

d. Narrative Report 3. The Monthly Narrative Report shall contain the following information for

each Monthly Schedule Update: a. Description of overall project status b. Description of problem areas (referenced to pending change orders as

appropriate) c. Current and anticipated delays not resolved by approved change order,



including: 1) Cause of the delay 2) Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay 3) Known or potential impact of the delay on other activities and

milestones d. Changes in the construction sequence e. Pending items and status thereof, including but not limited to:

1) Pending Change Orders 2) Time Extension Requests 3) Other Issues relating to Contract Time

f. Contract Completion Date status: 1) If ahead of schedule, the number of calendar days ahead 2) If behind schedule, the number of calendar days behind

g. Other project or scheduling concerns 4. Submittal of the monthly reports and schedule updates by the Contractor are

required regardless of the approval status of the Baseline Schedule or any Monthly Schedule Update.

5. The Contractor shall not make unilateral revisions to the Monthly Schedule Updates. Should the Contractor desire to revise the schedule logic or durations, the Contractor shall first submit the Monthly Update based upon the previous Monthly Schedule Update with just actual start dates, actual finish dates, and/or percentages of completion. Any additional changes other than actual status data will not be allowed. Following this updating and submittal task the Contractor can then submit a copy of this update with its proposed changes. This proposed revised update will clearly be identified as a proposed revision in the Title, Number/Version and File Name. This proposed revision schedule shall be accompanied by a narrative fully explaining the need for each revision.

1.07 RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMPLETION

A. The Contractor agrees that at the sole judgment of the Owner’s Project Manager, whenever it becomes apparent from the current Monthly Schedule Update that the currently adjusted contract completion date will not be met, it will take some or all of the following actions, as approved by the Owner’s Project Manager, at no additional cost to the Owner:

1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially

eliminate, in the judgment of the Owner’s Project Manager, the backlog of work. 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working

days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Owner’s Project Manager, the backlog of work. This paragraph shall not be construed to permit the Contractor to violate the work hour restrictions specified in the Contract Document.

3. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of accomplishment of activities.

4. The Owner’s Project Manager may require the Contractor to prepare a Recovery Schedule that depicts how the above items 1 – 3 will cause the construction to be completed by the currently adjusted contract completion date. The Owner’s Representative may require this Recovery schedule to be: a. That reports and schedule data be submitted as required for Monthly

Schedule Updates Based upon the currently approved Monthly Schedule Update

b. Man loaded; c. Resource loaded



1.08 ADJUSTMENT OF TIMES FOR COMPLETION

A. In addition to provisions of the General Conditions, the time for completion of the work will be adjusted in accordance with these procedures.

B. Any request for an adjustment of the Contract Time for completion submitted by the

Contractor for changes or alleged delays shall be accompanied by a complete Time Impact Analysis, (TIA), which shall be submitted for review within fifteen (15) days after the initial request for time by the Contractor. Time extensions will not be granted unless substantiated by analysis of the approved Monthly Schedule Update that preceded the alleged delay and then not until the project float becomes zero. If the Contractor fails to submit a TIA within the aforementioned time period, then the Contractor shall be deemed to have agreed that there is no time impact and that the Contractor has irrevocably waived its rights to any additional contract time.

C. Each Time Impact Analysis shall provide information justifying the request and stating the

extent of the adjustment requested for each specific change or alleged delay. Each Time Impact Analysis shall be in form and content acceptable to the Owner’s Project Manager, and shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. A fragmentary CPM type network (Fragnet) illustrating how the Contractor

proposed to incorporate the change or alleged delay into the current Monthly Schedule Update; and

2. Identify the activities and logic in the current Monthly Schedule Update that is proposed to be amended due to the change or alleged delay, all activities that are/will be affected by the proposed change or alleged delay, together with engineering estimates and other appropriate data justifying the proposal.

D. The Time Impact Analysis shall be determined on the basis of the date or dates when the

change or changes were issued, or the date or dates when the alleged delay or delays began. The status of the construction project and Time Impact Analysis shall include event time computations for all affected activities including but not limited to work around sequencing, or recovery options to maintain the Current Contract Completion Date.

E. Time Impact Analyses provided in order to demonstrate the time impact upon the overall

project and the time for completion shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. If the Owner’s Project Manager finds, after review of the Time Impact Analysis, that the

Contractor is entitled to any extension of time for completion, the time for completion will be adjusted by Change Order issued by the Owner’s Project Representative, and the Contractor shall then revise the current Monthly Schedule Update accordingly.

1.09 FINAL AS-BUILT SCHEDULE

A. As a condition precedent to final approval of the Project, submit a final As-Built Construction Schedule and all final reports (those reports and plots required by paragraph 1.06 D above), including Primavera version 3.1 schedule data for the As-Built Construction Schedule on CD, which accurately reflect the manner in which the Project was constructed and includes actual start and completion dates for all work activities on the Baseline Schedule.



PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used.

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, Page 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the work, including;

1. Shop Drawings. 2. Product Data. 3. Samples.

B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division-1 Sections and other Contract Documents for

requirements for administrative submittals. 1. Contractor's progress schedule 2. Submittal schedule

1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities. Transmit each submittal no less than forty-five (45) days in advance of performance of related construction activities and in all cases, sufficiently in advance to avoid delay.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals

and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the work so

processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result

of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow a minimum of thirty (30) days for initial review. Allow additional time if

processing may be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Engineer may advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal.

c. Allow a minimum of thirty (30) days for reprocessing each submittal. d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the work to permit processing, or submittals not prepared properly.

e. Work performed by the Contractor without the approval of a submittal is done at the Contractors risk.

B. Submittal Preparation: Prepare each submittal with the following information:

1. Submittal Cover Sheet: Place a Submittal Cover Sheet on each submittal for

identification and transmittal purposes. The cover sheet will include the following information: a. Project Title. b. Submittal number: Sequentially number the submittals. Resubmittals will have

the same original number with an alphabetic suffix.



c. Contractor: Provide company name, mailing address, telephone number and name of the contact person responsible for work on this project.

d. Sub-contractor/Supplier: Provide company name, mailing address, telephone number and name of the contact person responsible for work on this project.

e. Submittal Description: 1) General: Describe contents of submittal completely; identify material or product

name, or model number, and name of manufacturer. State any deviations from Contract Document requirements including minor variations and limitations.

2) Submittal Index: Provide index of all items included in submittal; properly identify with drawing numbers, etc.

f. Specification Section Number: Identify submitted work with Section number and name shown in the Contract Documents. Provide separate submittals for each specification Section, as required.

g. Date: Submission date and revision dates. h. Contractor's stamp: Apply Contractor's stamp, signed certifying that review,

verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents.

i. Provide space for the Engineer's review stamp. 2. Shop Drawings: In addition to the Submittal Cover Sheet, provide a space approximately

4" x 5" on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken.

C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.

Transmit each submittal from Contractor to the Engineer's business address using the Submittal Cover Sheet as a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action, with no extensions of Contract Time. Submittals received without the Contractor's stamp completed will be returned without action with not extensions of contract time.

D. Number of Copies Required:

1. Progress Schedule: See Section 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule. 2. Schedule of Values: See Section 01 29 76, Progress payment Procedures. 3. Certifications: One (1) copy. 4. Shop Drawings: One (1) reproducible transparency and two (2) prints of each original

drawing. 5. Product Data/Material Lists: Seven (7) copies. 6. Samples: a. General: As identified in individual specification Section. b. Color/Pattern Selection: One set of manufacturer's complete range for initial

selection; additional samples as requested of selected color/pattern for final color schedule.

7. Substitutions: Seven (7) copies. 8. Maintenance/Operating Manuals: Three (3) copies. 9. Record Drawings: Reproducible transparencies. 10. Record Survey: Reproducible transparencies. 11. Guarantees: Two (2) copies.

E. Submittal Review:

1. Review: Review of submittals will be for general conformance with the Contract Documents. Review does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for coordinating work with other trades and compliance with requirements of Contract Documents for lengths, fit and other details, or from furnishing materials and work required by contract which may not be indicated on submittals when reviewed. Review does not authorize changes from



Contract requirements. General Contractor is responsible for the accuracy and correctness of all submittals.

2. Color Selections: Engineer will make no selections until all submittals related to color have been received and materials reviewed.

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS SCHEDULE: See Section 01 32 16, Construction Progress Schedule. 1.5 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: See Section 01 29 76, Progress payment Procedures. 1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. In conjunction with development of the Contractor's progress schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 15 days of the date of the Contract.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the

list of products as well as the Contractor's progress schedule. 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during the first

90 days of construction. Provide the following information: a. Scheduled date for the first submittal. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the part of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmittal g. Scheduled date the Engineer's final release or approval.

B. Distribution: Following response by Architect to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the

Architect, District, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the project meeting room and field office.

1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.

Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the work and are no longer involved in construction activities.

C. Revisions: Revise the schedule as necessary and in conjunction with revisions to the

construction schedule, update schedule concurrently with progress schedule. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise clearly and unambiguously indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings.

B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules,

patterns, templates and similar drawings. Include the following information:

1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full- size Drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11" but no larger than 36" x 48". 7. Submittal:



a. Submit one reproducible print for the Engineer's and/or consultants review. b. The Engineer will return the print with appropriate annotations to the Contractor.

The Engineer will send a properly annotated print to the District's inspector. c. The Contractor will reproduce one copy of the approved Shop Drawing, to be

marked up and maintained as a "Record Document". 8. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in

connection with construction. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of shop drawings are in the installer's possession. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of shop drawings in connection with construction.

9. Distribution: Furnish copies of submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

10. Changes shown on shop drawings do not represent changes in Contract Documents. If Contractor believes submittal review has created a change to contract, then the Contractor must notify District and Engineer in writing prior to performing work or purchase of materials, or equipment.

C. Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended.

1. Preparation of coordination Drawings is specified in Section 01 31 13 - Project

Coordination and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data.

2. Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.

a. Engineer: Same requirement as shop drawing submittal. 3. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers,

manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable is in the installer's possession.

b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.

1.8 PRODUCT DATA

A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings."

1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data

includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations and instructions. b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements.

2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed.

3. Submittals: a. Submit 5 copies of each required submittal. The Engineer and District will retain

three and will return the others marked with action taken.



4. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers,

manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable

is in the installer's possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with

construction. 1.9 SAMPLES

A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern.

1. Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of

qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Engineer's Sample. Include the following: a. Generic description of the Sample. b. Sample source. c. Product name or name of manufacturer. d. Compliance with recognized standards. e. Availability and delivery time.

2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these

characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the

material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show actual limits of the variations.

b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics.

c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals.

3. Preliminary submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a full set of choices for the material or product. a. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Engineer's mark

indicating selection and other action. 4. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets; one will be returned marked with the action taken.

5. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the

submittal may serve as the final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated

with each set. B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers,

fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms.



1. Field Samples specified in individual Sections are special types of Samples. Field Samples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish the standard by which the work will be judged. a. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process

transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.

1.10 CERTIFICATIONS

A. General: Where specifically indicated by individual Sections, submit certification of recognized producer or association.

B. Asbestos: Provide written certification that no asbestos or asbestos containing materials

have been included in the work, and that no tools, devices, clothing or equipment containing asbestos have been used to construct the work.

C. V.O.C. Compliance: Provide written certification that materials furnished and installed in

the work comply with Rules on Architectural Coatings applicable in the area of the work as enforced by the local agency having jurisdiction in that area.

D. Qualifications: Under various Sections of these specifications, certain experience

requirements and other qualifications may be required. When such requirements are specified, written certification of all such requirements shall be submitted to the Engineer within fifteen (15) days of date of Notice to Proceed.

1.11 MAINTENANCE/OPERATING MANUALS

A. General: Incorporate in Maintenance/Operating Manual(s) brochures, manufacturer's catalogs and written instructions for equipment and materials needing regular care or maintenance; i.e., mechanical and electrical equipment, etc.

B. Manual:

1. General: Prepare all manuals using durable plastic loose leaf binders approximately 8-1/2 x 11 inches in size with the following minimum data:

2. Identification: On, or readable through, a front cover stating general nature of manual.

3. Index: Neatly typewritten at front of manual; clearly identify location of all emergency data.

4. Operation and Maintenance Data: Complete instructions for all products and equipment required.

5. Repair/Replacement Parts: Complete nomenclature of all replaceable parts, their part numbers, current cost and name and address of nearest vendor of parts.

C. Additional Data: Where contents of manuals include manufacturer's catalog pages,

clearly indicate precise items included in this project and delete, or otherwise clearly indicate, all manufacturer's data which is not in this project.

1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. General: Record drawings shall be kept up-to-date at all times and shall be available for review by District's Project Inspector at any time. Inspector may not authorize Contractor’s pay request if record drawings are not up-to-date.

B. Drawings:



1. General: Engineer will furnish reproducible prints to the Contractor when underground work has been completed.

2. Locations: At time of installation, installed locations of all underground, drainage, plumbing and electrical work, including storm drain grate and invert elevations, shall be recorded on prints by Contractor, and reviewed with Inspector.

3. Documentation: a. General: Transfer installed locations to reproducible prints and submit

inspector approved drawings to Engineer. b. Identification of Changes: All information entered on reproducible prints

shall be neat, legible and emphasized by drawing "clouds" around changed items.

c. Dimensions: Locate all work, including stubs for future connections, with reference to permanent landmarks or buildings and indicate depth below finish grade.

d. Symbols and Designations: Use same as shown on Contract Drawings.

1.13 RECORD SURVEY

A. General: Provide reproducible transparency as required by Section 01 71 23 - Field Engineering. 1.14 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal: Warranties as required under individual Sections of these specifications shall be submitted in a complete package to the Engineer as specified under Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals, prior to completion of the work.

1.15 ENGINEER’S ACTION

A. Submittals for record purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Engineer will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return.

1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.

B. Action Stamp: The Engineer may stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action

stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken:

1. Final Unrestricted Release: where submittals are marked "Reviewed No Exceptions Taken" that part of the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Make Corrections as Noted," that part of the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Rejected" or "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark.

a. Do not permit submittals marked "Rejected" or "Revise and Resubmit" to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where work is in progress.

4. Resubmittals: Resubmittals must correct previous exceptions taken. If previous exceptions are not corrected and additional resubmittals are required, the Contractor will be backcharged for Engineer, consultants, and District personnel and agents time for processing erroneous resubmittals.

5. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information purposes, special processing



or other activity, the submittal will not be returned but may be responded to as acceptance in meeting all elements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable).

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 35 00 – SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, Page 1

SECTION 013500 - SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes

A. The section specifies the administrative and procedural requirements for special environmental issues.

1.2 Historical Archaeological Remains

A. During excavation, or other subsurface construction on the site, the Contractor shall exercise due caution to be on the look out for any signs of archaeological remains, that is, unusual amounts of prehistoric bones, stones or shells, unusual amounts of historical era, debris, bricks, boards or nails, and/or human remains.

B. In the event any of the items noted in “A” above, or similar archaeological items, are

discovered, the contractor will immediately stop work in the affected area and immediately notify the District Project Manager. Work will not resume in the affected area until authorized in writing by the District Project Manager.

1.3 Noise Control

A. The Contractor shall comply with all sound control and noise level rules, regulations, and ordinances which apply to any work performed pursuant to this Contract.

B. All engine driven equipment used for any purpose on the project or related to the project

shall be equipped with muffler of a type recommended by the manufacturer. C. During the construction period, college activities may be particularly sound sensitive. The

District Project Manager will coordinate such time schedules with the Contractor to modify the work schedule to minimize the sound impact.

D. During major ground level demolition and construction activities, the contractor may be

required to provide a sound barrier of plywood or tarps along certain portions of the construction site to reduce the magnitude of the sound impact on college activities.

1.4 Air Pollution

A. The Contractor shall comply with all air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances, and statutes which apply to any work performed pursuant to this Contract, including any air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances, and statutes specified in Section 11017 of the Government Code.

B. The Contractor shall in addition to the air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances

and statutes specified in 1.4A above, comply with the following measures to reduce construction dust and emissions:

1. Apply non-toxic soil stabilizers to all exposed construction areas which have

been graded and are to be inactive for 10 days or more. 2. Enclose, cover or water twice daily any exposed piles of dirt, sand, gravel, or

other construction debris. 3. Water active areas of construction at least twice daily to control wind borne dust. 4. Cover all truck beds hauling dirt, sand, soil, or other loose material to and from

the construction site.


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 35 00 – SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES, Page 2

1.5 Water Pollution Controls

A. The Contractor shall comply with all rules, regulations, ordinances, and statutes which apply to water pollution, including Section 7-1.01G of the CalTrans Standard Specifications.

B. The Contractor shall, in addition to the water pollution control rules, regulations,

ordinances and statutes specified in 1.5A above, comply with the following measures to reduce water pollution at the construction site:

1. Implement the Los Rios Districts Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan if

applicable to the project. 2. Develop a Best Management Plan to prevent and/or mitigate pollution of storm

water runoff at and immediately around the construction site.

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL, Page 1

SECTION 014500- QUALITY CONTROL


A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services.

B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including

reports, performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Engineer, or the District's Project Manager and/or Inspector.

C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements

specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.

D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures,

not production of standard products.

1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures.

2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Engineer, District, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

E. Inspection of the Work: No work shall be done without required inspections. Any work

covered up without inspection must, if required by the Engineer or District's Project Manager or Inspector, be uncovered and replaced at the Contractor's expense, including the expense of testing, if required.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. District Responsibilities: The District will pay the costs of inspections, tests and similar quality/assurance control services specified to be performed by independent agencies and not by the Contractor, except where they are specifically indicated as the Contractor's responsibility or are provided by another identified entity. Costs for services other than Contractor required are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. The District will pay for the services of an independent agency, testing laboratory

or other qualified firm to perform services which are the District's responsibility. B. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform

inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Specification Sections shall cooperate with the Engineer and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.



1. The agency may notify the District of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor, and shall not direct the Contractor to perform any work.

C. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests

and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.

1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking

samples and similar activities. 2. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing

required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations (48 hour minimum) to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to: a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities

necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that

require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of

samples to testing laboratories. d. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for

materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site.

D. Contractor Responsibilities: The contractor, all subcontractors, and suppliers, engaged by the Contractor on the Project shall:

1. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site

conditions and workmanship to produce work of the highest quality. Work shall be performed by persons qualified to produce workmanship of the highest quality.

2. Comply with specified standards to achieve the highest quality for the work. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request in writing clarification from Engineer before proceeding. Reference standard is standard current as of the date of Contract Documents.

3. Strictly comply with all manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request in writing clarification from Engineer before proceeding.

4. Secure all products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.

5. Install field samples and mockups at the site as required by individual specification Sections for review and acceptance. Where field samples and mockups are specified to be removed, clear area of sample/mockup and restore area to acceptable level as directed by District's Project Manager or Inspector.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test, observation, or similar service, to the Engineer, District's Project Manager, Inspector and DSA, unless the Contractor is responsible for the service. If the Contractor is



responsible for the service, to include manufacturers' field services, submit a certified written report of each inspection, test, observation, or similar service through the Contractor, to the Engineer, District's Project Manager.

1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority,

when the authority so directs. 2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall

include, but not be limited to:

a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and an interpretations of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested

Work complies with Contract Document requirements. l. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting.


A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.

1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the project shall be

authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State in which the project is located.

1.5 TESTS

A. Tests of materials and/or special inspection will be made, when required by these Specifications or by applicable laws, rules and regulations by a Testing Laboratory selected by the District. The cost of the tests shall be paid by the District. Tests shall comply with Title 24.

B. When, in the opinion of the Engineer or the District's Inspector/Project Manager,

additional tests or inspection are required because of the manner in which the Contractor executes his work, such tests and inspections shall be paid for by the District, but all costs may be deducted from the Contract Price. Examples of such tests and inspections are: Tests of materials, retests made necessary by failure of material to comply with requirements of the Specifications or plan requirements, etc. readiness for such inspections. Any such work covered up without approval must, if required by the Architect or the District's Inspector/Project Manager, be uncovered and replaced at the Contractor's expense, including the expense of testing, if required.

C. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required

inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the



Contractor's responsibility.

1. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction. The District will pay for retesting and back-charge the contractor for these charges.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect

repaired construction. C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS, Page 1

SECTION 015000- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, including

utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection, provided by Contractor.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities.


A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:

1 Health and safety regulations. 2. Utility company regulations. 3. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules. 4. Environmental protection regulations. 5. Local County Department of Transportation regulations.

B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition

Operations", ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition", and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."

1. Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services",

prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations. 2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations

for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with the California Electric Code (CEC).

C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. D. Water Quality: Comply with requirements for water quality contained in Section 01 35 00

Special Project Procedures. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. If temporary utilities are provided through the local utilities, and only a single service is allowed to the project, the temporary utilities must be shared with all contractors and subcontractors.

B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance.

Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site.

1.5 PUBLICITY



A. The Contractor will not release or allow to be released any information, story, photograph, plan or drawing related to the Project to anyone, including press or other public communications medium, except as submitted and authorized in writing for release by appropriate public relations authority of the District.

1.6 JOB SITE SECURITY

A. Security of the job area shall be strictly maintained by Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for keeping all persons not directly associated with the construction operations from entering the job area without advance approval of the District's Project Manager and the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping areas involved in this work locked at all times when work is not in progress.

1.7 SITE CONTROLS AND PARKING

A. Entrance To Work Site: Contractor and his employees shall use certain access roads and entrances as indicated. Maintain these roads in satisfactory condition during the contract time, and repair damages attributable to work of this project at intervals as needed. At completion of Contract, roads and entrances shall be left in condition at least equal to that existing at start of Contract, except as may be otherwise required by Contract Documents.

B. Site Coverage and Work Areas (Corporation Yard): District will allocate available on-site

storage and work areas to Contractor, subject to change as may be necessary by job progress, such as site development or other intervening work. At conclusion of project, Corporation Yard will be returned to original condition. If in grassed area Contractor will resod as necessary.

C. Parking: Parking will be available at the job site for company vehicles within the fenced

site area only. Parking of personal vehicles belonging to Contractor's employees will be permitted on campus at a site designated by the college at the Pre-Construction Conference.

D. Regulations: Observe and comply with rules and regulations in effect at campuses or

other facilities, including, but not restricted to, parking and traffic regulations, security restrictions, hours of access, and the like.

1.8 USE OF SIDEWALKS AND STREETS

A. Make arrangements with local authorities for temporary use of streets and sidewalks for any purpose. Contractors will abide by all rules, regulations, and ordinances, obtain any permits and pay all fees required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. 2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide new equipment. Provide equipment suitable for use intended.

B. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air- conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading.



1. Provide separate office or a mobile unit for the District representatives of equal quality as the Contractor’s field office (min. 10’x20’).

2. Provide meeting room independent of offices for site meetings. 3. Furnish offices with a desk, chairs, bookcase, plan table, plan rack, and water

cooler. 4. Provide one phone line and high-speed internet connection for District

representative’s office. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. Coordinate with District's Inspector and/or Project Manager.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as

required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service. Where the company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the company's recommendations.

1. Arrange with the company and existing users for a time when service can be

interrupted, where necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary

utility availability, provide trucked-in services. 3. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to

the District or Engineer, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order.

B. Temporary Water Service: Install temporary water service and distribution piping of sizes

and pressures adequate for construction.

1. Water Source: Use water from Owner’s existing water system. This water is not considered potable and should not be used for human consumption.

2. Sterilization: Sterilize all water piping prior to use.

C. Temporary Electric Power Service, if required: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters and main distribution switch gear when required. Provide generators for power as required when electrical service is not available.

1. Electrical Source: Contractor may utilize generators for temporary power or, at

his own expense, propose and provide sub-meters and connections to the Campus existing main power for temporary power. All temporary connection costs are the responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead, and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, AC 20 ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed



cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance.

D. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout the construction period. Contractor shall make all arrangements and pay all charges for telephone services.

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. 2. Provide separate line for on-site fax.

E. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove

effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off the site in a lawful manner.

1. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and

similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. Meet all local and State Agency requirements to prevent discharge outside of property.

2. Connect temporary sewers to the municipal system as directed by the sewer department officials.

3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. Following heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.

F. Storm Drainage: As required by the California State Water Resources Control Board,

only rainwater is permitted in storm drain system. Wash down from equipment, vehicles, and other construction activities shall not be discharged directly into storm drain system. Contractor shall provide temporary containment, sediment traps, and/or gravel filters to prevent discharge of non-storm water into storm drain system.

G. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and

subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains.

3.3 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.

B. Temporary Signs: Provide signs to provide directional information (that is traffic control,

hard hat area, etc.) to construction personnel, supplier, and visitors. Coordinate the location of signs with District Project Manager so as to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the construction site.

C. Temporary Paving: Construct and maintain temporary paving to adequately support the

indicated loading and to withstand exposure to traffic during the construction period. Locate temporary paving storage areas and parking where the same permanent facilities will be located. Review proposed modifications to permanent paving with the Engineer.

1. Maintain temporary paving to existing subgrade, compaction, installation and

stabilization of subbase.

D. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the project's needs.



1. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of

pit-type privies will not be permitted. 2. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient

locations for personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition.

3. Provide safety showers, eye-wash fountains and similar facilities for convenience, safety and sanitation of personnel when required.

4. Drinking Water Facilities: Provide containerized tap-dispenser bottled-water type drinking water units, including paper supply. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7 to 13 deg C).

5. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material.

E. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere

daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Contractor to pay for and insure disposal of material in a lawful manner.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers," and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations."

1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended

purpose. 2. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire

protection facilities and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas.

3. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition.

B. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project,

complete installation of the permanent fire protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.

C. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements

for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.

D. Enclosure Fencing: Fencing shall be provided by the Contractor around the total

construction site to include the Contractor's Corporation Yard. Access gates must be locked during non-construction periods. Contractor will coordinate access control with District's Project Manager.

E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure(s) of partially



completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security.

1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or

attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.

F. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. Comply with environmental requirements outlined in Section 01 35 00 - Special Project Procedures.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from

damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

2. Protection: Prevent water filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.

C. Termination and Removal: Unless the District Project Manager requests that it be

maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the

Contractor. 2. Remove temporary paving that is not intended for or acceptable for integration

into permanent paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that does not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances which might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority.

3. Immediately prior to completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities that have been used during the construction period. Replace significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject to unusual operating conditions.

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 57 13- TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL, Page 1

SECTION 01 5713–TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all materials, equipment and labor necessary to furnish and install straw wattles at locations shown on the Drawings and on Contractors Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan.

B. PERMIT: NOTICE OF INTENT (NOI) Obtain and pay for permit in Owner’s name from

State Water Resources Control Board C. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN: Prepare a Storm Water Pollution

Prevention Plan (SWPPP tailored to the Contractor’s operations, methods and equipment and the requirements of Los Rios Community College District. Comply with State Water Resources Control Board requirements. 1. The SWPPP shall be provided by the Contractor prior to the start of work. The

SWPPP shall be tailored to the contractor’s approach to the work in this contract. The Contractor shall as a minimum address: a. Cut and fill operations b. Temporary stockpiles c. Vehicle and equipment storage, maintenance and fueling operations d. Concrete, plaster, mortar and paint disposal e. Dust control f. Tracking of dirt, mud on off-site streets g. Pipe flushing

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN: The Contractor shall submit and obtain the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan prior to beginning work on site.

B. Notice of Intent (NOI): The Contractor shall submit a NOI to the State Water Resources

Control Board prior to beginning work on site. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. BMPs: Shall be new manufactured units in compliance with state requirements for sediment control. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. BMPs: Shall be installed per the drawings and/or as required by the SWPPP.


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 57 13- TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL, Page 2

3.2 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL

A. Maintain and repair existing and new erosion control facilities throughout the construction period. Remove silt build-up at devices as needed. Repair damage to drains. Sediment control measures shall be left in place until final paving and landscaping are complete.

B. Provide monitoring of sediment control measures before and after storm events. Provide

a daily log of construction activities and impact on erosion control measures. Update SWPPP continuously throughout construction period.

C. Keep area clean of debris. D. Remove erosion control measures prior to placing finish landscaping.

3.3 CLOSEOUT

A. File Notice of Termination with the State Water Resources Control Board.

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS, Page 1

SECTION 016000-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the project.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the construction industry.

1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the work, whether purchased

for the project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name,

including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.

2. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the work.

3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List Schedule: Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed.

1. Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractor's Progress Schedule and

the Schedule of Submittals. 2. Form: Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item

tabulated under the following column headings: a. Related Specification Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's and name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period.

3. Initial Submittal: Within 15 days after date of Contract, submit 3 copies of an initial product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements. a. At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product

selections and designations that must be established early in the Contract period.

4. Completed Schedule: Within 30 days after date of Contract, submit 3 copies of the completed product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements.



5. Architect's Action: The Engineer will respond in writing to the Contractor after

receipt of the completed product list schedule. The Engineer's response will include the following: a. A list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of

reasons for this action.


A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source.

1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot

produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Engineer for a determination of the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes relating to visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources that produce products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible.

B. Compatibility of Options ("or equal"): When the Contractor is given the option of selecting

between two or more products for use on the project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint

manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or,

where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data:

a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft.

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for

items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses.

3. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,



storing, unpacking, protecting and installing. 4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract

Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and

measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store heavy materials away from the project structure in a manner that will not

endanger the supporting construction. 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in

a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that are new and undamaged, that comply with the Contract Documents, and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation.

1. Provide products complete whether completely specified or not with all

accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect.

2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents

and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include the following:

1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or

manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.

2. Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by

the term "or equal," or "or approved equal" comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

3. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.

4. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product

literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 5. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications

only require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified. Certificate covering compliance shall be furnished to Engineer.



a. When Division of State Architect or California State Fire Marshall has approved a product or material it is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain approval for any products submitted as "substitution". Engineers submittal stamp showing review does not deviate the Contractor's responsibility for obtaining approval. Any time spent by Engineer to help obtain approval with Contractor will be billed to Contractor by the District, or held from payment due to Contractor.

6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Engineer's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches

satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS:

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. Install all accessories, trim finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete and finished installation.

1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from

damage and deterioration at time of Completion.

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 71 23- FIELD ENGINEERING, Page 1

SECTION 01 71 23 - FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering services, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Land survey Work.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer

certifying that the location and elevation of improvements comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of work performed and record survey data

as required under provisions of Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Surveyor: The Contractor will engage a Registered Land Surveyor registered in the State of California, to perform land surveying services as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. The Contractor will locate and identify existing control points and property line corner stakes.

B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and

existing benchmarks before proceeding to layout the work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written

approval by District. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations.

2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points. Work to be performed by a registered surveyor.

C. Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced

to data established by survey control points.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

D. Existing utilities: It is recognized by the Contractor that the location of existing utility

facilities as shown on Contract drawings and specifications are approximate; their exact location is unknown.



1. Recognition is given to the fact that there may be additional utilities existing on

the property unknown to either party to the Contract. Location of utilities as shown on drawings and specifications represent the best information obtainable from utility maps and other information furnished by the various agencies involved. The District warrants neither the accuracy nor the extent of actual installations as shown on the drawings and specifications.

2. Because of this uncertainty, it may become necessary for the Engineer to make adjustments in the line or grade of sewers or storm drains. Installation of such adjusted lines shall be made at the regular unit price bid for the work, and no additional compensation will be paid therefor, unless the scope and character of the work has been changed.

3. The Contractor agrees and is required to coordinate and fully cooperate with the District and utility owners for the location, relocation, and protection of utilities. The Contractor's attention is directed to the existence of utilities, underground and overhead, necessary for normal commercial service for all buildings along the line of work. The Contractor shall make arrangements with utility owners for the location of commercial services lines in advance of the actual construction and for the relocation of such facilities, if necessary, by the utility owner or the Contractor.

4. In accordance with Section 4215 of the Government Code of the State of California, the District shall make provisions to compensate the Contractor for the costs of locating, repairing damage not due to the failure of the Contractor to exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating such main and trunk line utility facilities not indicated in the plans and specifications with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment on the project necessarily idled during such work. Compensation will be in accordance with Paragraph 39, Changes, and subject to all of the requirements of Paragraph 37, Claims, of the General Conditions. In the event the Contractor discovers utilities not identified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and the utility owner by the most expeditious means available and later confirm in writing.

5. It is understood and agreed that the failure of the Contractor or his/her subcontractor to comply fully with these provisions constitutes failure of the Contractor to exercise reasonable care and precludes Contractor's recovery from District for any related costs or damages.

3.2 PERFORMANCE

A. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element of the Project. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 1. Advise everyone engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels

provided for their use. 2. As construction proceeds, check every element for line, level and plumb.

B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this

log available for reference, and submit with as-built drawings.

1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and immediately advise the Architect in writing when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted in writing by the District and not corrected.



C. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish lines and levels and layout:

1. Site improvements (pad work) a. Stakes for grading and fill placement. b. Utility slopes and invert elevations.

2. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work.

B. Verify layouts as work proceeds to assure compliance with required lines, levels, and tolerances.

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, Page 1

SECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project close-out, including but not limited to:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning. 6. Training

B. Close-out requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions-2 through -33.

C. Actual completion is required for all work to be completed under each phase.

1.2 COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 2. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the District.

Advise the District's personnel of change-over in security provisions. 3. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the District's operating

and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements.

4. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.

B. Completion: When Contractor determines that all work included under this Contract is

completed and with the concurrence of the District Project Manager, he shall submit written notice of such finding to the Engineer and indicate the time and date for a "punch list" inspection at least five (5) days following the date of the notice.

1. The Engineer will then notify the appropriate consultants, if applicable to make

their inspections and prepare "punch lists". 2. The Engineer and possibly his consultants shall prepare a "punch list" in the

presence of the Contractor as a convenience to the Contractor for items not completed and work unacceptable to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. The "punch list" is not to be construed as a requirement to assist in completion of

the project, and the Contractor shall make a diligent effort to complete all of the work in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents before requesting a "punch list". Corrections of items noted on the "punch list" does not relieve the Contractor from conforming with all requirements of the Contract Documents.



1.3 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation

not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.

3. Submit a certified copy of the Engineer's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. The copy is to be signed by Contractor and dated.

4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Actual completion, or when the District took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the work.

5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement if applicable. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with

insurance requirements.

B. Re-inspection Procedure: The Engineer will re-inspect the work upon receipt of notice that the work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Engineer.

1. Upon completion of re-inspection, the Engineer will prepare a letter of final

acceptance by the Engineer, or advise the Contractor of work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.

2. The Engineer, consultants and District Inspector and/or Project Manager will make only one re-inspection at no cost to the Contractor.

1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Engineer's reference during normal working hours.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain current on a daily basis, a clean, undamaged set of drawing

prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies in any respect from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.

1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish

between variations in separate categories of the work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the District, but was not shown on

Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. 4. Upon completion of the work, obtain one set of reproducible prints from the

original documents available from the Engineer and transfer all comments from the field set of prints to the original prints. Transfer work shall be of professional



quality as performed by a professional draftsperson. 5. Upon completion of the work, submit record drawing prints (electronic and hard

copy) to the District for the District's records.

C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Contract Documents, including addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these documents to show variations in actual work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and Product Data.

1. Upon completion of the work, submit record Specifications to the District for the

District's records.

D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark these documents to show variations in actual work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site, and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record drawings and specifications.

1. Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set of record Product Data to the

District for the District's records.

E. Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to the date or dates of Actual completion, the Contractor will meet at the site with the Engineer and the District's personnel to determine which of the submitted Samples that have been maintained during progress of the Work are to be transmitted to the District for record purposes. Comply with delivery to the District's Sample storage area.

F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements

of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Actual completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the District for the District's records.

G. Maintenance Manuals:

1. General: Incorporate brochures, manufacturer's catalogs and written instructions

for equipment and materials needing regular care or maintenance; i.e., mechanical and electrical equipment, etc.

2. Provide heavy duty, 3-ring vinyl covered binders with clear plastic covers and pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Organize manuals into three (3) suitable sets of manageable size. Deliver three (3) sets of manuals to District's project manager. Provide the following minimum information: a. Typewritten index at front of manual. b. Emergency instructions. c. Copies of warranties. d. Operation and maintenance instructions. e. Wiring diagrams. f. Recommended "turn around" cycles. g. Inspection procedures.



h. Shop drawings and product data. i. Repair/Replacement parts; complete nomenclature of all replaceable parts,

their part numbers, (current cots), and name and address of nearest vendor.

j. Material Safety Data Sheets for all materials used. 3. Additional Data: Where contents of manuals include manufacturer's catalog

pages, clearly indicate precise items included in this project and delete or otherwise clearly indicate manufacturer's date which is not in this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the District's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items:

1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and materials. 4. Tools. 5. Lubricants. 6. Fuels. 7. Identification systems. 8. Control sequences. 9. Hazards. 10. Cleaning. 11. Warranties and bonds. 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.

B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:

1. Start-up. 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean

each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for

completion. a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free

condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore



reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. c. Wipe surfaces of electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and

other substances. d. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter

and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even-textured surface.

C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for

protection of the work during construction. D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety

standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the District's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work

have become the District's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.

E. If Contractor fails or refuses to fulfill these obligations to the District's satisfaction, District

may, at its option, undertake these obligations, and withhold the cost of performing these obligations, plus an additional fee of twenty-five percent (25%) for administrative costs, from payments to Contractor.

F. The contractor shall conduct training sessions for the District’s personnel to instruct the

staff on proper operation, care, and maintenance of the equipment and systems installed. Training shall take place at the project site at a time agreeable to all parties. Allow 10 hours of training to cover the following subjects for each item of equipment or system:

1. Familiarization: a. Review catalog, parts lists, drawings, etc., which have been previously

provided for the plant files and operation and maintenance manuals. b. Check out the installation of the specific equipment items. c. Demonstrate the unit and indicate how all parts of the specifications are met. 2. Safety: a. Using material previously provided, review safety references. b. Discuss proper precautions around equipment. 3. Operation: a. Using material previously provided, review reference literature. b. Explain all modes of operation (including emergency). c. Check out District’s personnel on proper use of equipment. 4. Preventative Maintenance: a. Using material previously noted, review preventative maintenance lists

including: 1. Daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual jobs. 2. Corrective maintenance. 3. Parts 4. Local representatives 5. Operation and maintenance manuals.

END OF SECTION


January 19, 2012 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, Page 1

SECTION 017800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers’ standard warranties on products and special warranties.

1. Specific requirements for warranties for the work and products and installations

that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -33.

2. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to District are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product

warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

C. Except as otherwise specified all work shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against

defects in materials, equipment, or workmanship for one (1) year from date of Notice of Completion.

D. In case of work performed by subcontractors and where guarantees are required under

the various technical Divisions of the Specifications, warranties addressed to and in favor of the District shall be secured from said subcontractors and delivered to the District upon completion of the work. The delivery of said guarantees shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation assumed under any other provision of the Contract.

E. After Final Payment: Neither the final certificate for payment nor any provisions in the

Contract Documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for defective materials or workmanship, and unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from date of Notice of Completion.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the District.

B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the District.

1.3 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting work that has failed, remove and replace other work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work has failed and been corrected by replacement or



rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed,

replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the District has benefitted from use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life, regardless of the cost to replace or rebuild the defective work, and the doctrines of diminution of value and economic waste shall not apply.

D. District's Recourse: Written warranties made to the District are in addition to implied

warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the District can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

1. Rejection of Warranties: The District reserves the right to reject warranties and

to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. The District reserves the right to refuse to accept work for the Project where a special

warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such work or part of the work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

F. In case the Contractor fails to do the work so ordered the District may have the work

done and charge the cost thereof against monies due or to become due the Contractor. If no such monies are available the Contractor and his/her sureties shall pay the District the cost of such work.

G. If within a guarantee and warranty period defects develop due to defects in materials or

workmanship the Contractor shall, within 48 hours after notification to the Contractor by the District and without additional expense to the District:

1. Replace in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such guaranteed work,

correct all defects therein and; 2. Make good all damage to the building or site, or equipment or contents thereof

which, in the opinion of the Architect and the District, is the result of the use of materials, equipment, or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract and;

3. Make good any work or material, or the equipment and contents of said building or site disturbed, in fulfilling any such guarantee.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Contract Documents.

B. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl

covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper.

1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate

warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed



description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer.

2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS, the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor.

3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION (not applicable)

END OF SECTION



GUARANTY-WARRANTY FOR (trade section or item of equipment We hereby warrant and the General Contractor guarantees that the (trade section or item of equipment) which we have installed in the (project name) has been done in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications and that the work as installed will fulfill requirements of the Guaranty-warranty included in the Specifications. We agree to repair any or all of our work together with any other adjacent work which may be displaced or damaged by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or materials within a period of (number) year(s) from date of acceptance of above named buildings, without any expense to the Los Rios Community College District, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted. In the event of our failure to comply with above-mentioned conditions within 48 hours after being notified by the Los Rios Community College District we, collectively or separately, do hereby authorize the Los Rios Community College District to proceed to have said defects repaired and made good at our expense and we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. SIGNED COUNTERSIGNED DATE OF ACCEPTANCE: (month, day, year) TO (month, day, year)

LOS RIOS COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT SCC SOUTH CAMPUS UTILITY IMPROVEMENTS SACRAMENTO, CALIFORNIA

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22 1113 - 1

SECTION 22 1113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for water service and fire-service mains.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.

D. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. 2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic

water.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than two <2> days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Owner's written

permission.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,

and steel bolts.

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

C. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cut, rounded-grooved ends. 1. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe Appurtenances:

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Anvil International, Inc. 2) Victaulic Company of America.

c. Fittings and couplings in subparagraphs below are available in NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600).

d. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

e. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.

D. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron.

E. Lining: Standard thickness cement mortar lining for pipe and fittings, AWWA C104.

F. Buried: Polyethylene encasement, AWWA C105. Double wrap flanged fittings, mechanical joints, or other appurtenances with significantly different outside diameters from the pipe

2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Pipe: PVC pipe shall be bell and spigot with rubber ring joints, minimum Pressure Class 200 AWWA C900 DR-18. Outside diameter pipe dimension shall be manufactured to cast iron pipe equivalent. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listed, Factory Mutual and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved. Elastomeric ring to be factory bonded into bell grove



and meet requirements of ASTM F477. Pipe shall be furnished in minimum standard lengths of 20 feet 1. Fittings: AWWA C111, cast iron mechanical joint type, 250 pound working pressure,

ductile iron, mechanical joints with SBR rubber ring gaskets. Flanged outlets shall conform to ANDI B16.1, 125 pounds.

2. Bolts and nuts for flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel, American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A193, Grade B8M hex head bolts and American Society for Testing and Materials A194, Grade 8M, hex head nuts. Washers shall be of the same material as the bolts.

2.3 CORROSION-PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT

A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: 1. Standards: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 2. Form: Sheet or tube. 3. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness, or high-density,

crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.5 GATE VALVES

A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

B. Gate Valves Up To 3 Inches: 1. Brass or Bronze body, non-rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc, compression

ends, with control rod, and extension box. Working pressure shall be 200 psi.

C. Gate Valves 4 inches and Over: 1. AWWA C509, iron body, bronze mounted, double-disk, parallel seat gate valve. All

valves shall open by turning the stem counterclockwise. Buried valves shall be non-rising type with O ring seal equipped with 2 inch square operating nut, and shall be bituminous coated. Buried valves shall have stem extensions to place operating nut within 6 inch of top of valve box. End connections shall be flanged ends or mechanical joint as required for the type of pipe used. Working pressure shall be 200 psi.

2.6 COUPLINGS AND RESTRAINED JOINTS

A. For DIP and PVC pipe: 1. Unless otherwise noted, couplings and sleeves for DIP and PVC shall be ductile iron

conforming to AWWA C153, size 3 through 24 inch and AWWA C110 greater than 24 inch, and shall be 350 psi working pressure rated. AWWA C100 fittings shall be ductile



iron only. Couplings, sleeves, and accessories shall be manufactured by U.S. Pipe TrimTyte, Union Foundry, Tyler; or equal.

2. Unless otherwise noted, flanges on all DIP spools shall conform to AWWA C115. 3. Push-on joints shall have SBR rubber ring gaskets. 4. All fittings shall be restrained joints. Pipes shall be restrained using a wedge-action, self-

actuating lug type restraint devise as manufactured by EBAA Iron Sales, StarGrip, or equal.

5. All pipe joints within the minimum distances listed below shall be restrained. Restraint shall be by use of locking gasket for ductile iron pipe. Restraint for PVC pipe shall by use of a restraint harness EBAA Series 2800, StarGrip, or equal. a. 8 inch pipe:

1) Horizontal Elbows: a) 11.25 degree bend: 2 foot minimum restraint length. b) 22.5 degree bend: 4 foot minimum restraint length. c) 45 degree bend: 7 foot minimum restraint length. d) 90 degree bend: 18 foot minimum restraint length.

2) Tees: 18 foot minimum restraint length. 3) Reducers: 23 foot minimum restraint length. 4) Dead Ends: 55 foot minimum restraint length.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Mechanical Restraints: 1. PVC Pipes: Certain Teed Certa Lock, Romac Grip Rings, or equal. 2. Ductile Iron Pipes: Field Lock Gaskets, Mega Lug 1100 series, TR Flex, or equal.

B. Rods and Clamps: Socket clamps shall be stainless steel, four bolt type, equipped with stainless steel socket clamp washers and nuts Grinnell Fig. 595 and 594, Elcen Fig. 37 and 37X, or equal. 1. Rods shall be stainless steel, 3/4 inch diameter.

C. All underground domestic water piping shall be accompanied by an HMWPE insulated (blue color) copper clad steel (CCS) tracer wire. Both ends of tracer wire shall be accessible at all utility valve boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.



3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.3 INSTALLATION – PIPE

A. Have on hand all installation manuals, brochures, and procedures for the equipment and materials concerned.

B. Follow manufacturer instructions, where such are provided, in all cases that cover points not shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Manufacturer's instructions do not take precedence over the Drawings and Specifications. Where manufacturer's instructions are in conflict with the Drawings and Specification, submit the conflicting instructions to the District's Representative for clarification before performing the work.

C. Use fittings to make all changes in direction and size unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

D. Maintain factory plastic end covers on the pipe during storage. Caps shall be removed upon installation of pipe to insure cleanliness.

E. Lay piping on a bed of the specified sand, at least 6-inches thick, on firm undisturbed earth. Remove loose rock, clods, and debris from the trench before placing bedding sand and before laying any pipe.

F. The piping shall be made up with the pipe barrel bearing evenly along its full length on the sand bed on the bottom of the trench.

G. In the case of steel or other rigid joint piping, excavate holes under joints and connections for access for making up, welding, testing and wrapping joints.

H. Thoroughly clean out each section of pipe and fitting before lowering into the trench. Clean each pipe or fitting by swabbing-out, brushing-out, blowing-out with compressed air, washing-out with water, or by any combination of these methods necessary to remove all foreign matter.

I. If cleaned pipe sections and fittings cannot be placed in the trench without getting dirt into the open ends, tie tightly woven canvas or other type of approved cover over the ends of the pipes and fittings until they have been lowered into position in the trench. After removal of the covers in the trench, completely remove foreign matter from the pipe ends and fittings.

J. Do not lower any pipe or fitting into a trench that contains water. Pump water from wet trenches, and keep the trenches dry until the joints have been completed and the open ends of the pipes have been closed with watertight plugs or bulkheads. Do not remove the plug or bulkhead unless the trench is dry.

K. Assemble lengths of PVC that are joined by couplings, Tyton type push-on joints, Ring-Tite, Fluid-Tite, or equal, such that centerline of two pipes being joined do not form an angle exceeding 2 inches in any plane. In addition, the angle formed in the vertical plane shall not exceed 1-1/2 inch.



L. Transition plastic pipe to ductile iron when within 10 feet of a steam line. Provide 6 inches minimum powdered insulation around ductile iron sewer pipe when within 5 feet of steam line. Install insulation according to manufacturer's recommendations.

M. Install trace wire on top of pipe.

N. Install continuous line marker 18 inches above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 31 2000 Earthwork.

3.4 INSTALLATION – VALVES

A. Set valves on solid bearing.

B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.

3.5 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SYSTEM

A. Under no circumstances shall existing lines or utilities be interrupted without prior approval of the District. Submit a request for this approval and also state the maximum duration of shutdown.

3.6 PIPE TESTING

A. Water piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 150 psi pressure for four hours and proven watertight. Provide all instruments, facilities, and labor to conduct testing and placing in operation.

B. Piping shall be tested in sections. Testing under this Section of the work shall be done before final connections to existing utility piping is made, with the provision that subsequent leaks, if developed, at these conditions shall be corrected.

C. Any part of the system, including all accessories, that shows failure during testing shall immediately be repaired or replaced with new materials. The system shall be completely retested after repair for replacement. This procedure shall be repeated, if necessary, until all parts of the system withstand the specified tests. All retesting costs shall be part of the Contract.

D. Leakage rate shall not exceed 1.5 gallons/hour/1000 feet of pipe over a 2-hour test period.

E. Tests shall be witnessed by the District. At least 48 hours notice of tests shall be give.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."



3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been

altered, extended, or repaired before use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if

method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.

3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50

ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine

solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

END OF SECTION 22 1113


BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 0500 - 1

SECTION 23 0500 – BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The intent of Division 23 Specifications and Drawings is to provide complete and workable mechanical systems as shown, specified and required by applicable codes. Include all work in Division 23 and shown on the Drawings, including appurtenances, connections, demolition, appliances, and incidental accessories to make work complete and ready for operation.

B. Include minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation and operation of a system or piece of equipment in work and in bid price, the same as if specified or shown.

1.3 ENFORCEABLE CODES

A. The code publications listed below form a part of this specification. This list is not exclusive, local and other codes may also apply: 1. 2013 California Administrative Code (CAC), Part 1, Title 24, California Code of

Regulations (CCR). 2. 2013 California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, Title 24, CCR, (Based on the 2012

International Building Code). 3. 2013 California Electrical Code (CEC), Part 3, Title 23, CCR, (Based on the 2011

National Electrical Code). 4. 2013 California Mechanical Code (CMC), Part 4, Title 24, CCR, (Based on the 2012

Uniform Mechanical Code). 5. 2013 California Plumbing Code (CPC), Part 5, Title 24, CCR, (Based on the 2012

Uniform Plumbing Code). 6. 2013 California Fire Code (CFC), Part 9, Title 24, CCR, (Based on the 2012 International

Fire Code).

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.



B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subjected to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 2. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Publications and Standards listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The Publications and Standards are referenced to in the text by basic designation only. 1. Applicable municipal, county, and state mechanical, electrical, gas, plumbing, health and

sanitary codes, laws, and ordinances. 2. Standards and requirements of local utility companies. 3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association Standards. 4. National Electrical Safety Code. 5. National Electrical Testing Association. 6. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. Standards. 7. American National Standards Institute. 8. American Society for Testing Materials Standards. 9. National Fire Protection Association Standards. 10. American Society of Mechanical Engineers Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. 11. American Water Works Association. 12. Occupational Safety and Health Act. 13. Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards. 14. American Gas Association. 15. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. 16. Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractor’s National Association Standards. 17. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standards. 18. American Welding Society.



1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Division 01.

B. Coordination Drawings: Each trade shall be responsible for their own respective coordination drawing effort with the Mechanical contractor being the coordination effort team leader. Drawings shall be electronic (AutoCAD) and each trade shall have the ability to coordinate electronically (xref) into each other’s drawings for collision checking and spatial conditions. When coordination effort is completed contractors shall sign drawings demonstrating that they are buildable shop drawings. Coordination drawings can also be used as the contract “as-builts” at project completion.

C. Submit required copies of shop drawings, product data, samples, schedules and reports as required by individual Division 22, and 23 Sections.


A. Provide Work and materials in accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the California State Fire Marshal and the California State Department of Public Health, Titles 17 and 24; the California Plumbing Code and California Mechanical Code, IAPMO; the NFPA Pamphlet 13, 14, 24, 291; and other applicable laws or regulations.

B. Where the standards of the drawing and specifications for materials and/or workmanship are higher than the requirements of the regulations cited above, the drawings and specifications shall take precedence; otherwise the regulations shall govern.

C. Provide materials and apparatus that bear the UL label where such label is applicable.

D. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code – Steel”.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect materials from corrosion, contamination, degredation, and breakage. Provide appropriate covering.

B. Replace any materials which are damaged or degraded by improper storage with new.

1.9 SITE VISITATION

A. Visit the site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing conditions and other factors which may affect the execution of the work. Include all related cost in the initial bid proposal.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for hydronic installations.



B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for Hydronic items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.

D. Coordinate all equipment and piping layout with other trades.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01.

B. Provide manufacturer’s written warranties covering defects in materials and workmanship of products and equipment utilized for this project.

C. Each complete system shall be warranted for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion.

D. Each system shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship, and shall perform satisfactorily under all conditions of load or service.

E. The warranties shall provide that all additional controls, protective devices, or equipment be provided as necessary for operation of the system or equipment.

F. Replace or repair faulty materials or workmanship at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. See specific sections for additional equipment warranty items.

1.12 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS MANUALS

A. Provide 2 copies of complete Manual, bound in booklet form, plus an electronic copy on permanent storage media. Each manual shall contain the following information: 1. List of all equipment with manufacturer’s name, model number, and local representative,

service facilities, and the normal channel of supply for each item. 2. Manufacturer’s literature describing each item of equipment with detailed parts list. 3. Equipment service schedules and IOMs. 4. Equipment warranties. 5. Certificates of Inspection. 6. Record Blueprints and related Shop Drawings. 7. Air and Water Systems Balance Reports.

1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain at the site an up to date set of prints of Engineering Drawings which clearly indicate (by shading, coloring or some other acceptable method) the daily extent of Work installed.



B. Indicate on Drawings changes in elevation, location, or size of material deviating from original design.

C. Clearly indicate any dimension changes in elevation, location, size or material, and offsets for valves.

D. Locate all underground, concealed or buried piping by two or more dimensions per turn of pipe between each direction change.

E. Show all elevations (invert or centerline) with the point of elevation change clearly located.

F. Number and letter valves to correspond with numbers and letters of valve charts.

G. At conclusion of contract work, provide the Owner’s Representative with a complete set of reproducible drawings with all changes clearly marked to reflect as-built conditions. These drawings shall be labeled “As-Builts”. Updated Coordination drawings can be used as the contract “As-Built” drawings at project completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer’s names and model numbers used for materials, processes, or equipment in Division 22 and 23 provide the basis for design and the minimum standards of quality, utility and appearance.

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. For substitutions see Division 01.

B. If not specified in Division 01: 1. Substitutions only from list provided. 2. Contractor is responsible for all alterations required to make substituted product work. 3. Contractor is responsible for all coordination of other trades required by substitution. 4. Contractor is responsible for any engineering and structural or seismic modifications to

the equipment supports and structure, etc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION

A. Remove fixtures and equipment not to remain in service as shown on Drawings or as required. This includes the removal of associated appurtenances and supports.

B. Patch, cap, or repair existing work affected by this demolition in concealed spaces within six (6) inches of a live main or branch.



C. Deliver removed materials to be retained by the Owner for storage on-site as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Properly dispose of all other removed material off site.

D. Where hazardous and carcinogenic materials are encountered, stop the work immediately and notify the Owner’s Representative.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General Installation Method: 1. Examine site related work and surfaces before starting work of any Section:

a. Report to Owner’s Representative, in writing, conditions which will prevent proper execution of this work.

b. Beginning work of any Section without reporting unsuitable conditions to Owner’s Representative constitutes acceptance of conditions by Contractor.

c. Perform any required removal, repair, or replacement of any unacceptable work caused by unsuitable conditions at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Provide a complete and properly operating system for each item of equipment called for under this work. Install in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions, published standards, the best industry practices, and the Contract Documents.

C. Make installations in a neat, finished, and safe and professional manner. Install all materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s required or recommended procedures.

D. Coordinate with shop drawings for work done by other trades.

E. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

F. Arrange for chases, sleeves, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for installation of ductwork and piping.

G. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves.

H. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. Maintain all manufacturer required service clearances.

I. Install HVAC equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

J. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

K. Install systems, materials, and equipment to comply with approved submittal data. Comply with arrangements indicated by the Drawings, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form.

L. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.



3.3 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.4 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.5 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. Apply adhesive to existing concrete surfaces to assure bonding.

C. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases, and surrounding any and all anchors. Avoid air entrainment. Provide a smooth finished surface. Allow grout to cure before placing in service.

3.6 PIPE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION, VIBRATION

A. Install pipe connections to allow for movement of piping during expansion, contraction, or vibration. Provide expansion loops, flex connections, and expansion joints with proper anchors and guides as required or where shown on Drawings. Anchors and guides shall be subject to review.

B. Motor driven equipment shall operate quietly and shall be free of vibration.

C. Construct and brace metal partitions, ducts, sheet metal housings, and similar items so that there will be no vibration or rattling when the system is in operation.

D. Design and construct connections to the equipment so that noise and vibration will not reach the conditioned areas through ducts, conduits, piping, and sheet metal of the building construction.



3.7 MANUFACTURER’S IDENTIFICATION

A. Manufacturer’s nameplate, name, or trademark shall be permanently affixed to all equipment and materials furnished under this Specification. The nameplates of Subcontractor or Distributor are not acceptable.

3.8 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, AND HOISTING

A. Contractor is responsible for all scaffolding, rigging, and hoisting equipment required for the installation of materials and equipment. Coordinate rigging and scaffolding with other trades.

B. Where access openings must be cut in the structure or additional bracing must be added to the structure, contractor is responsible for all work required to repair the structure back to original conditions. See CUTTING AND PATCHING.

C. Protect all roofs, walls, floors, and other finished surfaces from damage when installing large equipment.

D. For additional requirements of this work, see Division 01.

3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Comply with requirements of Division 01.

B. Cut completed Work only where sleeves, openings, chases, and similar items were omitted and only with specific permission of the Owner’s Representative. In no case shall reinforcing steel be cut without specific written permission of the Owner’s Representative.

C. Provide sleeves, caps, plates, escutcheons, flashing, and similar items required to fill or close the openings.

D. Provide final grouting, concrete, asphalt, masonry, painting, and other materials as required to complete patch work.

E. Where cutting and patching occurs in streets, sidewalks, alleys, and the like, cooperate fully with the Owner’s Representative and municipal or other government bodies to match existing materials.

3.10 OPERATION BY OWNER

A. The Owner may require operation of parts or all of respective installations prior to final acceptance. Cost of utilities for such operation shall be paid by Owner.

3.11 TEST AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Labor, materials, instruments, and power required for testing provided under respective Sections for Work under that Section.



B. Test shall be performed as specified or as required by regulating authority having jurisdiction. Submit to Owner’s Representative certification that tests have been performed in accordance with Contract Documents.

C. Pressure test piping before connection to equipment. No piping, equipment, or accessories shall be subjected to pressures exceeding their indicated rating.

D. Repair or replace defective Work and repeat tests until particular systems, and component parts thereof, receive approval of Owner’s Representative and regulating authority. 1. Any damages resulting from test shall be repaired and damaged materials replaced at no

cost to Owner.

E. Equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons of the year shall be tested during the appropriate season. 1. Perform test on individual equipment, systems, and their controls. 2. Whenever the equipment or system under test is inter-related with, and depends upon the

operation of other equipment or systems and their controls for proper operation, functioning, and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with equipment or system being tested.

F. No piping or ductwork shall be closed up, furred in, or covered before testing. Notify regulating authority and Owner’s Representative 3 days before test are to be conducted.

G. Test all systems as specified under various applicable Sections. Duration of test shall be determined by the authority having jurisdiction and in no case less than the time specified.

H. Drain water used for testing from the system after test are complete. Repair or replace any damages caused by freezing of water left in system at no expense to the Owner.

I. Test and balancing of air and hydronic systems specified under other appropriate Sections.

3.12 TERMINATIONS AND CLEANING

A. The Work includes removing tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, barricades, temporary walks, debris, and rubbish from the Project promptly upon completion of that portion of the Work. Leave the area of operations completely clean and free of these items.

B. During the course of construction, cap all ducts, pipes, and electrical conduits in approved manner to insure adequate protection against entrance of foreign substances.

C. Disconnect, clean, and reconnect, whenever necessary, to locate and remove obstructions from any system. Repair or replace any Work damaged in the course of removing said obstructions at no additional cost to the Owner.



3.13 INSTRUCTIONS FOR OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Prior to acceptance of Work and during time designated by the Owner’s Representative, provide qualified personnel to operate each system for a period of 48 hours during 2 consecutive work days.

B. During operating period, fully instruct Owner’s personnel in complete operation, adjustment, and maintenance of each system.

C. See specific sections for additional startup and training procedures.

3.14 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Special tools or safety equipment: Provide one of each tool or piece of safety equipment required for proper operation and maintenance of equipment installed under this Work.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0518 - 1

SECTION 23 0518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew.

B. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed and exposed-rivet hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0518 - 2

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 1. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.

b. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with rough-brass finish.

c. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.

d. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting brass type with rough-brass finish. e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed

or exposed-rivet hinge.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0519 - 1

SECTION 23 0519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Filled-system thermometers. 2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 3. Thermowells. 4. Dial-type pressure gages. 5. Gage attachments. 6. Test plugs.



1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ashcroft Inc. b. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.



c. Weiss Instruments, Inc. d. Or equal.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 5-inch nominal diameter. 4. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element. 5. Movement: Mechanical, dampening type, with link to pressure element and connection to

pointer. 6. Dial: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in

deg F and deg C. 7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 8. Window: Glass. 9. Ring: Stainless steel. 10. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in

horizontal plane, with locking device; with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 11. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem and

of length to suit installation. a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

12. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Miljoco Corporation. c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. e. Trerice, H. O. Co. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. g. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F and deg C. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:



1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA. 4. Type: Stepped shank . 5. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 6. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 7. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ashcroft Inc. b. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc. d. Or equal.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 6-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi

and kPa. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Stainless steel. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.6 TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.



3. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 4. Or equal.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

H. Install test plugs in piping tees.

I. Install thermometers as shown on drawings and in the following locations: 1. Install thermometer at each side of bypass bridge piping, supply and return, heating and

chilled water.

J. Install pressure gages as shown on drawings and in the following locations: 1. Either side of wye strainer. Alternately, use a shared gage in ¼ stainless steel instrument

piping, with ball isolation valves.



3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Install as shown on drawings.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled or Heating Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi.



GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 - 1

SECTION 23 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Single- or double- flange butterfly valves.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve applicable to project.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.



2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

B. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

D. Valve-End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

E. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Three piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full.



2.3 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 200 CWP, Iron Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Conbraco “Apollo” b. NIBCO Inc. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

3. Handles a. Minimum ten position lever operated handle. b. Extended handle to clear insulation. c. Locking device where specified on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.



B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 1. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below. 3. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Grooved-End Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.4 HEATING- AND CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Ball Valves: Three piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron, Single- or Double Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP,

EPDM seat, ductile-iron disc. 2. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP. 3. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves, NPS 14 to NPS 24: 300 CWP.



IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 - 1

SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Valve labels. 2. Pipe labels.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated as applicable.

B. Valve and Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all valves and equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. Minimum ¼” lettering.

2. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. a. When applied inside the weatherproofing membrane of the building, use contct

adhesive with a VOC content of 89 g/l or less when calculated according to EPA Reference Test Method 24, with the exempt compounds’ content determined by Method 303.

b. Meet more stringent local requirements where they exist.

B. Label Content: Unique equipment number per campus standards.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number



and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Self-Adhesive or Snap Around Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inches high.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Stainless steel wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on Air Separators as directed by owner’s representative. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.



3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels adjacent to and on either side of new bridge piping.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule per ANSI Standard A31.1-2007: 1. Chilled Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White.

2. Heating Water Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems. Coordinate numbering with campus numbering system, and provide a valve tag list to owner’s representative for review. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.



HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719 - 1

SECTION 23 0719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems: 1. Chilled-water piping, indoors. 2. Heating hot-water piping, indoors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General article for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

D. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. In general, adhesive is to be supplied by the same company that provides the insulation, or specifically listed as compatible by same.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand; CP-127. b. Eagle Bridges – Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand; 85-60/85-70. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based

adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and

Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 2) Or equal.

3. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms (0.86 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

2.4 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

C. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

D. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

E. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

F. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

4. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

G. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

H. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.



3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, air separators, flanges, unions, and other

specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.



3.6 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

3.7 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water and Brine: 1. NPS 12 (DN 300) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inches (50 mm) thick.

B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return: 1. NPS 12 (DN 300) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

3.8 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed or Piping in Mechanical Rooms not subject to damage: 1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed in Mechanical Rooms and subject to damage: 1. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.



AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (ATC) / BUILDING MANAGEMENT CONTROLS SYSTEMS (BMCS) 23 0900-1

SECTION 23 0900 – AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (ATC) / BUILDING MANAGEMENT CONTROLS SYSTEMS (BMCS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Related Documents

B. Description of Work

C. Work by Others

D. Manufacturer of System and Quality Assurance

E. Submittals

F. ATC/BMCS Start-Up and Test Report

G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

H. System Architecture

I. Warranty

J. Materials and Equipment, Surge Protection


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Mechanical Sections

C. Electrical Sections

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Contractor shall furnish and install an Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system, utilizing direct digital control (DDC), and Building Management and Control System (BMCS) as an extension of the existing district ATC/BMCS. The new ATC/BMCS shall utilize electronic sensing and microprocessor based digital control to perform the control sequences and functions specified. Refer to Points List and sequences of operation.

B. Control system server and operator workstation hardware and software are existing. All new hardware and data file shall be fully integrated into the existing system as an extension of the existing Honeywell system.

1.04 WORK BY OTHERS



A. Control valves furnished under this section shall be installed under the applicable piping section. Section 23 09 00 controls contractor, will be fully responsible for the proper operation of the valve.

C. ABB Variable Frequency Drives with integrated Bypass (Eclipse) shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor. VFD manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper configuration, start-up and commissioning of the VFD. VFDs with bypass to be located in the TCP section inside of AHU.

D. Water pressure taps, thermal wells, flow switches, flow meters, etc. that will have wet surface taps, shall be installed under the applicable piping section. Section 23 0900 controls contractor, will be fully responsible for the proper installation and application.

E. The Division 16 electrical contractor shall be responsible for providing 120V control power to ATC/BMCS control panels and unitary controllers as needed.

1.05 MANUFACTURER OF DDC COMPONENTS/SYSTEM

A. The ATC/BMCS and digital control and communications components installed as work of this contract shall be an integrated distributed processing system of the following manufacturer.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer

1. Honeywell (Excel 5000 family)

2. Substitutions: None


A. Manufacturer: Honeywell International.

B. Installer's Qualifications:

1. The system shall be furnished and installed by the manufacturer of the control system. Installations by contractors, dealers, distributors or value added resellers are not acceptable. Installation shall be by the local branch office of Honeywell HBS, 1740 Creekside Oaks Drive, Suite 150, Sacramento, CA 95833. Contact 916 923 7827.

2. Substitutions: None.

C. ATC/BMCS System Qualifications: System shall be based on Manufacturer's standard integrated hardware and software product offering, which has been installed and fully operational in similar service for not less than 1 year by the submitting contractor.

D. Codes and Standards:

1. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)



2. Underwriters Laboratories

3. UL 916: Energy management Systems.

4. NEMA Compliance:

5. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

6. NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences.

7. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).

8. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

9. Electronics Industries Associations

10. EIA 232 “Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange.”

11. EIA 485 “Standard for Electrical Characteristics of Generator and Receivers for use in Balanced Digital Multi-point Systems.”

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device, panel, and accessory furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Submittals shall be in two phases: Phase 1 shall include all hardware submittals; physical input output summaries; valve schedules; control shop drawings and sequences of operations; panel and wiring diagrams. Phase 2 which shall be submitted after Phase 1 submittals have been approved shall consist of all software documentation as called for herein.

B. Control Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system. Submit a completed drawing for each system, pump, device, etc. with all point descriptors, addresses and point names indicated. Shop drawings shall be submitted both on paper and electronic media as an AutoCAD drawing file (all supporting files such as font and reference files must also be provided). The shop drawings shall contain the following information:

1. System architecture one-line diagram indicating schematic location of all control units, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each control unit. Indicate protocol, baud rate, and type of each LAN.

2. Floor plans depicting all mechanical rooms in relation to building footprint and locations of HVAC equipment, control devices, actuators, sensors, motor control centers (MCC’s) and temperature control panels.

3. Schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment and control devices. Include verbal description of Sequence of Operation.



4. All physical points shall be indicated with names and point addresses identified.

5. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.

6. Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic. Indicate device identification to match schematic and actual field labeling, quantity, actual product ordering number, manufacturer, description, size, voltage range, pressure range, temperature range, etc. as applicable.

7. Provide a valve and actuator information schedule including size, Cv, design flow, design pressure drop, manufacturer, model number, close off rating, etc. Indicate normal positions of spring return valves and dampers.

8. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

9. Show details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling shown in plan or elevation indicating the installed locations.

10. Provide a points list including all physical I/O and virtual points (all-encompassing points list in addition to those provided on the schematics). Points list shall be provided in both hard copy and in electronic format. (Quote and Comma Delimited, ACCESS data table, or EXCEL spreadsheet formats are acceptable formats.)

11. Each sheet shall have a title indicating the type of information included and the HVAC system controlled.

12. Include a Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers.

13. Include a legend and list of abbreviations.

C. Software documentation

1. Submit software graphical flow diagrams to document the control software of all control units. Graphical flow diagrams shall be standard configuration software system printouts. Each control loop for each piece of mechanical equipment shall be a separate plant with a dedicated diagram for each plant.

2. Software diagrams shall be annotated to describe how it accomplishes the sequence of operation. Annotations shall be sufficient to allow an operator to relate each program component (block or line) to corresponding portions of the specified Sequence of Operation.

3. Include a written description of each control sequence. See standard sequences at the end of this section.

4. Include control response, settings, set points, throttling ranges, gains, reset schedules, adjustable parameters and limits.



5. Each sheet shall have a title indicating the controller designations and the HVAC system controlled.

6. Include Table of Contents listing sheet titles and sheet numbers.

1.08 ATC/BMCS START-UP TEST REPORT:

A. Submit draft test sheets and checklists as required for the Start-Up Test Report prior to start of commissioning for review.

B. Submit Final Test Report documenting that the ATC/BMCS/ has been fully tested, adjusted and calibrated and is ready for demonstration and commissioning. Report shall include, but shall not be limited to, completed test sheets and checklists.

1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS:

1. Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory.

2. Include all submittals (product data, shop drawings, control logic documentation, installation guides or manuals, maintenance instructions and spare parts lists) in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

3. Include a copy of the ATC/BMCS commissioning Final Test Report.

1.10 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The system provided shall incorporate hardware resources sufficient to meet the functional requirements of these Specifications. The Contractor shall include all items not specifically itemized in these Specifications which are necessary to implement, maintain, and operate the system in compliance with the functional intent of these Specifications.

B. The existing operator workstations shall provide for overall system supervision, operator interface, management report generation, alarm enunciation, remote monitoring and back-up and loading of software and data to be stored in control unit volatile memory.

C. The primary and secondary control units shall monitor, control, and provide the field interface for all points specified. Each GPC or UC shall be capable of performing all specified energy management functions, and all Distributed Digital Control (DDC) functions. See points list at the end of this section.

D. All modems, line drivers, signal boosters, etc. shall be provided as necessary for proper data communication.

E. The Owner shall provide network hardware, installation and configuration as necessary for connection of the ATC/BMCS LAN to the Owner’s district network and for portable Graphic Operator Workstation connection the Owner’s district network.

1.11 WARRANTY



A. Contractor shall warrant all products and labor for a period of one year after Final Acceptance.

1.12 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials shall be new, the best of their respective kinds without imperfections or blemishes and shall not be damaged in any way. Used equipment shall not be used in any way for permanent installation except where drawings or specifications specifically allow existing materials to remain in place.

-

1.13 SURGE PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install power supply surge protection, for all GPC power supplies. Surge protection shall be general purpose metal-oxide-varistor-(MOV) based power line surge protectors designed to protect electronic equipment from surges and spikes that may be present on power inputs. They shall be self restoring after each surge within ratings and shall be UL listed. Kele DTK-120HW or equal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Control Panels

B. Control Valves

C. Actuators

D. General Field Devices

E. Temperature Sensors

F. Pressure Transmitters and Switches

G. Transducers

H. Flow Meters

I. Electric Control Components

J. Nameplates

K. General Purpose and Unitary Controllers

L. Input and Output Interface

2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT



A. General: Provide control products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting of valves, dampers, thermostats, clocks, controllers, sensors, and other components as required for complete installation. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard materials and components as published in their product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for application indicated.

2.03 CONTROL PANELS

A. Provide control panels with suitable brackets for wall mounting for each control system. Locate panel inside AHU.

B. Control Panels shall be NEMA 3R rated for any outdoor application or indoor application with potential for exposure to water; NEMA 1 rated for any other indoor application.

C. Control panel shall be completely wired and piped, and all electrical connections made to a labled terminal strip.

D. Provide finger-safe terminal strips, with individual identification, in the required quantity plus 25% spare.

E. All gauges and control components shall be identified by means of nameplates.

F. All control tubing and wiring shall be run neatly and in an orderly fashion in open slot wiring ducts with cover.

G. The Temperature Control Panel (TCP) shall be provided with internal (within the panel) DDC override switches that are clearly marked and can be used in the event of the DDC system failure or for testing purposes.

1. Each analog output shall be equipped with a hand potentiometer for local override of the automatic control signal.

2. Each digital output shall be equipped with manual switches (0-AUTO-1), which shall provide local override of individual outputs.

3. In lieu of switches or potentiometers a local operator’s terminal permanently mounted in the panel and providing the same functionality may be provided.

H. Complete wiring and tubing termination drawings shall be mounted in or adjacent to each panel.

2.04 CONTROL VALVES

A. General: Provide factory fabricated control valves of type, body material and pressure class as determined by manufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, based on maximum pressure and temperature in piping system. Provide valve size in accordance with scheduled or specified maximum pressure drop across control valve. Equip control valves with heavy-duty actuators, with proper shutoff rating for each individual application. Minimum close-off rating shall be 30 psig.



B. Plug-Type Globe Pattern for modulating water service:

1. Valve Sizing: Modulating valves shall be sized for maximum as indicated on the mechanical schedule in the mechanical plans. Two-position valves shall be same size as connecting piping. Modulating valves shall have minimum rangeability of 100 to 1.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers are as follows:

a. Honeywell

b. Bray Series 70 actuators with manual wheel and indicator for outside applications.

C. Butterfly Type for two position isolation use only:

1. Body: Extended neck epoxy coated cast or ductile iron with full lug pattern, ANSI Class 125 or 250 bolt pattern to match specified flanges.

2. Seat: EPDM.

3. Disc: Bronze or stainless steel, pinned or mechanically locked to shaft.

4. Bearings: Bronze or stainless steel

5. Shaft: 416 stainless steel

6. Cold Service Pressure: 175 psi.

7. Bubble-tight shutoff to 150 psi.

D. Ball Type for two position isolation use:

1. Body: Brass or Bronze; one, two, or three piece design; threaded ends.

2. Seat: Reinforced Teflon.

3. Ball: Stainless steel.

4. Port: Standard or ‘V’ style.

5. Stem: Stainless steel, blow-out proof design, extended to match thickness of insulation.

6. Cold Service Pressure: 600 psi WOG.

7. Steam working Pressure: 150 psi.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Honeywell



9. Substitutions: none

E. Segmented/Characterized Ball Type for modulating water service:

1. Body: Carbon Steel (ASTM 216), one piece design with wafer style ends.

2. Seat: Reinforced Teflon (PTFE).

3. Ball: Stainless steel ASTM A351.

4. Port: Segmented design with equal percentage for typical heat exchanger duty or linear characteristic for building loop connections or where specified.

5. Stem: Stainless steel.

6. Cold Service Pressure: 200 psi WOG.

7. Cavitation Trim: Provide cavitation trim where indicated and/or required, designed to eliminate cavitation and noise while maintaining an equal percentage characteristic. Trim shall be a series of plates with orifices to break the pressure drop into multiple stages.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Honeywell

9. Substitutions: none

2.05 ACTUATORS

A. Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified.

B. Select spring return actuators with manual override to provide positive shut-off of devices for the following applications:

1. Building CHW and HHW isolation valves.

2. Central Plant mixing, diverting and isolation valves.

3. The spring return shall return the actuator to the fail-safe position within 20 seconds of power loss. Actuators shall have manual actuator override to allow operation of the valve when power is off. The override may be a removable wrench or lever.

C. Provide NEMA 3R rating for all actuators used in outdoor applications.

D. Ambient Operating Temperature Limits: -5 to 140°F.

E. Provide actuators for two position (24V), or modulating (0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, or PWM) service as required. Actuators shall travel full stroke in less than 90 seconds. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque and be UL 873 listed.



1. Provide stroke indicator.

2. Where two actuators are required in parallel or in sequence provide an auxiliary actuator driver.

3. Actuators shall have current limiting motor protection.

F. Close Off Pressure: Size actuator torque and spring return to meet required close off pressure. Required close off pressure for water valve applications shall be the shutoff head of associated pump. Required close off rating of steam valve applications shall be design inlet steam pressure. Required close off rating of air damper applications shall be shut off pressure of associated fan.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers are as follows:

1. Honeywell

2. Substitutions: None

2.06 GENERAL FIELD DEVICES

A. Provide field devices for input and output of digital (binary), and analog, signals into control units. Provide signal conditioning for all field devices as recommended by field device manufacturers, and as required for proper operation in the system.

B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to assure that all field devices are compatible with control unit hardware and software.

C. Field devices specified herein are generally "two-wire" type transmitters, with power for the device expected to be supplied from the respective GPC/UC. If 1) a field device is to serve as input to more than one GPC/UC, or 2) the wiring lengths will result in a voltage drop in excess of those recommended by the manufacturer or of that which will allow the accuracies specified, the Contractor shall provide "four-wire" type equal transmitter and necessary regulated DC power supply or 120 VAC power supply, as required.

D. For field devices specified hereinafter that require signal conditioners, signal boosters, signal repeaters, or other devices for proper interface to GPC/UC, Contractor shall furnish and install proper device, including 120V power as required. Such devices shall have accuracy equal to, or better than, the accuracy listed for respective field devices.

E. Accuracy, as stated in this Section, shall include combined effects of nonlinearity, no repeatability and hysteresis.

2.07 TEMPERATURE SENSORS (TS)

A. Sensor range: When matched with A/D converter of the control unit, sensor range shall provide a resolution of no worse than 0.3° F (0.16° C) (unless noted otherwise). Where thermistors are used, the stability shall be better than .25° F over 5 years.



B. Room temperature sensor shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide insulated base. The following sensing elements are acceptable:

1. Sensing element - Platinum RTD, Thermistor, or integrated circuit, ± 0.4° F accuracy at calibration point.

C. Single point duct temperature sensor shall consist of sensing element, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. Temperature range as required for resolution indicated in paragraph A. Sensor probe shall be 316 stainless steel.


D. Averaging duct temperature sensor shall consist of an averaging element, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and quantities to result in one lineal foot of sensing element for each three square feet of cooling coil/duct face area. Temperature range as required for resolution indicated in paragraph A.

1. Sensing element - Platinum RTD, or Thermistor, ± 0.4° F accuracy at calibration point.

E. Liquid immersion temperature sensor shall include thermowell, sensor and connection head for wiring connections.

1. Sensing element (chilled water/glycol systems)- Platinum RTD ± 0.4° F accuracy at calibration point. Temperature range shall be as required for resolution of 0.4° F.

2. Sensing element (other systems) - Platinum RTD, Thermistor, or integrated circuit, ± 0.4° F accuracy at calibration point. Temperature range shall be as required for resolution of 0.3° F.

F. Outside air sensors shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight gasket to prevent water seepage. Temperature range shall be as required for resolution indicated in paragraph A.


G. Temperature Transmitters

1. Where required by control units, sensors as specified above may be matched with transmitters outputting 4-20 mA linearly across the specified temperature range. Transmitters shall have zero and span adjustments, an accuracy of .1° F when applied to the sensor range.

2.08 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (DPT)



A. General Purpose Water: Two wire transmitter, 4-20 mA output with zero and span adjustments. Plus or minus 0.5% FS overall accuracy. Maximum system pressure: 362 psig (2500 kPa) for 60 psid range; 725 psig (5000 kPa) for 100 psid range and above. Rupture pressure 1.5 x maximum system pressure. Ambient and media temp ratings 4 to 176 Deg F (-15 to 80 Deg C). Wetted parts 303 stainless, FPM seals. DPW-692 or approved equal.

1. Provide a five-valve bypass kit for water DP sensors. Kit shall include high and low pressure isolation valves, high and low pressure vent valves, and a bypass valve contained in a NEMA 1 enclosure.

B. General Purpose Air: Sensor shall have four switch selectable ranges:0.1, 0.25, 0.5 and 1.0 in. w.c. for 1 in. models, and 1.0, 2.5, 10 in. for 10 in. models. Sensors have provision for zeroing by push button or digital input. Sensor shall have field selectable outputs of 0-5 vdc, 0-10 vdc, and 4-20mA. Sensor shall have jumper to select unidirectional or bi-directional mode. Sensor shall have LCD display. Sensor accuracy shall be +/- 1% FS selected range. Sensor overpressure rating shall be 3 PSID proof and 5 PSID burst. Operating environment: 32 Deg. F. to 140 Deg. F.; 0-90% RH. Temperature effect: 1 in. models 0.05% per deg. C; 10 in. models 0.01% per deg. C.. Honeywell P7640 or approved equal.

1. Use for filter monitoring, general purpose low pressure air and general purpose low pressure/low differential air.

C. Valve Bypass for Differential Pressure Sensors

2.09 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES (DPS)

A. General Service Air: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint and differential and snap acting form C contacts rated for the application. Provide manufacturer's recommended static pressure sensing tips and connecting tubing.

B. General Service Water: Diaphragm with adjustable setpoint, 2 psig or adjustable differential, and snap acting form C contacts rated for the application. 60 psid minimum pressure differential range. 0 °F to 160 °F operating temperature range. Provide manufacturer’s recommended connecting tubing.

2.10 PRESSURE SWITCHES (PS)

A. Diaphragm or bourdon tube with adjustable setpoint and differential and snap acting form C contacts rated for the application. PS shall be capable of withstanding 150% of rated pressure.

2.11 TRANSDUCERS

A. Current Switches: Clamp-On Design Current Operated Switch for Motor Status Indication; Range- 1.5 to 150 amps.; Trip Point- Adjustable; Switch: Solid state, normally open, 1 to 135 VAC or VDC, 0.3 Amps. Zero off state leakage; Lower Frequency Limit- 6 Hz.; Trip Indication- LED; Approvals- UL, CSA; Max. Cable Size- 350 MCM; Manufacturer- Veris Industries, Inc., RE Technologies SCS1150A-LED or approved equal.



B. Wire Through Current Switch (CS/CR) shall consist of 0 to 200 A continuous amperage rating, adjustable trip set-point to ± 1 % of range, 8 A @ 240 VAC resistive, 4 A @ 120 VAC tungsten, 2A @ 240 VAC inductive (1/2 hp). Load control contact power shall be induced from monitored conductor (minimum conductor current required to energize relay 5 A, max. rating of 135A). Where used for single-phase devices, provide the CS/CR in a self contained unit with override switch in housing similar to Kele RIBX or approved equal. Veris Industries, Inc., Model # 715; RE Technologies RCS 1150 or approved equal.

C. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CT) Clamp-On Design Current Transformer for Motor Current Sensing Range: 1-10 A minimum, 20-200 A maximum. Trip Point: Adjustable. Output: 0-5 VDC. Accuracy: ±0.2% from 20 to 100 Hz. For variable frequency drive pump and fan applications, CT should have Volt-amp (VA) memory to distinguish at no load, full motor speed. Manufacturer: KELE SA100 or approved equal.

2.12 CONTINUOUS LEVEL TRANSMITTERS

A. Capacitance Type. Provide a loop powered, continuous capacitance type level transmitter with adjustable span and zero. Output: 4-20 mA. Probe: Fluoropolymer coated stainless steel rod or cable. Provide cable probe with end attachment hardware or weight. Electrical Enclosure: NEMA 3R, 7. Approvals: UL or CSA. Accuracy: ± 1% of calibrated span. Process Connection: MPT or ANSI Flange as required. Manufacturer: Drexelbrook, Endress & Hauser, or approved equal.

2.13 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE

A. Two wire smart d/p cell type transmitter. 4-20 mA or 1 to 5 V user selectable linear or square root output. Adjustable span and zero. Stainless steel wetted parts. Environmental limits: –40 to 250 °F (-40 to 121 °C), 0 to 100% rH. Accuracy: Less than 0.1% of span. Output Damping: Time constant user selectable from 0 to 36 seconds. Vibration Effect: Less than ± 0.1% of upper range limit from 15 to 2000 Hz in any axis relative to pipe mounted process conditions. Electrical Enclosure: NEMA 3R, 4X, 7, 9. Approvals: FM, CSA. Manufacturer: Rosemount Inc. 3051 Series, Foxboro, Johnson-Yokagawa, or approved equal.

2.14 FLOW METERS (FMS)

A. Insertion type turbine meter for water service: Turbine Insertion Flow meter sensing method shall be impedance sensing (iron magnetic and non-photoelectric), volumetric accuracy of ± 2% of reading over middle 80% of operating range, and ± 4% of reading over the entire operating ranges. Maximum operating pressure of 400 psi and maximum operating temperature of 200 °F continuous (220 °F peak). All wetted metal parts shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Flow meter shall meet or exceed all of the accuracy, head loss, flow limits, pressure and material requirements of the AWWA standard C704-70 for the respective pipe or tube size. Analog outputs shall consist of non-interactive zero and span adjustments, a DC linearity of 0.1% of span, voltage output of 0-10 V, and current output of 4-20 mA. Install in water systems with a minimum of 10 pipe diameters unobstructed flow. Acceptable manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements: Onicon, Hersey, or approved equal.



B. Vortex shedding flow meter for liquid and gas service: Output: 4-20 mA. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 800 °F (427 °C).Wetted Parts: Stainless Steel. Housing: NEMA 3R. Turndown: 10:1 minimum. Accuracy: 0.5% of calibrated span for liquids, 1% of calibrated span for steam and gases. Body: Wafer style or ANSI flanged to match piping specification. Manufacturer: Foxboro 83 series, Johnson, Yokagawa, Rosemount, or approved equal.

2.15 ELECTRIC CONTROL COMPONENTS

A. Limit Switches (LS): Limit switches shall be UL listed, with adjustable trim arm. Limit switches shall be as manufactured by Square "D,” Allen Bradley, or approved equal; SPDT or DPDT type.

B. Low Temperature Detector (Freezestat) (FZ): Low temperature detector shall consist of a “cold spot” element which responds only to the lowest temperature along any one foot of entire element, minimum bulb size of 1/8" x 20' (3.2mm x 6.1m), junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise, DPST (4 wire, 2 circuit) with manual reset. Temperature range 15 to 55 °F (-9.4 to 12.8 °C), factory set at 38 °F.

C. Control Relays: All control relays shall be UL listed, with contacts rated for the application, and mounted in minimum NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor locations, NEMA 3R for outdoor locations.

1. Control relays for use on electrical systems of 120 volts or less shall have, as a minimum, the following:

a. AC coil pull-in voltage range of + 10%, - 15% or nominal voltage. Coil sealed volt amperes (VA) not greater than four (4) VA. Silver cadmium Form C (SPDT) contacts in a dust proof enclosure, with 8 or 11 pin type plug. Pilot light indication of power-to-coil, and coil retainer clips. Coil rated for 50 and 60 Hz service. Relays shall be IDEC or approved equal.

2. Relays used for across-the-line control (start/stop) of 120V motors, 1/4 HP, and 1/3 HP, shall be rated to break minimum 10 Amps inductive load. Relays shall be Veris, or approved equal.

3. Relays used for stop/start control shall have low voltage coils (30 VAC or less).

D. General Purpose Power Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose magnetic contactor. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, NEMA Type 1 enclosure. Manufacturer shall be Honeywell or approved equal.

E. Control Transformers: Furnish and install control transformers as required. Control transformers shall be machine tool type, and shall be US and CSA listed. Primary and secondary sides shall be fused in accordance with the NEC. Transformer shall be proper size for application, and mounted in minimum NEMA 1 enclosure. Transformers shall be manufactured by Westinghouse, Square "D," Jefferson, Functional Devices, Honeywell or approved equal.



F. Time Delay Relays (TDRs): TDRs shall be capable of on or off delayed functions, with adjustable timing periods and cycle timing light. Contacts shall be rated for the application with a minimum of two (2) sets of Form C contacts, enclosed in a dust proof enclosure.

1. TDRs shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. TDRs shall have solid state, plug-in type coils with transient suppression devices.

2. TDRs shall be UL and CSA listed, Crouzet type, or approved equal.

G. Electric Push Button Switch: Switch shall be momentary contact, oil tight, push button, with number of N.O. and/or N.C. contacts as required. Contacts shall be snap-action type, and rated for minimum 120 VAC operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen Bradley, or approved equal.

H. Pilot Light: Panel-mounted pilot light shall be NEMA ICS 2 oil-tight, transformer type, with screw terminals, push-to-test unit, LED type, rated for 120 VAC. Unit shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen Bradley, or approved equal.

I. Alarm Horn: Panel-mounted audible alarm horn shall be continuous tone, 120 VAC Sonalert solid state electronic signal, as manufactured by Mallory, or approved equal.

J. Electric Selector Switch (SS): Switch shall be maintained contact, NEMA ICS 2, oil-tight selector switch with contact arrangement, as required. Contacts shall be rated for minimum 120 VAC operation. Switch shall be 800T type, as manufactured by Allen Bradley, or approved equal.

2.16 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Provide labels for all equipment, components, and field devices furnished. Labels shall be white with black lettering. They shall be a minimum of ½ inch high with ¼ inch block lettering.

2.17 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTROLLERS (GPC)

A. Provide GPC so that all points associated with and common to one air handling unit or other complete stand alone system/equipment shall reside within a single control unit. When referring to the GPC as pertains to the stand alone functionality, reference is specifically made to the processor. One processor shall execute all the related functions. I/O point expander boards may be added to expand the point capacity of the GPC.

1. One outside air temperature, humidity, Carbon Dioxide or other air quality sensor may be provided per building and globally shared with all GPC in a building.

B. GPC shall be 16-bit microprocessor general purpose controllers to meet the following requirements.



1. The ATC/BMCS shall be composed of one or more independent, standalone, microprocessor-based building controllers to manage the global strategies described in the sequence of operation.

2. The GPC shall be programmable and have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and application requirements.

3. As a back-up, store DDC application programs and data files on non-volatile EEPROM or Flash memory to allow simple and reliable changes.

4. Data shall be shared between networked building controllers using a peer-to-peer communication mechanism at a speed of 78k baud minimum.

5. The operating system of the building controller shall manage the input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information for integration and interoperation with other devices on the LonWorks network.

C. Two basic GPC types may be installed: modular or fixed I/O. Both GPC types shall be LonWorks® and LonMark® Association compliant.

1. The modular type shall provide a modular hardware design that allows for optimum adaptation of the I/O mix to the plant to be controlled. The modular hardware design shall allow for installation of distributed I/O modules either integral with the GPC panel or remote from the GPC panel.

2. The fixed type shall have a fixed input and output hardware configuration for use with small applications or to provide control for distributed I/O modules.

D. Communication: The design of the HVAC GPC system communications network shall consist of two layers.

1. The controller peer-to-peer communication layer shall consist of a network of general purpose controllers and unitary controllers as necessary to accomplish the Sequences of Operations as specified herein and defined on the Drawings. The peer-to-peer network shall utilize EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalk™ communications technology for interoperability with third-party devices, or equal communications standard.

2. The LAN shall consist of standard protocols for TCP/IP communications over Ethernet and Token Ring for communications with the existing ATC/BMCS servers.

E. DDC microprocessor failures shall not cause loss of communications of the remainder of any network.

F. All networks shall be peer-to-peer supporting sensor sharing, global application programs, and bus-to-bus communications in a true peer-to-peer token-passing manner.

G. Error detection, correction, and retransmission shall be used to guarantee data integrity.



H. Environment: Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within NEMA 3R enclosures and shall be rated for ambient temperature operation at –40 degrees C to +65 degrees C (-40 degrees F to +150 degrees F) and ambient humidity of 5 to 93 percent RH non-condensing. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in NEMA 1 enclosures and shall be rated for ambient temperature operation at 0 degree C to +50 degrees C (32 degrees F to +122 degrees F) and humidity of 5 to 93 percent RH noncondensing.

I. Controller shall be provided with manual overrides for analog and digital outputs within the panel. See Article 2.3 in this Section.

J. Memory: The building controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 30 days.

K. GPC Software Residency: Each GPC as defined below shall be capable of control and monitoring of all points physically connected to it. All software including the following shall reside and execute at the GPC.

1. Real Time Operating System software

2. Real Time Clock/Calendar and network time synchronization

3. GPC diagnostic software

4. Direct Digital Control software

5. Alarm Processing and Buffering software

6. I/O (physical and virtual) database

L. Point/system database creation and modification shall be via a user friendly, menu driven program. System software shall support virtual or logic point (points not representing a physical I/O) creation. Software shall support virtual points with all services specified herein.

M. Scheduling: Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the controller system. Controllers shall have a minimum of 20 schedules. Each schedule shall consist of the following:

1. Daily schedule: Provide daily schedules that are modular in structure.

2. Weekly schedule: Provide a separate weekly schedule that shall be generated for each time schedule.

3. Annual schedule: Provide an annual schedule that is structured like a calendar and consists of successive weekly schedules.

4. Holiday schedule: Provide one holiday day list that shall exist per time schedule. Provide capability for 24 holidays and special days.



N. Alarm/Messaging Software: GPC software shall support alarm/message processing and buffering software as more fully specified below.

1. Digital alarms: Each digital object shall be set to alarm based on the operator-specified state. Provide the capability to automatically and manually disable alarming.

2. Analog alarms: Each analog object shall have two maximum limits (limit max 1) and limit max two 2), and two minimum limits (limit min 1) and (limit min 2).

3. Totalizer alarms: Each totalizer object shall be set to alarm based on a pulse input signal interval that, if exceeded, triggers an alarm signal.

4. Alarms shall be selectable as critical or non-critical. Critical alarms shall be transmitted as high priority.

5. System alarms: Operating errors that occur in a control unit or during communication with other controllers shall be recognized and displayed by the computer module.

6. Alarm reporting: The operator shall be able to determine the action to take in the event of an alarm. Alarms shall be routed to the appropriate workstations based on time and other conditions. An alarm shall be able to start programs, print, be logged in the event log, generate custom messages, and display graphics.

O. Direct Digital Control: GPC shall support application of Direct Digital Control Logic. All logic modules shall be provided pre-programmed with written documentation to support their application. Provide the following logic modules as a minimum:

1. EPID control: An EPID (enhanced proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with additional features shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value that is used to position an output or stage a series of outputs. The enhanced features shall include a built-in start-up ramp, direct-reverse action selection, integral recalculation to prevent windup below minimum and above maximum, and an auxiliary input for limit applications and integral reset. The controlled variable, set point, and PID gains shall be user-selectable.

a. Two Position Control (High or Low crossing with dead band)

b. Single Pole Double Throw relay

c. Delay Timer (delay on make, delay on break, and interval)

d. Hi/Low Selection

e. Reset or Scaling Module

f. Logical Operators (And, Or, Not, Xor)

g. Misc. floating point arithmetic calculations



h. Proof Monitor

P. Miscellaneous DDC Application Programs

1. Sequencing: Provide application software based upon the sequences of operation specified to properly sequence chillers, boilers, and pumps.

2. Staggered start: This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts, shall be user-selectable.

3. On and off control with differential: Provide an algorithm that allows a digital output to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set point. The algorithm shall be direct acting or reverse acting and incorporate an adjustable differential.

4. Run-time totalization: Provide software to totalize run times for all digital input objects. A high run-time alarm shall be assigned, if required, by the operator.

5. Economizer: Provide software that determines the most economical system operation for full and partial air conditioning systems. Where specified provide for input of space or duct mounted CO2 sensors and Demand Based Ventilation to determine outside air damper position.

Q. Energy calculations:

1. Provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g., kW) or flow rates (e.g., L/s [gpm]) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data.

2. Provide an algorithm that calculates a sliding window average (e.g., rolling average). The algorithm shall be flexible to allow window intervals to be user-specified (e.g., 15 minutes, 30 minutes, and 60 minutes).

3. Provide an algorithm that calculates a fixed window average. A digital input signal will define the start of the window period (e.g., signal from utility meter) to synchronize the fixed window average with that used by the utility.

R. Optimum start and stop: Provide a software program that calculates optimized values for starting and stopping the heating plant. The optimized start-stop function shall consider the residual heat in a building to avoid unnecessary heating operation. Required room conditions are met at all times.

2.18 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. General: Unitary DDC controllers (UCs) shall be standalone, EEPROM-based, configured to perform the sequences specified, and I/O selected for the application. All unitary DDC controllers (UCs) shall be LonMark-approved products and shall support the LonMark



Functional Profile for the given application. UC s shall be tested and listed under UL916 for computing devices. UC enclosures shall be flame retardant, compact plastic conforming to UL94-V5 for plenum mounting or plated steel. UCs shall be CE approved and meet FCC Part 15 class B requirements. UC s shall be configured for DIN rail mounting, using industry-standard clip-on adapters, or for direct panel mounting. Each UC shall be capable of standalone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network. Each UC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system.

B. Communication: The unitary controller shall communicate with other devices on the internetwork using EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalk™ protocol, as the common communication protocol with a minimum transmission speed of 78Kbaud. Network media shall be Level IV, 22AWG, twisted-pair wire, and shall conform to UL Category 4 for high-speed networks. Repeater bus topologies shall include bus segments of 60 nodes unless routers are utilized. Systems communicating at slower speeds shall not exceed 30 nodes per segment to ensure adequate global data and alarm response times.

C. Environment: The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.

1. Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within NEMA 3R enclosures and shall be rated for ambient temperature operation at -40 degrees C to +65 degrees C (-40 degrees F to +150 degrees F) and ambient humidity of 5 to 95 percent RH noncondensing.

2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in NEMA 1 enclosures and shall be rated for ambient temperature operation at 0 degree C to +50 degrees C (32 degrees F to +122 degrees F) and humidity of 5 to 95 percent RH noncondensing.

3. Immunity to power and noise: Controllers shall be able to operate at 90 percent to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80 percent. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5-120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).

4. Transformer: Power supply for the UC shall be rated at a minimum of 125 percent of ASC power consumption and shall be of the fused or current-limiting type.

D. Provide standalone Unitary Controllers (UC) for the following applications as required.

1. Single Zone DDC controller featuring preprogrammed heating and cooling and economizer control algorithms configurable for either standard single zone rooftop unit applications or heat pumps. For rooftop applications, the controller shall have an extended operating temperature rating from –40 degrees F to +150 degrees F. Controller application software shall include PID control, set-point resets for energy demand limit control, and economizer minimum position for IAQ control. Separate unoccupied heating and cooling set-points shall be provided. Provide an adaptive algorithm that continuously adjusts the discharge air setpoint as needed. A standby feature shall be provided to reset the occupied temperature set point back to a user-definable limit based on status from an auxiliary device, such as an occupancy sensor or window contact. The controller shall include a temperature wall module.



2. Provide a standalone DDC Fan Coil controller for common two pipe or four pipe fan coil units featuring preprogrammed heating and cooling control algorithms for single or up to three fan speed applications. Controllers shall have integral transformers and fan speed relays directly wired to line voltage power 115Vac and 230Vac. Controller application software shall include a set point reset for energy demand limit control. Separate unoccupied heating and cooling set points shall be provided. A standby feature shall be provided to reset the occupied temperature set point back to a user-definable limit based on status from an auxiliary device, such as an occupancy sensor or window contact. The controller shall include a temperature wall module.

3. Provide a standalone DDC Unit Ventilator controller featuring preprogrammed heating and cooling economizer and ASHRAE Cycles I, II, III control algorithms. Controllers shall be configurable for unit ventilator 2 pipe or 4 pipe applications with staged, floating, or pulse width modulation (PWM) heating, cooling, and economizer. Controllers shall have extended operating temperature rating from -40 degrees F to +150 degrees F so controller can be mounted directly in wiring cabinet of unit ventilator package. Controller application software shall include set-point resets for energy demand limit control and economizer minimum position for IAQ control. Separate unoccupied heating and cooling set points shall be provided. A standby feature shall be provided to reset the occupied temperature set point back to a user-definable limit based on status from an auxiliary device, such as an occupancy sensor or window contact. Controllers shall include a temperature wall module.

4. Provide a standalone DDC VAV terminal unit controller for factory mounting featuring preprogrammed heating and cooling control algorithms. Controllers shall be designed to work with pressure independent units and pressure dependent units. Pressure independent units shall contain a default algorithm to revert to pressure dependent mode on failure of the flow sensor. Controllers shall be configurable for the following options: no fan, series fan, parallel fan, three stages of reheat or modulating, peripheral radiation control, dual duct, exhaust tracking, terminal regulated air volume (TRAV), occupancy sensor, window sensor, and shared or direct-wired wall module. Controller application software shall include PID control set point reset for energy demand limit control or outdoor air compensation, optimum start, night purge and morning warm-up. A standby feature shall be provided to reset the occupied temperature set point back to a user-definable limit based on status from an auxiliary device, such as an occupancy sensor or window contact. Controllers shall include a temperature wall module.

5. Provide a distributed input and output module that connects sensors and actuators onto the Echelon field bus network for use with a LonWorks general purpose controllers (GPCs) and unitary DDC controllers (UC). LonWorks controllers shall be configured to read and command these points as required or specified. The device shall have extended operating temperature rating from -40 degrees F to +150 degrees F, so it can be mounted directly in a wiring cabinet of monitored appliances.

2.19 INPUT AND OUTPUT INTERFACE

A. Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through general purpose, custom application, or unitary controllers.



B. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself, to another point, or to ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24 V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller. Inputs and outputs on modular GPC shall be arranged on interchangeable modules or circuit boards to allow the replacement of a damaged module or board without replacing the entire controller.

C. Digital inputs shall allow the monitoring of on and off signals from remote devices. The digital inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices, and shall be protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise. Digital inputs shall sense “dry contact” closure without external power (other than that provided by the controller) being applied.

D. Totalizer input points: This type of point shall conform to all requirements of digital input points, and also accept up to 15 pulses per second for pulse accumulation.

E. Analog inputs for GPC shall be minimum 12-bit resolution and allow the monitoring of low-voltage (0 to 10 VDC), current (0 to 20 mA), negative temperature coefficient (NTC), and resistance to detector (RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with and field-configurable to commonly available sensing devices. To prevent thermal loading, RTDs and thermistors shall be scanned rather than have continuous power applied.

F. Digital outputs shall provide for on and off operation, or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width modulation control. Outputs shall be selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation. Reference Article 2.3 in this Section for manual overrides.

G. Analog outputs shall be minimum 8-bit resolution and provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA signal as required to provide proper control of the output device. Analog outputs on general purpose or custom application controllers shall have status lights and a two-position (Auto and Manual) switch and manually adjustable potentiometer with feedback for manual operation. Analog outputs shall not exhibit a drift of greater than 0.4 percent of range per year. Reference Article 2.3 in this Section for manual override.

H. Tri-State outputs: Provide tri-state outputs (two coordinated digital outputs) for control of three-point floating-type electronic actuators without feedback. Use of three-point floating devices shall be limited to zone control and terminal unit control applications (VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating coils, zone dampers, radiation). Control algorithms shall run the zone actuator to one end of its stroke every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Examination

B. Protection



C. Coordination

D. Submittals

E. Test and Balance

F. General Workmanship

G. Field Quality Control

H. Existing Equipment

I. Wiring

J. Communication Wiring

K. Installation of Sensors

L. Flow Switch Installation

M. Actuators

N. Identification of Hardware and Wiring

O. Operator Interface

P. ATC/BMCS System Checkout and Testing

Q. ATC/BMCS Demonstration

R. ATC/BMCS Acceptance Period

S. Trend Logs and Trend Graphs

T. Software Optimization

U. Cleaning and Training

V. Sequences of Operation

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect and Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

B. The Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the work. If head room or space conditions appear inadequate—or if any discrepancies occur between the plans and the Contractor’s work, and the plans and the work of others—the Contractor shall



report these discrepancies to the Engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate the Contractor’s work with the work of others.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage from its work or employees, and shall be liable for all damages thus caused.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for its work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect any material that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.

3.04 COORDINATION

A. Where the work of this section will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with, the work of other trades, the Contractor shall assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If the Contractor installs its work before coordinating with other trades, so as to cause any interference with the work of other trades, the Contractor shall make the necessary changes in its work to correct the condition without extra charge.

B. Coordinate and schedule work with all other work in the same area, or with work that is dependent upon other work, to facilitate mutual progress.

C. Coordination with controls specified in other sections or divisions: Other sections and divisions of this Specification may include controls and control devices that are to be part of or interfaced to the control system specified in this section. These controls shall be integrated into the system and coordinated by the Contractor as follows:

1. Each supplier of a control product is responsible for the configuration, programming, startup, and testing of that product to meet the sequences of operation described in this section.

2. Each supplier of a control product is responsible for providing, installing and configuring any necessary communications interfaces or gateways required for compatibility with the controls installed under this section. Each supplier is responsible for supply to this contractor any necessary data files (XIF files) required for communications interfaces.

3.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. Refer to “Submittals” Article in Part 1 of this Specification for requirements.

3.06 TEST AND BALANCE:

A. The Controls Contractor shall furnish the software necessary to interface to the control system for test and balance purposes. The TAB contractor shall be responsible for providing the necessary computer hardware to operate the software.



B. The Controls Contractor shall provide training in the use of this software. This training will be planned for a period of two hours.

3.08 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP

A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring raceway parallel to the building lines (i.e., horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.

B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

C. Install all equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by Chapter 1, Article 100, Part A of the National Electric Code (NEC).

D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.

E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility, and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.


A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Specification.

B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality workmanship.

C. Contractor shall have work inspected by local or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work.

3.10 WIRING

A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with national and local electrical codes and Division 16 of this specification.

B. Raceways:

1. All NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL Listed in approved raceway per NEC and Division 16 requirements.

2. All wiring (Class 1 and Class 2) in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms—or where subject to mechanical damage—shall be installed in raceway at levels below 10 ft.

3. Size of raceway and size and type of wire shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer’s recommendation and NEC requirements, except as noted elsewhere.



4. Include one pull string in each raceway 1 inch or larger.

5. Conceal all raceways, except within mechanical, electrical, or service rooms. Install raceway to maintain a minimum clearance of 6 inches from high-temperature equipment (e.g., steam pipes or flues).

6. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to the structure and spaced according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on flexible duct strap or tie rods. Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork.

7. Adhere to Division 16 requirements where raceway crosses building expansion joints.

8. Install insulated bushings on all raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal top end of all vertical raceways.

9. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 1m [3 ft] in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal raceway less than 1/2 in. electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture—including chiller and boiler rooms—liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways shall be used.

10. Raceway shall be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at both ends and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections shall be joined with couplings (per code). Terminations shall be made with fittings at boxes, and ends not terminating in boxes shall have bushings installed.

11. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing.

C. All low-voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet the Class 2 current limit.)

1. Where NEC Class 2 (current limited) wires are in concealed and accessible locations, including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in the raceway may be used, provided that the cables are UL Listed for the intended application. For example, plenums shall be UL Listed specifically for that purpose.

2. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high-voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low-voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g., relays and transformers).

3. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring is to be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and neatly tied at 3m [10 ft] intervals.

4. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, they shall be supported from or anchored to structural members. Cables shall not be supported by or anchored to ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.



5. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations.

D. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal block or terminal strip. All wire-to-wire connections shall be made at a terminal block or wire nut at junction box.

1. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.

2. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between termination points.

E. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120v. If only higher voltages are available, the contractor shall provide step-down transformers.

F. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These enclosures include packaged equipment control panel enclosures, unless they also contain Class 1 starters.

G. The contractor shall terminate all control and interlock wiring, and shall maintain updated wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.

3.11 COMMUNICATION WIRING

A. Do not install communication wiring in raceway and enclosures containing Class 1 wiring.

B. Maximum pulling, tension, and bend radius for cable installation, as specified by the cable manufacturer, shall not be exceeded during the installation.

C. Contractor shall verify the integrity of the entire network following the cable installation. Use appropriate test measures for each particular cable.

D. When a cable enters or exits a building, a lightning arrestor shall be installed between the lines and ground. The lightning arrestor shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

E. All runs of communication wiring shall be unspliced lengths when that length is commercially available.

F. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate origination and destination data.

3.12 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS

A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the sensor operates.

C. Temperature Sensors



1. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported. Additionally, the wiring to the sensor shall not be required to be polarity sensitive. The design of the sensor shall be modular, which allows for the rough-in of all wiring without the presence of the electronics or esthetic covering.

2. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their raceways or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.

3. Sensors used in mixing plenums and in hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner vertically across the duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.

4. Low-limit sensors used in mixing plenums shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip. Provide 1 ft of sensing element for each square ft of coil area.

5. All pipe-mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.

6. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on the north wall, complete with sun shield at designated location.

D. Differential air static pressure:

1. The piping to pressure ports on all pressure transducers shall contain a capped test port located adjacent to the transducer.

2. All pressure transducers other than those controlling VAV boxes shall be located in field device panels, not on the equipment monitored or on ductwork. Mount transducers in a location accessible for service without the use of ladders or special equipment.

3. All air and water differential pressure sensors shall have gauge tees mounted adjacent to all taps. Water gauges shall also have shutoff valves installed before the tee.

3.13 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION

A. Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.

B. Adjust flow switch in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.14 ACTUATORS

A. Electric and electronic actuators:

1. Dampers: Actuators shall be direct-mounted on damper shaft or jackshaft unless shown as a linkage installation. Actuators shall be mounted following manufacturer’s recommendations.



2. Valves: Actuators shall be connected to valves with adapters approved by the actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following the actuator manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Use line shafting or shaft couplings (jackshafting) in lieu of blade-to-blade linkages or shaft coupling when driving axially aligned damper sections.

3.15 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE

A. Identify control panels with minimum ½ inch letters on laminated plastic nameplates.

B. Manufacturers' name plates and UL or CSA labels are to be visible and legible after equipment is installed.

C. Identifiers shall match record documents.

3.16 PROGRAMMING

A. Provide programming for the system and adhere to the sequences of operation provided. Imbed into the control program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the program.

B. Load, test, troubleshoot and verify the correct operation of all software. .

3.17 OPERATOR INTERFACE:

A. Standard graphics: See graphic standards at end of this section. Provide graphics for all mechanical systems and floor plans of the building. This includes each chilled water system, hot water system, chiller, boiler, air handler, and all terminal equipment. The contractor shall be provided AutoCAD drawings of the floor plans by the Architect for use in preparation of floor plan graphics. Point information on the graphic displays shall dynamically update. Show on each graphic all input and output points for the system. Also show relevant calculated points such as set points.

B. Show terminal equipment information on a "graphic" summary table. Provide dynamic information for each point shown.

C. Operator Interface software is existing Honeywell. The contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to add equipment database and graphics to the existing software.

D. Expand existing Honeywell server license as necessary to accommodate all new points associated with this project and any new workstations provided.

3.18 ATC/BMCS SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING BY CONTROLS CONTRACTOR



A. Completely install and thoroughly inspect startup, test, adjust, and document all systems and equipment.

1. All testing listed in this Article shall be performed by the Controls Contractor and shall make up part of the necessary verification of an operating control system. This testing shall be completed before the Owner’s representative is notified of the system demonstration. All testing shall be documented in the ATC/BMCS start-up report.

2. The Controls Contractor shall furnish all labor and test apparatus required to calibrate and prepare for service all instruments, controls, and accessory equipment furnished under this section of the specification.

a. Instrumentation required to verify readings and test system and equipment performance shall be provided by Controls Contractor. Generally, no testing equipment will be required beyond that required to perform Controls Contractors work under these Contract Documents. All equipment used for testing and calibration shall be NIST/NBS traceable and calibrated within the preceding 6-month period. Certificates of calibration shall be submitted.

b. Contractor shall provide the TAB contractor with software which shall run on the TAB contractor’s portable computer. This software shall support all functions and allow querying and editing of all parameters required for proper calibration and start up.

3. Verify that all control wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and ground faults. Verify proper electrical voltages and amperages. Verify that terminations are tight.

4. Coordinate with TAB subcontractor to obtain control settings that are determined from balancing procedures. Record the following control settings as obtained from TAB contractor, and note any TAB deficiencies in the ATC/BMCS Start-Up Report:

a. Optimum differential pressure set points for variable speed pumping systems

b. Calibration parameters for flow control devices such as VAV boxes and flow measuring stations.

5. Enable the control systems and verify calibration of all input devices individually. Perform calibration procedures per manufacturers' recommendations.

6. Verify that all digital output devices (relays, solenoid valves, two-position actuators and control valves, and magnetic starters) operate properly and that the normal positions are correct.

7. Verify that all analog output devices (I/Ps, actuators) are functional, that start and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. The Contractor shall check all control valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. The Contractor shall make any necessary adjustments to valve stem and damper blade travel.



8. Verify that the system operation adheres to the Sequences of Operation. Simulate and observe all modes of operation by overriding and varying inputs and schedules.

9. Tune all control loops to obtain the fastest stable response without hunting, offset or overshoot. Record tuning parameters and response test results for each control loop in the ATC/BMCS Start Up Report. Except from a startup, maximum allowable variance from set point for controlled variables under normal load fluctuations shall be as follows. Within 3 minutes of any upset (for which the system has the capability to respond) in the control loop, tolerances shall be maintained (exceptions noted):

a. Space Temperature: ± 2°F.

b. Chilled Water: ± 1°F.

c. Hot water temperature: ± 3°F.

d. Water pressure: ± 1 psid.

10. Alarms and interlocks:

a. Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm.

b. Interlocks shall be tripped using field contacts to check the logic, as well as to ensure that the fail-safe condition for all actuators is in the proper direction.

c. Interlock actions shall be tested by simulating alarm conditions to check the initiating value of the variable and interlock action.

11. Coil Valve Leak Check

a. Verify proper close off of the valves. Ensure the valve seats properly by simulating the maximum anticipated pressure difference across the circuit. Calibrate air temperature sensors on each side of coil to be within 0.5°F of each other. Command the valve to close. Energize fans. After 5 minutes, observe air temperature difference across coil. If a temperature difference is indicated leakage is probably occurring. If necessary close the isolation valves to the coil to ensure the conditions change. If necessary remedy the condition by adjusting the stroke and range, increasing the actuator size/torque, replacing the seat, or replacing the valve as applicable.

12. Operator Interfaces:

a. Verify that all elements on the graphics are functional and are properly bound to physical devices and/or virtual points, and that hot links or page jumps are functional and logical.



b. Output all specified BMCS reports for review and approval.

c. Verify that the alarm printing and logging is functional and per requirements.

d. Verify that trend archiving to disk and provide a sample to the CA for review.

e. Verify the functionality of remote OIs and that a robust connection can be established consistently.

f. Verify that required third party software applications required with the bid are installed and are functional.

3.19 ATC/BMCS DEMONSTRATION

A. Assist Commissioning Authority in verification and performance testing. Assistance will generally include the following:

a. Attend Commissioning (Cx) progress and coordination meetings.

b. Prepare and submit required draft forms and systems information.

c. Establish trend logs of system operation.

d. Demonstrate system operation.

e. Manipulate systems and equipment to facilitate testing.

f. Provide instrumentation necessary for verification and performance testing.

g. Provide a Control technician to work at the direction of Commissioning Authority for software optimization assistance for a maximum of 8 hours.

B. Demonstrate the operation of the ATC/BMCS hardware, software, and all related components and systems to the satisfaction of the Commissioning Authority and Owner. Schedule the demonstration with the Owner’s representative 1 week in advance.

C. The Contractor shall supply all personnel and equipment for the demonstration. The Contractor shall allow a maximum of 40 hours for system demonstration. Contractor supplied personnel must be competent with and knowledgeable of all project-specific hardware, software, and the HVAC systems. All training documentation and submittals shall be at the job site.

D. Demonstration shall involve a representative sample of systems/equipment randomly selected by the Owner and the CA. Two weeks prior to the system demonstration the CA shall provide copies of all commissioning documents and forms to be used for the system demonstration the commissioning forms and documents to be used



E. The system shall be demonstrated following the same procedures used in the Start Up Test by using the approved Commissioning Checklists. Demonstration shall include the following:

1. Demonstrate that required software is installed on BMCS workstations. Demonstrate that graphic screens, alarms, trends, and reports are installed as submitted and approved.

2. Demonstrate that points specified and shown can be interrogated and/or commanded (as applicable) from all workstations, as specified.

3. Demonstrate correct calibration of input/output devices. A maximum of 10 percent of I/O points shall be selected at random by Commissioning Authority and/or Owner for demonstration. Upon failure of any device to meet the specified end-to-end accuracy, an additional 10 percent of I/O points shall be selected at random by Commissioning Authority for demonstration. This process may be repeated until 100 percent of randomly selected I/O points have been demonstrated to meet specified end-to-end accuracy if devices fail in the previous sample.

4. Demonstrate that all DDC and other software programs exist at respective field panels. The Direct Digital Control (DDC) programming and point database shall be as submitted and approved.

5. Demonstrate that all DDC programs accomplish the specified sequences of operation. Where there are multiple applications of the same program (e.g. typical AHU, Fan Coil Unit) then the CA shall select one typical application of each type for testing.

6. Demonstrate that the panels automatically recover from power failures, as specified.

7. Demonstrate that the stand-alone operation of panels meets the requirements of these Specifications. Demonstrate that the panels' response to LAN communication failures meets the requirements of these Specifications.

8. Identify access to equipment selected by Commissioning Authority. Demonstrate that access is sufficient to perform required maintenance.

9. Demonstrate that required trend graphs and trend logs are set up per the requirements. Provide a sample of the data archive. Indicate the file names and locations.

10. ATC/BMCS Demonstration shall be completed and approved prior to Substantial Completion.

11. Any tests successfully completed during the demonstration will be recorded as passed for the functional performance testing and will not have to be re-accomplished.

3.20 ATC/BMCS ACCEPTANCE PERIOD

A. After approval of the ATC/BMCS Demonstration and prior to Contract Close-Out the two week Acceptance Period shall begin. The Acceptance Period shall not be scheduled until all



HVAC systems are in operation, all required cleaning and lubrication is complete and TAB Report has been submitted and approved.

B. Operational Test: The system shall operate properly for two weeks without malfunction, without alarm caused by control action or device failure, and with smooth and stable control of systems and equipment in conformance with these specifications. At the end of the two weeks, contractor shall forward the trend logs specified below to the CA for review. CA shall determine if the system is performing correctly and document any problems requiring contractor attention.

C. During the Acceptance Period, the contractor shall maintain a hard copy log of all alarms generated by the BMCS. For each alarm received, contractor shall diagnose the cause of the alarm, and shall list on the log for each alarm, the diagnosed cause of the alarm, and the corrective action taken. If in the contractor’s opinion, the cause of the alarm is not the responsibility of the contractor, contractor shall immediately notify the Owner’s representative.

D. Contractor shall correct any problems and provide notification to the Owner’s representative that all problems have been corrected. The Acceptance Period shall be restarted at a mutually scheduled time for an additional one-week period. This process shall be repeated until Commissioning Authority issues notice that the BMCS is ready for functional performance testing.

3.21 TREND LOGS

A. Trend logs are databases representing a historical record of the systems operation. Contractor shall establish and store these trend logs.

B. CA will analyze trend logs of the system operating parameters to evaluate normal system functionality. Contractor shall establish trends, ensure that they are being stored properly, and forward the data in electronic format to the CA.

1. Data shall include a single row of field headings and the data thereafter shall be contiguous. Each record shall include a date and time field. Recorded parameters for a given piece of equipment or component shall be trended at the same intervals and be presented in a maximum of two separate two dimensional formats with time being the vertical axis and field name being the horizontal axis. Data shall be forwarded in one of the following formats.

a. Microsoft ACCESS Database (*.mdb)

b. Microsoft EXCEL Spreadsheet (*.xls)

c. Comma Separated Value (*.csv or *.txt), preferably with quotes delimiting text fields and # delimiting date/time fields

C. Sample times indicated as COV (±) or change of value mean that the changed parameter only needs to be recorded after the value changes by the amount listed. When output to the trending file, the latest recorded value shall be listed with any given time increment record. If



the BMCS does not have the capability to record based on COV, the parameter shall be recorded based on the interval common to the unit.

3.22 TREND GRAPHS

A. Trend graphs shall generally be used during the Acceptance Period to facilitate and document testing. Prepare controller and workstation software to display graphical format trends during the Acceptance Period. Trend graphs shall demonstrate compliance with contract documents.

3.23 WARRANTY PHASE ATC/BMCS TRENDING

A. Throughout the Warranty Phase, trend logs shall be maintained as required for the Acceptance Period. Contractor shall forward archive trend logs to the CA for review upon CA’s request. CA will review these and notify contractor of any warranty work required.

3.24 OPPOSITE SEASON TESTING

A. Within 6 months of completion of the Acceptance Period, CA shall schedule and conduct Opposite Season functional performance testing. Contractor shall participate in this testing and remedy any deficiencies identified. Testing shall consist of:

1. Demonstrate that DDC programs accomplish the specified sequences of operation. Where there are multiple applications of the same program (e.g. typical AHU, Fan Coil Unit) then the CA shall select one typical application of each type for testing.

3.25 SOFTWARE OPTIMIZATION ASSISTANCE

A. The contractor shall provide the services of a controls technician for a maximum of 16 hours at the project site to work with the CA to make changes to control unit software and/or workstation graphics software that have been identified by the CA during the construction and commissioning of the project.

B. The Owner’s representative shall notify contractor 2 days in advance of each day of requested assistance.

C. The controls technician provided shall be thoroughly trained in the programming and operation of the controller and workstation software.

3.26 CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from its activities daily. The Contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, and crates under its control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a designated location.

B. At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of its work and equipment, keeping it free from dust, dirt, and debris.

C. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory-finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to



match the adjacent areas. Any cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

3.27 TRAINING

A. Provide 4 hours of training specific to this project.

B. Train the designated staff of Owner’s representative and Owner to enable them to:

1. Understand control system architecture and configuration

2. Understand DDC system components

3. Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing routines (algorithms)

Reference :

HVAC Graphic Standards Monitor used are 19” LCD with resolution set at 1280x1024 Page offsets are zero and page size is 1270x840 Background when used is 1276x845 PNG backgrounds are 1255x825 PNG zoom graphics include Key plan legible font Home page includes buttons for campuses or regions. This page will also include critical points. Critical points are IDF or MDF closet t-stats, critical lab environments, freezers t-stats, refer t-stats, plant loop temperatures or riser temps and plant or building equipment i.e. boilers chillers alarm status and any sensitive area identified by campus or fm. Site plan png file will include the building outline and inventory number of each facility, hydronic distribution including valve boxes and taps to facilities, boiler and chiller equipment locations. Points for this page will include the OA temp sensors, riser temps to each facility and status of the boilers and chillers. Include hot spots for each point. Energy page will show the site plan with KW meter sensor, radio, server and IP device locations mapped with point information. The background on the energy page will include the primary distribution switch gear, generators and transfer switches, subpanel and connection pathways with wire size and date installed. Controller page will illustrate the controller location pathway and wire type including IP device locations including a riser diagram to record controller and network information. Facility plan will include floor plans roof plans and or basement plans with north toward the top of the page to illustrate equipment location with the following information. On the overall floor plan include hatched lines to identify zoomed areas that produce a readable 12pt font with out pixilation. Include a mouse over script for each vav temp point that illuminates a rubber band type area served by the AHU on the overall floor plan. Location of duct work including fire dampers, VAV boxes, balancing dampers, t-stat with leader to VAV or AHU, AHU, exhaust fans, fume hoods, snorkels, and any equipment that will effect the air balance and temperature control. Each AHU should have an energy page that shows the load at the facility. Points to include are valve positions,



delta temps, damper positions, delta temps, terminal load and set points for all equipment including VAV and AHU’s. The current AHU and VAV graphic pages used at the SCC NG are good templates. Equipment plan will include schematic of piping of the CHW and HW for all equipment including primary, secondary, and ice and condenser circuits with different colors indicating the flow of supply and return for each. AHU pages will include any air equipment that effects the operation of the main AHU including separate return or exhaust fans, relief dampers fume hoods etc. Indicate drives controllers, sensors and IP devices on these pages, including the direct interface of the on board controller if not Honeywell including supporting automation i.e., chemical water treatment and dolphins. Include an energy page showing the delta temperatures, pressures and flows of the loads of the building. Plant equipment should have the same navigation and png files as a facility scheme. Include an energy page showing the delta temperatures, pressures and flows of the loads to the plant. We would like to include other systems in our graphics on EBI including fire, intrusion, access, sewer and storm drain, irrigation controls and any other system buried in our soil. Sequence Standards Start/Stop Control: Boiler Enable Enable boiler if the OA lockout, schedule and secondary pump are enabled. Boiler primary water sp is reset by OA temp. Boiler Lead Lag operation: Enable lag boiler if water sp is not achieve in 30 minutes, and continue to enable lag boilers as needed to achieve secondary loop sp of 160. To unload; when sp is made for 30 minutes or if max sp 180 is reached disable lag boiler continue until all boilers are off. Confirm if system load is set to control this Chiller Enable Enable boiler if the OA lockout, schedule and secondary pump are enabled. Boiler primary water sp is reset by OA temp. Chiller Lead Lag operation: Enable lag Chiller if water sp is not achieved in 30 minutes, and continue to enable lag chillers as needed to achieve primary loop sp of 45. To unload; when sp is made for 30 minutes or if min sp 40 is reached disable lag chiller continue until all chillers are off. Secondary pumps: Optimized Pump Seed Control using system resistance stradigy.



Towers Sec pumps enable if OAT is in limit 75 and schedule is occupied. Chiller or Boiler will enable if flow is at sp and rtemp is below set point. rtmp sp is stmp sp - delta (10) for chws and 20 for hws and a little more say 60 and 130. The flow for the hw and Chw sp minimum is established by measuring the flow when all valves are closed to verify the three way circuit minumums. We can add a little more to identify a valve calling for heating or cooling. These set points will be adjusted based on the plants repsonse time to make chws ro hws sp. Chiller lead will run to chws set point in unitary controller 42. If the lead is at 100% loaded for 30 min and then rtemp >49 for 5min(to prevent a lag prematurely), chiller lag is enabled. for the second lag is same except rtemp is 53. Lead chiller will set Lag load limit. Unloading is when lead and lag loads are limited to fraction of load capacity. Boilers will enable lag if hws seppoint is not met in 30min. The lag will unload if the hws setpoint is met and the flow is less then capacity of one boiler All enable commands will be on minimum one hour when enabled. Standard Points List System Hardware points Additional Screen points Boilers w/ primary Pump Enable Status Alarm Sensors HWS Temp HWR Temp Valve position

Boiler Unitary controller interface

OA Temp Schedule status OA lock out sp Boiler Alarm Boiler Alarm Reset Time clock button Lead Lag status Narrative Sequence Secondary HW

Pump Start/Stop Status VFD Speed Output



VFD Speed Signal VFD Fault VFD HOA Status Sensors Flow HWS Temp HWR Temp 3-Way Mixing Valve End-of-Line DP (DP's) DP set point DP high limit DP low limit Lead Lag status Narrative Sequence Chillers w/ primary Pump Start/Stop Status VFD Speed Output VFD Speed Signal VFD Alarm VFD HOA Status

Sensors Chiller unitary controller interface

Relative Humidity Chiller KW OA Temp Schedule status OA lock out sp Alarm Alarm Reset Time clock button Lead Lag status Lag Stage time sp Chiller load % Narrative Sequence CHW secondary Pump Start/Stop Status VFD Speed Output VFD Speed Signal VFD Fault VFD HOA Status sensors Flow CHWS Temp CHWR Temp 3-Way Mixing Valve End-of-Line DP (DP's)



DP set point DP high limit DP low limit Lead Lag status Narrative Sequence Cooling Towers Fan Start/Stop Status VFD Speed Output VFD Speed Signal VFD Fault VFD HOA Status sensors CWS Temp CWR Temp CW Valve position supply CW Valve position return Relative Humidity Hydronic Building Risers tursh pump HW Start/Stop Status VFD Speed Output VFD Speed Signal VFD Fault VFD HOA Status sensors HWS Temp HWR Temp HW Valve position HW Flow HW Riser DP EOL HW DP (reheat only) DP High limit sp DP low limit sp Enable pump Narrative Sequence Tertiary pump CHW Start/Stop Status VFD Speed Output VFD Speed Signal VFD Fault VFD HOA Status Sensors CHWS Temp



CHWR Temp CHW Valve position CHW Flow CHW Riser DP

Hydronic Isolation Valves Bray series 70

DP High limit sp DP low limit sp Enable pump Narrative Sequence


FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 1123 - 1

SECTION 23 1123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig or less.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."



B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends. 4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of

epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe.

2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet. b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel,

Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. d. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet.

b. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode.



e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 36 inches

B. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 NPS to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

B. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.



5. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. 6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

C. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Plug: Bronze. 3. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 5. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 6. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. PE Ball Valves: Comply with ASME B16.40.

1. Body: PE. 2. Ball: PE. 3. Stem: Acetal. 4. Seats and Seals: Nitrile. 5. Ends: Plain or fusible to match piping. 6. CWP Rating: 80 psig. 7. Operating Temperature: 25 to 140 deg F. 8. Operator: Nut or flat head for key operation. 9. Include plastic valve extension. 10. Include tamperproof locking feature for valves where indicated on Drawings.

E. Valve Boxes:

1. Cast-iron, two-section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head,

and with stem of length required to operate valve.

2.5 EARTHQUAKE VALVES

A. Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25.

1. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Maximum Operating Pressure: 0.5 psig to 5 psig. 3. Cast-aluminum body with stainless-steel internal parts.



4. Nitrile-rubber, reset-stem o-ring seal. 5. Valve position, open or closed, indicator. 6. Composition valve seat with clapper held by spring or magnet locking mechanism. 7. Level indicator.

2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port. 5. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 8. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 9. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping. 11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.

1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 5. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 6. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 7. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by

authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.

2.7 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Dielectric Unions:



1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with others sections for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit.

C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Install pressure gage downstream of each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.2 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the 2013 CPC for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,



expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment.



S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.

E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.

3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.



F. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS1 and Smaller: Maximum span,96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8”. 2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches: minimum rod size, 3/8”.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.


A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



3.9 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

D. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.11 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL.

B. Underground: Bronze plug valves.

3.12 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be the following:

1. Bronze plug valve.

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.



C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.



HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1

SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following aboveground installations:

1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Chilled-water piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 PSI at 200 deg F. 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 150 PSI at 200 deg F.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pressure-seal fittings. 2. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for

calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 3. Air control devices. 4. Chemical treatment. 5. Hydronic specialties.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.




A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.8 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion. Coordinate quantities with Facility Engineers.

B. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Anvil International, Inc. b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. c. Victaulic Company. d. OR EQUAL

2. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting.

3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting. Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.

C. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings:


a. Stadler-Viega. b. Victaulic Company.

2. Housing: Copper. 3. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. 4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 5. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

C. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:



1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

D. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:


a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Central Sprinkler Company; a division of Tyco Fire & Building Products. c. National Fittings, Inc. d. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

E. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

E. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 1. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges. 2. Performance: Capable of misalignment. 3. CWP Rating: 150 psig.



4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered or pressure-seal joints.

B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints.

C. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.



J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS ¾ ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

T. Identify piping as specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or

longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from

scratching pipe.



B. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

C. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.


C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

D. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

G. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints.

H. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly.




A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 4. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 5. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values. 6. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.



HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 2116 - 1

SECTION 23 2116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following hydronic specialties equipment: 1. Air separators 2. Wye strainers 3. Air control devices 4. Automatic flow control devices 5. Sleeve seals


A. Product Data: For each type of item utilized. 1. Manufacturer’s cut sheets including construction, materials, pressure and temperature

ratings, dimensions and capacities. 2. Wye strainer screen size, free area, and material of construction.


A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping specialty components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated: 1. 150 psi at 200 deg F (93 deg C).

2.2 AUTOMATIC FLOW-CONTROL VALVES

A. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.



B. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self-cleaning, and removable.

C. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.

D. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.

E. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.

F. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations.

2.3 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15). 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).

2.4 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for

NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 40-mesh strainer.

B. Sleeve seals: 1. Manufacturers: Link-Seal, or equivalent. 2. General: EDPM modular core and sleeve seals, suitable for direct burial. 3. EDPM rubber seal, composite pressure plates, 316 stainless steel bolts.

C. Dirt and Air Separator: 1. Manufacturer: Spirotherm, or equal. 2. Body: Fabricated steel, rated for 150 psig, stamped and registered with ASME. 3. Bolted strainer cover with bottom drain connection and brass air vent on top. 4. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for

NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 5. Wound copper core tube strainer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air valve and drain valve on air separators. Provide union or flange connection at each end. Pipe to sump.

C. Install wye strainers in building piping upstream from air separator. Pipe to sump. Install pressure gage across strainer body. Flush strainer at completion of job.

D. Install pipe seal in cleanly cored hole. Inspect hole, and install sleeve if cracks or other imperfections are detected. Install per manufacturer’s direction.



HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23- 1

SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Separately coupled, vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections. 2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and

other anchorages. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEPARATELY COUPLED, VERTICALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 2. TACO Incorporated. 3. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 4. PACO Pumps.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, in-line pump designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted vertically.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion-flange connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a

stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

5. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.

6. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Axially split spacer coupling.

E. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing with lifting eyebolt and supporting lugs in motor enclosure.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. b. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. c. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. d. Efficiency: Premium efficient. e. NEMA Design: 1. f. Service Factor: 1.15



g. Frequency Inverter compatible.

F. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. See drawings for capacity and electrical characteristics.

2.2 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern. 2. 175-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. 4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. 5. Drain plug. 6. Factory-fabricated support.

B. Triple-Duty Valve:

1. Straight pattern. 2. 175-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body, pump-discharge fitting. 3. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. 4. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.



C. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases, compliant with all structural restraint requirements.

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Connect piping to pumps. Install reducing fitting adjacent to pump where required to transition from line size. Install valves and other specialty items that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

C. Suction and discharge pipe sizes shall always be equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

D. Install check valve and throttling valve with memory stop or triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps serving primary chilled water and heating water loops.

E. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

G. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.



1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Discard startup strainers in suction diffusers. Clean wye strainers. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.

END OF SECTION - 23 2123


WATER TUBE BOILERS 23 5233 - 1

SECTION 23 5233 WATER-TUBE BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, finned water-tube boilers, trim, and accessories for generating hot water with the following configurations, burners, and outputs:

1. Factory assembled. 2. Forced-draft gas burner.


A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Source quality-control test reports.



C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

E. Other Informational Submittals:

1. All boiler pressure parts shall be constructed in accordance with the latest revision of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV, and shall be so stamped along with a National Board Registration number.

2. Startup service reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers, components, and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."

D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers."

E. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace heat exchangers damaged by thermal shock of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



1. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Five (5) years against thermal shock from date of shipment.

2. Warranty Period for Burner: Ten (10) years from date of shipment.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace drums, tubes, headers, cabinets, atmospheric gas burners, and pressure vessels of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Drums, Tubes, Headers, Cabinets, and Atmospheric Gas Burner: Five years from date of Substantial Completion, pro rata.

2. Warranty Period for Pressure Vessel: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion, for thermal shock.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS

A. Manufacturer:

1. Raypak (MVB).

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested boiler with tubes sealed into headers pressure tight, and set on a steel base; including insulated jacket, flue-gas vent, combustion-air intake connections, water supply and return connections, and controls.

C. Heat Exchanger:

1. Finned copper tubing with stainless-steel baffles. 2. Cast-iron headers. 3. Four pass, vertical configuration. 4. Tubes shall be sealed in header with EPDM O-ring gaskets rated for 400⁰ F service.

D. Casing:

1. Jacket: Carbon Steel with aluminum panels. 2. Finish: Powder coated. 3. Combustion-Air Connection: Inlet duct collar and sheet metal closure over burner

compartment.

E. Burner:

1. Vertical Burner:

a. Radial-fired type and constructed of steel with a stainless steel inner and woven stainless steel mesh outer screen, designed to fire in a 360-degree pattern.

b. Burner shall have a viewing port for observation of burner operation and a factory-mounted centrifugal fan to supply air to boiler burner.



c. Fan shall be controlled to prepurge and postpurge the combustion chamber before firing.

2. Gas Train: Control devices and full-modulation control sequence. In addition to these requirements, include shutoff cock, pressure regulator, and control valve.

3. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff, pressure regulator, and pilot adjustment.

4. Ignition: Each boiler shall be provided with a factory installed, integral, interrupted electronic ignition system. Ignition system shall be removable for maintenance or replacement. Each ignition system shall include at least the following:

a. A back pressure limit switch to shut down burner in the event of a blocked vent. b. An electronic spark generator with ignition cable and ignition electrode.

F. Dynamic Air Density Compensation:

1. The boiler shall be equipped with a control system to track fuel with air at a constant ratio. As ambient conditions change, the gas valve shall automatically adjust to maintain a constant ration of fuel to air.

G. Trim:

1. Integrated Boiler Panel Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit. 2. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.

H. Controls:

1. Refer to Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." 2. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:

a. Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable. b. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to

control burner firing rate to maintain water discharge temperature in response to return water temperature.

c. Include automatic, alternating-firing sequence for multiple boilers to ensure maximum system efficiency throughout the load range and to provide equal runtime for boilers.

3. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit burner operation.

a. High Cutoff: Manual reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler design temperature.

b. Water Flow Switch: Automatic-reset paddle-switch shall prevent burner operation on low water flow.

c. Blocked Vent Safety Switch: Manual-reset switch factory mounted on draft diverter.

d. Rollout Safety Switch: Factory mounted on boiler combustion chamber. e. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound

alarm for above conditions.



4. Building Automation System Interface: Factory install hardware and software to enable building automation system to monitor, control, and display boiler status and alarms.

a. Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm. b. Control: On/off operation, hot water supply temperature set-point adjustment. c. A communication interface with building automation system shall enable building

automation system operator to remotely control and monitor the boiler from an operator workstation. Control features available, and monitoring points displayed, locally at boiler control panel shall be available through building automation system.

2.2 ELECTRICAL POWER

A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in electrical Sections.

B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to boiler.

1. Power shall be 208-240 volts, 1-phase, 60 Hertz, 4-wire with neutral; and dedicated ground.

2. Voltage between line and neutral shall be 120 VAC with single point power connection. 3. Control voltage shall be 120 Volts, 1-phase, 60 Hertz. 4. The power supply to each boiler shall be protected by a 15 Amp (minimum) circuit

breaker (furnished and mounted by the installing contractor).

2.3 VENTING KITS

A. Kit: Complete system, Type 29-4C stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal, thimble, indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap, and sealant.

2.4 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. See Equipment Schedules on Plans.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations.

1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION

A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete materials and installation requirements are specified with concrete.

B. Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric isolator pads with a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch.

C. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

D. Assemble and install boiler trim.

E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

F. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required.

D. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

E. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

F. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.



G. Boiler Flue Venting:

1. Install venting kit per manufacturers recommendations.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust

air-fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

a. Burner Test: Adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency.

b. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature.

c. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

E. Performance Tests:

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies and equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performance testing.

2. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment in order to comply.

3. Perform field performance tests to determine the capacity and efficiency of the boilers. a. Test for full capacity. b. Test for boiler efficiency at low fire 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 80, 60, 40 and 20 percent

of full capacity. Determine efficiency at each test point.

4. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated. 5. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance. 6. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat

produced during tests if building systems are not adequate.



7. Notify Architect in advance of test dates. 8. Document test results in a report and submit to Architect.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of instruction.

END OF SECTION

LOS RIOS COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT

SCC SOUTH CAMPUS UTILITY IMPROVEMENTS

SACRAMENTO, CALIFORNIA

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 00 10 - 1

SECTION 26 0010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Table of Contents, Division 26 - Electrical:

SECTION NO. SECTION TITLE

260010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING

260531 CONDUIT

260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND STRUCTURES

B. Work included: This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for

Division 26. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this

Section to supplement the requirements specified in Division 01.

1. Quality assurance.

2. Definition of terms.

3. Submittals.

4. Coordination.

5. Record documents.

6. Project management and coordination services.

7. Excavation.

8. Rough-in.

9. Electrical installation.

10. Field quality control.

11. Cleaning.

12. Project closeout.

C. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work

and properly coordinate Work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a

complete and operable installation.

1. General and supplementary conditions: Drawings and general provisions of Contract and

Division 01 of the Specifications, apply to all Division 26 Sections.

2. Earthwork: Include trenching, backfilling, boring and soil compaction as required for the

installation of underground conduit, in-grade pull boxes, vaults, lighting pole

foundations, etc. Refer to Division 31, Earthwork.

3. Selective demolition: Nondestructive removal of materials and equipment for reuse or

salvage as indicated. Also dismantling electrical materials and equipment made obsolete

by these installations. Refer to Section 30 1000.


A. Reference to Codes, Standards, Specifications and recommendations of technical societies,

trade organizations and governmental agencies shall mean that latest edition of such





publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid. Such codes or standards

shall be considered a part of this Specification as though fully repeated herein.

B. When codes, standards, regulations, etc. allow Work of lesser quality or extent than is

specified under this Division, nothing in said codes shall be construed or inferred authority

for reducing the quality, requirements or extent of the Contract Documents. The Contract

Documents address the minimum requirements for construction.

C. Work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable requirements of the latest edition

of all governing codes, rules and regulations including but not limited to the following

minimum standards, whether statutory or not:

1. California Electric Code (CEC).

2. California Building Code (CBC).

3. California Fire Code (CFC).

4. California Mechanical Code (CMC).

D. Standards: Equipment and materials specified under this Division shall conform to the

following standards where applicable:

ACI American Concrete Institute

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASTM American Society for Testing Materials

CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers

ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories

FS Federal Specification

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineer Association

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

UL Underwriters' Laboratories

E. Independent Testing Agency qualifications:

1. Testing Agency shall be an independent testing organization that will function as an

unbiased authority, professionally independent of Manufacturer, Supplier and Contractor,

furnishing and installing equipment or system evaluated by Testing Agency.

2. Testing Agency shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices,

installations and systems.

3. Testing Agency shall meet Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(OSHA) requirements for accreditation of independent testing laboratories, Title 9, Part

1907.

4. On-site technical personnel shall be currently certified by the International Electrical

Testing Association in electrical power distribution system testing.

5. Testing Agency shall use technicians who are regularly employed by the firm for testing

services.

6. Contractor shall submit proof of above Testing Agency qualifications with bid

documentation upon request.

F. All base material shall be ASTM and/or ANSI standards.





G. All electrical apparatus furnished under this Section shall conform to NEMA standards and

the NEC and bear the UL label where such label is applicable.

H. Certify that each welder performing Work has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests

for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re-certification.

1.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS

A. The following list of terms as used in the Division 26 documents shall be defined as follows:

1. "Provide": Shall mean furnish, install and connect unless otherwise indicated.

2. "Furnish": Shall mean purchase and deliver to Project site.

3. "Install": Shall mean to physically install the items in-place.

4. "Connect": Shall mean make final electrical connections for a complete operating piece

of equipment.

5. "As directed": Shall be as directed by the Owner or their authorized Representative.

6. "Utility Companies": Shall mean the company providing electrical, telephone or cable

television services to the Project.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Format: Furnish submittal data neatly bound in an 8-1/2" x 11" folder or binder for each

Specification Section with a table of contents listing materials by Section and paragraph

number.

B. Submittals shall consist of detailed Shop Drawings, Specifications, block wiring diagrams,

"catalog cuts" and data sheets containing physical and dimensional information, performance

data, electrical characteristics, materials used in fabrication and material finish. Clearly

indicate by arrows or brackets precisely what is being submitted on and those optional

accessories which are included and those which are excluded. Furnish quantities of each

submittal as noted in Division 01.

C. Each submittal shall be labeled with the Specification Section Number and shall be

accompanied by a cover letter or shall bear a stamp stating that the submittal has been

thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor and is in full compliance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents. Cover letters shall list in full the items and data submitted. Failure to

comply with this requirement shall constitute grounds for rejection of data.

D. The Contractor shall submit detailed Drawings of all electrical equipment rooms and closets

if the proposed installation layout differs from the construction documents. Physical size of

electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings shall match those of the electrical equipment

that is being submitted for review, i.e.: switchboards, panelboards, transformers, control

panels, etc. Minimum scale: 1/4" = 1'- 0". Revised electrical equipment layouts must be

approved prior to release of order for equipment and prior to installation.

E. The Manufacturer shall recommend the method of anchoring the equipment to the mounting

surface and shall provide the Contractor with the assembly dimensions, weights and

approximate centers of gravity.

F. All resubmittals shall include a cover letter that lists the action taken and revisions made to

each Drawing and equipment data sheet in response to Submittal Review Comments.

Resubmittal packages will not be reviewed unless accompanied by this cover letter. Failure

to include this cover letter will constitute rejection of the resubmittal package.





G. Independent Testing Agency report:

1. Testing Agency shall provide 3 copies of the complete testing report.

2. Test report shall include the following:

a. Summary of Project.

b. Description of equipment.

c. Equipment used to conduct the test.

1) Type.

2) Manufacturer.

3) Model number.

4) Serial number.

5) Date of last calibration.

6) Documentation of calibration leading to NIST standards.

d. Description of test.

e. Test results, as compared to Manufacturers or industry accepted standards and

tolerances.

f. Conclusion and recommendation.

g. Signature of responsible test organization authority.

3. Furnish completed test report to Engineer no later than 30 days after completion of

testing, unless otherwise directed.

H. Substitutions:

1. All requests for substitutions shall conform to the general requirements and procedure

outlined in Division 01.

2. Where items are noted as "or equal," a product of equal design, construction and

performance will be considered. Contractor must submit to the Engineer all pertinent test

data, catalog cuts and product information required substantiating that the product is in

fact equal to that specified. Only one substitution will be considered for each product

specified.

3. Manufacturers' names and model numbers used in conjunction with materials, processes

or equipment included in the Contract Documents are used to establish standards of

quality, utility and appearance. Materials, processes or equipment, which in the opinion

of the Engineer is equal in quality, utility and appearance, will be approved as

substitutions to that specified.

4. Whenever any material, process or equipment is specified in accordance with a Federal

specification, an ASTM standard, an ANSI specification, UL rating or other association

standard, the Contractor shall present an affidavit from the Manufacturer certifying that

the product complies with the particular standard specification. When requested by the

Engineer, support test data to substantiate compliance shall be submitted by the

Contractor at no additional cost.





5. Substitutions shall be equal, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, to the specified

product. The burden of proof of such shall rest with the Contractor. When the

Architect/Engineer in writing accepts a substitution, it is with the understanding that the

Contractor guaranteed the substituted article or material to be equal to the one specified

and dimensioned to fit within the construction. Approved substitutions shall not relieve

the Contractor of responsibilities for the proper execution of the Work or from any

provisions of the Specifications.

6. The Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses in connection with the substitution

materials, processes and equipment, including the effect of the substitution on the

Contractor, Subcontractor's or other Contractor's Work. No substitution of material,

processes or equipment shall be permitted without written authorization of the

Architect/Engineer. Any assumptions on the acceptability of a proposed substitution

prior to acceptance by the Engineer are at the sole risk of the Contractor.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Discrepancies:

1. In the event of discrepancies within the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall be so

notified, within sufficient time, as delineated in Division 01, prior to the Bid Opening to

allow the issuance of an Addendum.

2. If, in the event that time does not permit notification or clarification of discrepancies

prior to the Bid Opening, the following shall apply: The Drawings govern in matters of

quantity and the Specifications govern in matters of quality. In the event of conflict

within the Drawings involving quantities or within the Specifications involving quantities

or within the Specifications involving quality, the greater quantity and higher quality

shall apply. Such discrepancies shall be noted and clarified in the Contractor's Bid. No

additional allowances will be made because of errors, ambiguities or omissions that

reasonably should have been discovered during the preparation of the Bid.

B. Project conditions:

1. Examination of Project site: The Contractor shall visit the Project site and thoroughly

review the locale, working conditions, conflicting utilities and the conditions in which the

Electrical Work will take place. Verify all existing conditions in the field. No

allowances will be made subsequently for any costs that may be incurred because of any

error or omission due to failure to examine the Project site and to notify the Engineer of

any discrepancies between Contract Documents and actual Project site conditions.

2. Protection: Keep conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes and other openings closed to

prevent entry of foreign matter. Cover fixtures, equipment, devices and apparatus and

protect them against dirt, paint, water, chemical or mechanical damage, before and during

construction period. Prior to final acceptance, restore to original condition any fixture,

apparatus or equipment damaged including restoration of damaged factory applied

painted finishes. Protect bright finished surfaces and similar items until in service. No

rust or damage will be permitted.

3. Supervision: Contractor shall personally or through an authorized and competent

representative constantly supervise the Work from beginning to completion and, within

reason, keep the same foreman and workmen on the Project throughout the Project

duration.

C. Preparation:





1. Drawings:

a. Layout: General layout indicated on the Drawings shall be followed except where

other Work may conflict with the Drawings.

b. Accuracy: Drawings for the Work under this Section are essentially diagrammatic

within the constraints of the symbology applied.

1.6 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Provide Project Record Drawings as described herein:

1. Drawings shall fully represent installed conditions including actual locations of outlets,

true panelboard connections following phase balancing routines, correct conduit and wire

sizing as well as routing, revised fixture schedule listing Manufacturers and products

actually installed and revised panel schedules. Contractor shall record all changes in the

Work during the course of construction on blue or black line prints. These prints shall be

made subject of monthly review by the Owner's Representative to ascertain that they are

current. If not current monthly payments may be withheld.

2. Record Drawings shall be the transfer of information on these prints to the construction

documents via computer aided drafting (CAD) process. A set of CAD files of the

electrical documents will be provided to the Contractor in either Autocad Release 16 or

DXF file format.

3. Record drawing submissions shall be provided to the Engineer to review upon the

completion of the following phases of Work:

a. All underground installation.

b. Final electrical installation.

4. A single set of half size prints of the Record Drawings shall be submitted for review.

Upon receipt of the Engineer's review comments, corrections shall be made and the

Contractor shall provide the following:

a. Two sets of full size prints.

b. Four sets of half size prints.

c. One set of full size reproducibles.

d. DXF files of Drawings.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prior to Project closeout furnish to the Owner, three (3) hard back 3-ring binders containing

all bulletins, operation and maintenance instructions, part lists, service telephone numbers

and other pertinent information as noted in each Section all equipment furnished under

Division 26. Binders shall be indexed into Division Sections and labeled for easy reference.

Bulletins containing more information than the equipment concerned shall be properly

stripped and assembled.

1.8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SERVICES

A. Overview: Contractor shall provide a Project Manager/Engineer for the duration of the

Project to coordinate the Division 26 Work with all other trades. Coordination services,

procedures and documentation responsibility shall include, but shall not be limited to the

items listed in this Section.





B. Review of Shop Drawings prepared by other Subcontractors:

1. Obtain copies of all Shop Drawings for equipment provided by others that require

electrical service connections or interface with Division 26 Work.

2. Perform a thorough review of the Shop Drawings to confirm compliance with the service

requirements contained in the Division 26 Contract Documents. Document any

discrepancy or deviation as follows:

a. Prepare memo summarizing the discrepancy.

b. Provide a copy of the specific shop drawing, indicating via cloud, the discrepancy.

3. Prepare and maintain a shop drawing review log indicating the following information:

a. Shop drawing number and brief description of the system/material.

b. Date of your review.

c. Indication if follow-up coordination is required.

C. Request for information (RFI):

1. Thoroughly review the Contract Documents prior to the preparation and submission of an

RFI. If an RFI is submitted, attach 8 1/2" x 11" copies of all relevant documents to

clarify the issue.

2. Prepare and maintain an RFI log indicating the following information:

a. RFI number and brief summary of the issue.

b. Date of issuance and receipt of response.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Contractor shall verify lines, levels and dimensions indicated on the Drawings and shall be

responsible for the accuracy of the setting out of Work and for its strict conformance with

existing conditions at the Project site.

B. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements for

the actual equipment to be connected.

C. Refer to equipment specification in Divisions 22 through 33 for rough-in requirements.

3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Preparation, sequencing, handling and installation shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's

written instructions and technical data particular to the product specified and/or accepted

equal except as otherwise specified. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Shop Drawings prepared by Manufacturer.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

3. Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for

efficient flow of the Work.

4. Install systems, materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,

including coordination Drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements





indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are indicated

only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual

system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

5. Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to

other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

6. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or replacement

of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of

disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

7. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment and materials installations with other building

components.

8. Conform to the National Electrical Contractors’ Association "Standard of Installation" for

general installation practice.

3.3 CUTTING, PATCHING, PAINTING AND SEALING

A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent

installations.

B. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components and materials

as indicated, including but not limited to removal of electrical items indicated to be removed

and items made obsolete by the new Work.

C. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled

to be removed.

D. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of

dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

E. Patch existing surfaces and building components using experienced installers and new

materials matching existing materials and the original installation. For installers'

qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building

components being patched.

F. Application of joint sealers:

1. General: Comply with joint sealer Manufacturers' printed application instructions

applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent

requirements apply.

2. Installation of fire-stopping sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing and other

accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and

walls, to provide fire-stops and fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly

in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by

testing and inspecting agency.


A. General testing requirements:

1. The purpose of testing is to ensure that all tested electrical equipment, both Contractor

and Owner supplied, is operational and within industry and Manufacturer’s tolerances

and is installed in accordance with design Specifications.

2. Perform tests in presence of the Owner's Representative and furnish test equipment,

facilities and technical personnel required to perform tests.





3. Tests shall be conducted during the construction period and at completion to determine

conformity with applicable codes and with these Specifications.

B. Testing safety and precautions:

1. Safety practices shall include the following requirements:

a. Applicable State and Local safety operating procedures.

b. OSHA.

c. NSC.

d. NFPA 70E.

2. All tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized and grounded except where

otherwise specifically required ungrounded by test procedure.

C. Notify Owner and Engineer one week in advance of any testing.

D. Any products which fail during the tests or are ruled unsatisfactory by the Owner's

Representative shall be replaced, repaired or corrected as prescribed by the Owner's

Representative at the expense of the Contractor. Tests shall be performed after repairs,

replacements or corrections until satisfactory performance is demonstrated.

E. Testing Agency shall maintain written record of tests and shall assemble and certify final test

report.

F. Include all test results in the maintenance manuals.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Prior to energizing of electrical equipment, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior

of enclosures from construction debris, scrap wire, etc. using Manufacturer's approved

methods and materials.

B. Upon completion of Project, prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean

both the interior and exterior of all electrical equipment per Manufacturers approved methods

and materials. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris.

C. Touch-up paint any marks, blemishes or other finish damage suffered during installation.

3.6 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Training: At the time of completion, a period of not less than 4 hours shall be allotted by the

Contractor for instruction of building operating and maintenance personnel in the use of all

systems. All personnel shall be instructed at one time, the Contractor making all necessary

arrangements with Manufacturer’s Representative. The equipment Manufacturer shall be

requested to provide product literature and application guides for the users' reference. Costs,

if any, for the above services shall be paid by the Contractor.

B. Special tools: Provide one of each tool required for proper operation and maintenance of the

equipment provided under this Section. All tools shall be delivered to the Owner at the

Project completion.

C. Keying: Provide two keys for each lock furnished under this Section and turn over to Owner.





GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 0526 - 1

SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work included: Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation

required for the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:

1. Electrical grounding and bonding.

2. Safety ground grid and/or mat.

B. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work


complete installation.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the latest edition of the following applicable Specifications and standards

except as otherwise indicated or specified:

1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

UL 467; Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

IEEE No. 142; Recommended Practice for Grounding of industrial and

Commercial Power Systems.

IEEE No. 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and

Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide grounding at handholes, vaults, and manholes as indicated on the plans.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical

Requirements, the following items:

1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all physical

and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed standards.

2. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the proposed

application.

3. Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions.


A. All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new, unused

and currently under production.

B. Only products and applications listed in this Section may be used on the Project unless

otherwise submitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





A. Products furnished by the following Manufacturers shall be acceptable if in compliance with

all features specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.

1. Ground Rods:

a. Weaver.

b. Erico "Cadweld" Products, Inc.

2. Ground Wells:

a. Christy Concrete Products, Inc.

b. Forni Corp.

3. Ground Bushings, Connectors, Jumpers and Bus:

a. O-Z/Gedney.

b. Thomas & Betts Corp.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.

2.2 GROUND CONDUCTORS

A. General purpose insulated:

1. UL approved and code sized copper conductor, with dual rated THHN/THWN insulation,

color identified green.

2.3 DRIVEN (GROUND) RODS

A. Copper clad steel, minimum 3/4-inch diameter by 8 feet long, unless otherwise noted.

2.4 GROUND WELL BOXES FOR GROUND RODS

A. Precast concrete box nominal 9" throat diameter x 14" deep with light duty concrete cover for

non-traffic areas or steel plate for traffic areas. Cover shall be embossed or engraved with

"GROUND ROD".

2.5 CONNECTIONS TO PIPE

A. For cable to pipe: UL and NEC/CEC approved bolted connection.

2.6 CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL, GROUND RODS OR SPLICES

A. Where required by the Drawings, grounding conductors shall be spliced together, connected

to ground rods or connected to structural steel using exothermic welds or high pressure

compression type connectors.

1. Exothermic welds shall be used for cable-to-cable and cable-to-ground rod and for cable

to structural steel surfaces. Exothermic weld kits shall be as manufactured by Cadweld

or equal. Each particular type of weld shall use a kit unique to that type of weld.

2. High-pressure compression type connectors shall be used for cable-to-cable and cable-to-

ground rod connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION





A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of grounding

system installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.

Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Provide grounding at handholes, vaults, and manholes as indicated on the plans.

B. Grounding electrodes:

1. Supplementary grounding electrode (ground ring, grid and driven rods): Provide, as

indicated on the Drawings, driven ground rod(s) installed in listed ground well box(s) and

filled with gravel after connection is made. Interconnect ground rod with structural steel

and adjacent rods with minimum #1/0 AWG bare copper conductor. Ground rod shall

not be less than 10 foot from any other electrode of another electrical system or from

adjacent ground rod(s).

C. Grounding electrode conductor: Provide grounding electrode conductor as indicated on the

Drawings or sized per NEC/CEC Article 250, whichever is greater.





CONDUIT 26 0531 - 1

SECTION 260531 – CONDUIT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Rigid steel conduit and fittings.

2. PVC insulated rigid steel conduit and fittings.

3. Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings.

4. Fabric innerduct cells.




1. Division 01: Cutting and patching.

1.2 REFERENCES



1. Federal Specifications (FS):

FS WW-C-566; Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit.

FS WW-C-581; Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit.

FS W-C-1094A; Conduit and Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid.

2. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI):

ANSI C80.1; Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated.


UL 6; Rigid Metal Conduit.

UL 360; Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.

UL 514B; Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings.

UL 635; Insulating Bushings.

UL 651; Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.

UL 797; Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel.

UL 1242; Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel.

4. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA):

NEMA RN1; PVC Externally coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit.

NEMA TC 2; Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit.




CONDUIT 26 0531 - 2

NEMA TC 3; PVC Fittings for use with Rigid PVC Conduit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


Requirements the following items:




application.

3. Submit Manufacturer's installation instruction. Provide written instructions for raceway

products requiring glues, special tools or specific installation techniques.





otherwise submitted and approved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Metal conduit:

a. Allied Tube and Conduit Co.

b. Triangle PWC, Inc.

c. Western Tube and Conduit Corp.

d. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

e. Occidental Coating Co. (OCAL).

f. Alflex Corp.

g. American Flexible Metal Conduit Co.

h. Anaconda.

2. Nonmetallic conduit:

a. Carlon.

b. PW Pipe.

3. Fittings:

a. Appleton Electric Co.

b. OZ/Gedney.

c. Thomas & Betts Corp.

d. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.




CONDUIT 26 0531 - 3

e. Occidental Coating Co. (OCAL).

f. Carlon.

4. Innerduct:

a. Maxcell

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.

2.2 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (GRS)

A. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL

6.

B. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings and elbows: Only materials of steel or

malleable iron are acceptable. Locknuts shall be bonding type with sharp edges for digging

into the metal wall of an enclosure.

C. Three piece couplings: Electroplated, cast malleable iron.

D. Insulating bushings: Threaded polypropylene or thermosetting phenolic rated 150 degree C

minimum.

E. Insulated grounding bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with insulated throat and

steel "lay-in" ground lug with compression screw.

F. Insulated metallic bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with plastic insulated throat

rated 150 degrees C.

G. All fittings and connectors shall be threaded.

2.3 PVC INSULATED GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (PVC GRS)

A. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and

NEMA RN-1 with nominal 20 or 40 mil thermoplastic vinyl coating, heat fused and bonded

to the exterior of the conduit.

B. Fittings: Conduit couplings and connectors shall be as specified for galvanized rigid steel

conduit and shall be factory PVC coated with an insulating jacket equivalent to that of the

coated material.

2.4 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (PVC)

A. Conduit:

1. Rigid polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 40 or 80 conforming to NEMA TC1 and UL 651,

latest edition. UL listed for exposed and direct-burial applications and for 90 degrees C

conductor insulation. Conduit shall include an integral bell fitting at one end.

2. Rigid polyvinyl chloride, Type EB or DB conforming to NEMA TC 6 and UL 651, latest

edition. UL listed for concrete encased burial and direct burial applications and for 90

degrees C conductor insulation. Conduit shall include an integral bell fitting at one end.

B. Fittings: Couplings, adaptors, transition fittings, etc., shall be molded PVC, slip on, solvent

weld type conforming to NEMA TC3 for Schedule 40 or 80 and NEMA TC 9 for type EB or

DB.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT FITTINGS AND PRODUCTS




CONDUIT 26 0531 - 4

A. Watertight conduit entrance seals: Steel or cast malleable iron bodies and pressure clamps

with PVC sleeve, neoprene sealing grommets and PVC coated steel pressure rings. Fittings

shall be supplied with neoprene sealing rings between the body and PVC sleeve.

B. Watertight cable sealing bushings: One piece, compression molded sealing ring with PVC

coated steel pressure disks, stainless steel sealing screws and zinc plated cast malleable iron

locking collar.

C. Expansion fittings: Multi-piece unit comprised of a hot dip galvanized malleable iron or steel

body and outside pressure bussing designed to allow a maximum of 4" conduit movement (2"

in either direction). Furnish with external braid tinned copper bonding jumper. Unit shall be

UL listed for wet or dry locations.

D. Expansion/deflection couplings: Multi-piece unit comprised of a neoprene sleeve with

internal flexible tinned copper braid attached to bronze end couplings with stainless steel

bands. Coupling shall accommodate .75-inch deflection, expansion or contraction in any

direction and allow 30-degree angular deflections. Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight,

moisture and heat resistant molded rubber jacket and stainless steel jacket clamps. Unit shall

comply with UL467 and UL514. Manufacturer shall be OZ/Gedney Type DX, Steel City

Type EDF or equal.

E. Fire rated penetration seals:

1. UL building materials directory classified.

2. Conduit penetrations in fire rated separation shall be sealed with a UL classified fill, void

or cavity material.

3. The fire rated sealant material shall be the product best suited for each type of penetration

and may be a caulk, putty, composite sheet or wrap/strip.

F. Standard products not herein specified:

1. Provide listing of standard electrical conduit hardware and fittings not herein specified

for approval prior to use or installation, i.e. locknuts, bushings, etc.

2. Listing shall include Manufacturers name, part numbers and a written description of the

item indicating type of material and construction.

3. Miscellaneous components shall be equal in quality, material and construction to similar

items herein specified.

2.6 FABRIC INNERDUCT AND MISC. PRODUCTS

A. Standard Outdoor Textile Innerduct: Micro (33mm), 2 inch and 3 inch multi-cell nylon

innerduct containing 1250 lb. polyester flat woven pull tape.

B. Textile Innerduct Fittings:

1. Conduit Plugs: Compression type conduit plugs with locking nuts for sealing and

securing one or more textile innerducts within a 4-inch diameter conduit, eg.:

a. 4 inch plug with nine holes for cables in a 3 pack (9 cell) configuration.

2. Termination Bags: Inflation type bags for sealing and securing around one or more textile

innerducts and cables within 2 inch outside diameter or larger conduit.

C. Pull Tape:




CONDUIT 26 0531 - 5

1. Pull Tape: measuring and pulling tape constructed of synthetic fiber, printed with

accurate sequential footage marks. Color-coded.

D. Penetration sealing materials:

Duct Water Seal: products suitable for closing underground and entrance conduit openings

where innerduct or cable is installed, to prevent entry of gases, liquids, or rodents into the

structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of conduit system

installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances. Do not

commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRS) shall be used in the following applications:

1. For feeders and branch circuits located indoors, concealed or exposed above suspended

ceilings, in damp/wet locations, in crawl spaces, in attics, chases, furred spaces,

equipment rooms, loading docks or in hazardous locations in accordance with NEC and

local Codes.

2. For feeders and branch circuits concealed in concrete floors and walls when not in

contact with earth.

B. PVC insulated galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used in the following applications:

1. Use 40-mil coating for feeders and branch circuits in damp or wet locations.

2. Use 20 or 40 mil for feeders and branch circuits concealed in concrete walls or slabs in

contact with earth.

3. Use 20 or 40-mil for runs beneath floor slabs on grade.

4. Use 40-mil for all below grade penetrations through floor slabs on grade or exterior

C. Fabric Innerduct: Shall be used in UG Conduit Installations. When installed in 4” conduit,

use three 3” 3-Cell packs.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Locations of conduit runs shall be planned in advance of the installation and coordinated with

existing conditions and work by other trades.

B. Provide all reasonably inferred standard conduits fitting and products required to complete

conduit installation to meet the intended application whether noted, indicated or specified in

the Contract Documents or not.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install conduit in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on

Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Install conduits in complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.

C. Install conduit free from dented, bruises or deformations. Remove and replace any damaged

conduits with new undamaged material.




CONDUIT 26 0531 - 6

D. Conduits shall be well protected and tightly covered during construction using metallic

bushings and bushing "pennies" to seal open ends.

E. In making joints in rigid steel conduit, ream conduit smooth after cutting and threading. Coat

all field-threaded joints with UL approved conductive type compound to ensure low

resistance ground continuity through conduit and to prevent seizing and corrosion.

F. Clean any conduit in which moisture or any foreign matter has collected before pulling in

conductors. Paint all field-threaded joints to prevent corrosion.

G. In all empty conduits or ducts, install a “True Tape” conduit measuring tape line to provide

overall conduit length for determining length of cables/conductors for future use.

H. Conduit systems shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout.

I. Metallic conduit shall not be in contact with other dissimilar metal pipes (i.e. plumbing).

J. Make bends with standard conduit bending hand tool or machines. The use of any item not

specifically designed for the bending of electrical conduit is strictly prohibited.

K. A run of conduit between terminations at wire pulling points shall not contain more than the

equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees, total).

L. Fabric Innerduct

1. Provide textile innerduct in conduit and wire ways, and place textile innerduct within

conduit using continuous unspliced lengths of textile innerduct between maintenance

holes, pull boxes, and/or termination points as indicated on the drawings.

2. Make a 2" incision, approximately 18" from the end of textile innerduct. Pull out and cut

off approximately 2 feet of pull-tape. Thus allowing the pull tape ends to retract back into

the cells.

3. Using approximately 6 feet of pull tape, tie a non-slip knot to the incision. Then tie 3 to 6

half-hitch knots down to the end of textile innerduct. Apply black vinyl tape over all

knots and the end of textile innerduct. Using a Bow Line knot tie a swivel to the end of 3

feet pull tape. For multi-pack installations one swivel is sufficient, but stagger each

textile innerduct.

4. Using a Bow Line knot, attach the pull rope located in the rigid conduit to the other end

of the swivel. Install textile innerduct – ensuring that no twist is introduced to the

innerduct.

5. Provide suitable textile innerduct slack in the maintenance holes, hand holes, pull boxes,

and at turns to ensure there is no kinking or binding of the product.

6. Textile Innerduct Mountings, Hangers and Attachments: When exposed indoors or in

maintenance holes, hold firmly in place using independent support.

a. Design & install hangers and other similar fittings adequate to support loads and so

as to not damage innerduct.

b. Do not fasten textile innerduct to steam, water, or other piping, ductwork, mechanical

equipment, electrical equipment, electrical raceways, or wires

c. When appropriate, use the following cable ties to secure textile innerduct through

previously created incisions:

1) Plenum areas: plenum-rated plastic or stainless steel




CONDUIT 26 0531 - 7

2) Non plenum areas: Conventional flame-retardant nylon ties

3) Underground locations : Conventional plastic cable ties

7. Maintenance Hole and Hand Hole Installation:

a. At locations where textile innerduct will be continuous through a manhole or hand

hole, allow sufficient slack so that the innerduct may be secured to the side of the

vault maintaining the minimum bend radius.

8. At maintenance holes serving as the junction location, pull the exposed end of the

innerduct to the far end of the vault, install termination bag, and secure to the vault.

M. Cutting or holes:

1. Cut holes through concrete, masonry block or brick floors and floors of structure with a

diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual

hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Structural Engineer as

required by limited working space. Obtain the approval of the Structural Engineer prior

to drilling through structural sections.

2. Provide sleeves or “can outs” for cast-in-place concrete floors and walls. Following

conduit installation, seal all penetrations using non-iron bearing, chloride free, non-

shrinking, dry-pack grouting compounds; or fire rated penetration-sealing materials.

3. Cut holes for conduit penetrations through non-concrete and non-masonry walls,

partitions or floors with a hole saw. The hole shall be only as large as required to

accommodate the size of the conduit.

4. Provide single piece escutcheon plates around all exposed conduit penetrations in public

places.

N. Sealing:

1. Non-rated penetrations: Pack opening around conduits with non-flammable insulating

material and seal with gypsum wallboard taping compound.

2. Fire stop: Where conduits, wireways and other electrical raceways pass through fire

rated partitions, walls, smoke partitions or floor; install a UL classified fire stop material

to provide an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases. Completely

fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material.

O. Fabric Innerduct:

1. Seal all conduit and textile innerduct entering structures at the first box or outlet to

prevent entrance into the structure of gases, liquids or rodents.

2. Inspect fire stopping installation by others between building structure and conduit, wire

way, and cable tray to verify integrity of installation.

3. Exposed Textile Innerduct Penetrations: Install conduit sleeves or fire barrier sealing

systems in all openings where open and exposed textile innerduct passes through fire-

rated walls and floors. After installation, install intumescent fire barrier penetration

sealing material (Hilti system) between textile innerduct and sleeves or fire barrier

system.

4. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during water seal or fire stop installation. Repair

any damage.




CONDUIT 26 0531 - 8

5. Document entire installation process for future referral.

3.5 TERMINATIONS AND JOINTS

A. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for

the use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings

except as otherwise indicated.

B. Stub-up connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding

equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the

finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal

conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made

under this contract, install screwdriver operated threaded flush plugs with floor.

C. Install specified cable sealing bushings on all conduits originating outside the building walls

and terminating in switchgear, cabinets or gutters inside the building. Install cable sealing

bushings or raceway seal for conduit terminations in all grade level or below grade exterior

pull, junction or outlet boxes.





UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND STRUCTURES 26 0543 - 1

SECTION 260543 – UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Underground conduits and ducts.

2. Duct banks.

3. Handhole and pullboxes.

4. Excavation, trenching and backfill.




1. Division 31 - Earthwork: General requirements for Excavation and Backfill and related

items for ducts, manholes, pullboxes and handholes.

1.2 REFERENCES



1. Federal Specifications (FS):

FS RR-F-621E; Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin,

Manhole.

FS SS-S-210A; Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic for Expansion Joints and

Pipe Joints.

FS WW-C-581; Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit.

FS W-C-1094A; Conduit and Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid.

2. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI):

ANSI C80.1; Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated.


UL 6; Rigid Metal Conduit.

UL 651; Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.

4. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA):

NEMA RN1; PVC Externally-coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit.

NEMA TC 2; Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit.

NEMA TC 3; PVC Fittings for use with Rigid PVC Conduit.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Duct: Electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, used underground

embedded in earth or concrete.





B. Duct bank: Two or more conduits or other raceway installed underground in same trench or

concrete envelope.

C. Handhole: An underground junction box in a duct or duct bank.

D. Manhole: An underground utility structure, large enough for a person to enter, connecting

with ducts to afford facilities for installing and maintaining cables.

E. Vault: An underground utility structure, large enough for a person to enter, connecting with

ducts to afford facilities for installing, operating and maintaining equipment and wiring.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


Requirements, the following items:




application.

3. Shop Drawings showing details and design calculations for precast manholes and

handholes, including reinforced steel.

4. Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions.

5. Complete bill of material listing all components.





otherwise submitted and approved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Underground precast concrete utility structures:

a. Christy Concrete Products, Inc.

b. Brooks Products, Inc.

c. Forni Corp.

d. Utility Vault Co.

e. Wausau Concrete Co.

2. Conduits, ducts and fittings:

a. Carlon Electrical Products.

b. Occidental Coating Company (OCAL).

c. PW Pipe Company.





B. Substitution: Under provisions of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.

2.2 CONDUIT AND DUCT

A. Refer to 260531: Conduit.

B. PVC insulated galvanized rigid steel conduit (PVC GRS):

1. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and

NEMA RN-1 with nominal 20 or 40 mil thermoplastic vinyl coating, heat fused and

bonded to the exterior of the conduit.

2. Fittings: Conduit couplings and connectors shall be steel or malleable iron as required

with factory PVC coating and insulated jacket equivalent to that of the coated material.

C. Rigid non-metallic conduit (PVC):

1. Conduit:

a. Rigid polyvinylchloride, schedule 40 or 80 conforming to NEMA TC2 and UL 651.

UL listed for exposed and direct-burial applications and for 90 degrees C conductor

insulation. Conduit shall include an integral bell fitting at one end.

b. Rigid polyvinylchloride, type EB or DB conforming to NEMA TC 6 and UL 651.

UL listed for concrete encased burial and direct burial applications and for 90 degree

C conductor insulation. Conduit shall include an integral bell fitting at one end.

2. Fittings: Couplings, adaptors, transition fittings, bell ends, etc., shall be molded PVC,

slip on and solvent weld type. Schedule 40 or 80 conforming to NEMA TC 3.

3. Factory elbows: Minimum radius bends shall be 60 inches.

D. Duct supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacing and concrete

cover depths, while supporting ducts during concrete pour.

E. Duct sealing compound: Non-hardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to

cable insulation, workable at temperatures as low as 35 degree F, withstands temperature of

300 degrees F without slump and adheres to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits,

conduit coatings, concrete, cable sheaths and jackets, etc.

2.3 PULLBOXES AND HANDHOLES

A. Construction: High densities precast reinforced concrete box, extension, base and cover.

Furnish box with end and side knockouts and non-settling shoulders. Cover shall have hold-

down bolts and two lifting eyes.

B. Size: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Cover markings: Covers shall read "ELECTRICAL" or "SIGNAL" as appropriate.

D. Rated covers: Use cast iron lid with H20 traffic rating when subject to vehicular traffic.

2.4 MANHOLES AND VAULTS

A. Precast concrete: Concrete mix and reinforcing placement shall be in accordance with ACI

318. Design tops and wall structures for AASHTO H20 highway loading, with 30 percent

loading added for impact. Walls shall withstand all soil pressures, taking into consideration

the soil encountered and ground water level present at the Project site. Assume ground water

level three feet below ground surface unless a higher water table is indicated in soils report.

B. Construction:





1. Monolithic or modular assembled sections.

2. Assembled sections shall have mating edges with tongue and groove joints. Joints shall

firmly interlock adjoining components and provide waterproof junctions. Seal joints

watertight using preformed plastic strip conforming to FS SS-S-210.

3. Provide lifting devices cast into units for proper handling of units.

4. Identify all structures with Manufacturer's name embedded in or otherwise permanently

attached to an interior wall face.

5. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

C. Size and dimensions: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Accessories:

1. Frames and covers: Cast iron with cast-in legend "ELECTRIC" or "SIGNAL" as

appropriate. Machine cover-to-frame bearing surfaces.

2. Sump frame and grate: Comply with FS RR-F-621, Type VII for frame and Type I for

cover.

3. Pulling eyes in walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing bar fastening insert. 2-inch diameter eye,

1-inch by 4-inch bolt. Working load embedded in 6-inch, 4000-PSI concrete: 13,000

pounds minimum tension.

4. Pulling and lifting irons in floor: 7/8-inch diameter, hot-dipped galvanized, bent steel

rod, stress relieved after forming and fastened to reinforced rod. Exposed triangular

opening. Ultimate yield strength: 40,000 pounds shear and 60,000 pounds tension.

5. Bolting inserts for cable stanchions: Flared, threaded inserts of non-corrosive, chemical

resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2-inch internal diameter by 2-3/4 inch

deep, flared to 1-1/4 inch minimum at base. Tested ultimate pull-out strength: 12,000

pounds minimum.

6. Expansion anchors for installation after concrete is cast: Zinc-plated carbon steel wedge

type with stainless-steel expander cup 1/2-inch bolt size, 5,300 pound rated pull-out

strength and 6800 pound rated shear strength minimum.

7. Cable stanchions: Hot-rolled, hot-dipped, galvanized "T" section steel, 2 - 1/4 inches

size, punched with 14 holes on 1-1/2 inch centers for cable arm attachment.

8. Cable arms: 3/16-inch thick hot-rolled, hot-dipped galvanized sheet steel pressed to

channel shape, approximately two 12-inches wide by 14-inches long and arranged for

secure mounting in horizontal position at any position on cable stanchions.

9. Cable support insulators: High glaze, wet-process porcelain arranged for mounting on

cable arms.

10. Ground rods: Solid copper, 3/4-inch diameter by 10-feet length.

11. Ground wire: Stranded bare copper conductor, #6 AWG.

12. Steps: Cast iron, suitable for shape and construction.

2.5 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

A. Mortar: Conform to ASTM C270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 Cu. Ft., where

packaged mix complying with ASTM C387, Type M may be used.





B. Concrete: Conform to Division 03: Cast-in-place concrete for concrete and reinforcing.

1. Strength: 3,000-PSI minimum 28-day compressive strength.

2. Aggregate for duct encasement: 3/8-inch maximum size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of duct and

manhole installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.

Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and backfill: Conform to Division 31, Earthwork.

B. Underground Utility Surveys: Prior to commencing any underground work, the Contractor

shall perform independent surveys of the existing underground utilities and infrastructure in

all areas of anticipated underground electrical work.

C. Excavation for underground electrical structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions

indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit

placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation or services, other construction and for

inspection.

1. Excavate, by hand, areas within drip-line of large trees. Protect the root system for

damage and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and over exposed roots

with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1 inch in diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree

paint.

2. Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just

before concrete reinforcement is placed.

D. Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installation as follows:

1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room

and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearances on both sides of raceways and equipment.

2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required.

3. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a

layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceways and equipment. Provide

a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and

electrical installations.

E. Backfilling and filling: Place soil materials in layers to required sub-grade elevations for

each area classification, using materials and methods specified in Division 31: Earthwork.

1. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials.

3.3 CONDUIT AND DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Install duct lines in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on the


B. Application:

1. Direct burial ducts: Schedule 40, minimum 24-inches below finished grade.





2. Penetrations of building and equipment slabs: Schedule 40.

3. Provide rigid PVC spacers shall securely support and maintain uniform spacing of the

duct assembly a minimum of 3-inches above bottom of trench during backfill. Spacer

spacing shall not exceed 5-feet.

C. Underground conduit stub-ups to inside of building and exterior equipment shall be PVC

insulated rigid steel.

D. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight according to Manufacturer's instructions. Stagger

couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in the same plane.

E. Terminate duct lines at manholes and handholes with end bells. Grout end bells into manhole

walls from both sides to provide watertight entrance.

F. Separation between direct buried duct lines shall be 3-inches minimum for like systems and

inches minimum between power and signal ducts.

G. For direct burial installations install continuous warning strip of heavy gage plastic imprinted

"electrical ducts below", approximately 12-inch wide at 12-inches above ducts.

H. Mandrel all ducts upon completion of installation and prior to pulling cables.

3.4 HANDHOLE AND PULL BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install handholes in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on


B. Handholes shall be installed flush with finished grade or surface. Install on a level 12-inch

bed of well-tamped gravel or crushed stone.

C. Orientation of handholes shall be coordinated in advance with Civil and arranged to minimize

connecting duct bends and deflections.

3.5 MANHOLE AND VAULT INSTALLATION

A. Install precast assembly in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated

on Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Install cast iron frame and cover. Set frames in paved areas and traffic ways flush with

finished grade. Set other frames 1-inch above finished grade.

C. Units shall be installed on a level 18-inch bed of well-tamped gravel or crushed stone.

D. Install drains in bottom of units where indicated.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms and

insulators, as required for installation and support of cable and conductors and as indicated.

F. Provide cable rack support as indicated and required. Support intervals shall not exceed 36-

inches. Each rack shall include cable support insulators.

G. Drive ground rod into earth, through the floor sleeve, after manhole is set in place. Fill the

sleeve with a sealant to make a watertight seal.

H. Install ground wire around the inside perimeter of manhole and anchor to wall. Connect the

wire to the ground rod by exothermic welding process to form solid metal joint. Bond the

ground wire to the exposed non-current carrying metal parts of racks and like items in the

manhole.





I. Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum

of 2 anchors for each cable stanchion.


A. Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements upon completion of

installation of underground duct and structures.

1. Duct integrity: Rod ducts with a mandrel 1/4-inch smaller in diameter than internal

diameter of ducts. Where rodding indicates obstructions in ducts, remove the

obstructions and retest.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Pull brush through full length of ducts. Use round bristle brush with a diameter 1/2-inch

greater than internal diameter of duct.

B. Clean internal surfaces of handholes and manholes including sump. Remove foreign

material.



SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLITION 31 1000 - 1

SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING AND DEMOLTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants and grass to remain. 2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants and grass. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other non-soil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B. Record drawings, according to Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.



1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

C. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TREE PROTECTION

A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected

and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or

other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.



D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of

proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by

Architect.

3.3 UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner

where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18

inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and non-soil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots,

and other waste materials.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length

of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.



3.7 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable

materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.



DEWATERING 31 1100 - 1

SECTION 31 1100 - DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes construction dewatering.


A. Dewatering Performance: Furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flow into excavations and permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and

constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented.

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation. 4. Remove dewatering system if no longer needed.


A. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls.

B. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required.


DEWATERING 31 1100 - 2

C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade

softening, and slope instability.

D. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner.

F. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.



EARTHWORK 31 2000 - 1

SECTION 31 2000 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements and landscaping. 2. Base course for concrete pavements. 3. Base course for asphalt paving. 4. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 5. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical utilities and pits for buried

utility structures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to

support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course or subgrade and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

I. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:



1. Each type of plastic warning tape.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material

proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each each on-site and

borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 3. Samples and Laboratory test data certifying that aggregate base and subbase utilizing

recycled asphalt and aggregate material meets all quality requirements of Section 26 of Caltrans Standard Specifications.

C. Pre-excavation and Excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. Show open trenches with piping installed at significant utility and road crossings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Base Course: Class 2 aggregate base R=78 per Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 26. May include recycled pavement materials.

D. Engineered Fill: Onsite or imported material as defined in geotechnical report.

E. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems.



5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in "Site Clearing."

3.2 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 6 inches each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.

3.4 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Owner when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Owner determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Owner, without additional compensation.



3.5 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Owner. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by

Owner.

3.6 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

3.7 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

B. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both

sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

C. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.

D. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

E. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.8 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use engineered fill.



3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.9 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.10 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12

inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each

layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and

compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material to 90 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 90

percent.

3.11 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.



2. Walks: Plus or minus Plus or minus 0.10 foot. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus ½ inch.

3.12 BASE COURSES

A. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Place base course material over subgrade under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Shape base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 3. Place base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 4. Place base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal

thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 5. Compact base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross

sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1557, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill

layer, at least 1 test for every 4000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.

2. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 300 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.14 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner; reshape and

recompact.



C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.



ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216 - 1

SECTION 32 1216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay. 4. Asphalt surface treatments. 5. Pavement-marking paint.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Type B Asphalt Concrete: Caltrans Standard Specifications, ½ maximum, medium

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work.

C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

E. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by manufacturers.

F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Caltrans Standard Specifications, and as modified herein.


A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.



B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 50 deg F. 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of

placement. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 50 deg F at time of placement.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 50 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, or crushed gravel.

B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, or combinations thereof. 1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total

aggregate mass.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO MP 1.

B. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt.

C. Water: Potable.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

B. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 3405, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant.

C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type N. 1. Color: As indicated.



D. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction and complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where

Project is located. 2. Base Course: Class 2 Aggregate Base or as indicated. 3. Surface Course: Type B, maximum, medium.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not

dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials. 1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.



3.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 3. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of

one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to

overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive

displacement. 4. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.6 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:



1. Average Density: 95 percent of reference laboratory density according to AASHTO T 245.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch 2. Surface Course: 3/16 inch, 1/8 inch for accessible paths of travel

3.8 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

B. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

C. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.



1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

E. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.10 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.



CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 32 1313-1

SECTION 32 1313 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following. 1. Concrete Paving - Pedestrian and Vehicular. 2. Curbs and gutters.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The term “Standard Specifications” refers to the Standard Specifications of the State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation (CALTRANS), 2006 edition. In case of conflict between the Standard Specifications and these specifications, these specifications shall govern. 1. Any provisions for measurement and payment specified within the Standard

Specifications shall be disregarded and the provisions of this contract shall govern.

B. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO) specifications.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): ASTM A185 – Welded Steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement.

D. ASTM D1751: Performed expansion joint fillers for concrete paving and structural construction.

E. ASTM A615: Deformed and plain billet-steel for concrete reinforcement.

F. ASTM C2600: Air entraining admixtures for concrete.

G. ASTM C309: Liquid membrane forming compounds for curing concrete.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated, including reinforcement and forming accessories, color admixtures, expansion joint systems, noncolor and color curing agent, form release agent, and other, if requested by Owner.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Included alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Samples 1. Expansion Joint Filler Material: Submit one 12 inch length.



D. Laboratory test reports for evaluation of concrete materials and mix design tests.

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements. 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement, keyways and reinforcement accessories. 3. Admixtures. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Bonding agent or adhesive. 6. Joint fillers.

F. Maintenance Data: Shall clearly describe type of cleaner and cleaning methods required to maintain completed concrete pavement.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete

Association’s Plant Certifications Program.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Wood, plywood, metal-framed plywood, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100 feet or less radius.

B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM 615, grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497. 1. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls.



D. Fabricated Bar Mats: Welded or clip-assembled steel bar mats, ASTM A 184. Use ASTM A 65, grade 60 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, grade 60. Cut bars true to length with endssquare and free of burrs.

F. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.

G. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute specifications. 1. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support

chair legs.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project.

B. Materials: 1. Shall conform to the provisions of Section 90 of the Standard Specifications.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.

B. Form Release Agent: Non-staining material.

C. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494, colored and water-reducing and/or retarding compatible, Type A or Type D, as required.

D. Curing Compounds for Concrete Paving: Clear, ASTM C 309, non- staining.

2.5 CONCRETE MIX

A. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method.

B. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties. 1. Pedestrian Concrete Paving, curbs, and gutters.

a. Class 3 concrete as defined by the Standard Specifications. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 pounds per square inch.

b. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.65. c. Slump Limit: 4 inches.



2. Vehicular Concrete Paving a. Class 2 concrete as defined by the Standard Specifications. Compressive Strength

(28 Days): 4000 pounds per square inch. b. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.65. c. Slump Limit: 4 inches.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116. 1. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and

delivery time for 1.5 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI’s “Placing Reinforcing Bars” for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least 1 full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2 inch overlap to adjacent mats.

F. Expansion Joint Dowel Bars: spaced horizontally a minimum of 24-inches on-center center in slab and parallel to edge of paving and each other. Dowels are to be no more than 6-inches from the edge of pavement.



3.3 JOINTS

A. General: Construct construction, expansion joints and sawn score joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise. 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed

joints, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving, back of curbs and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than 0.5 hour, unless paving terminates at expansion joints. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise. Do not

continue reinforcement through sides of strip paving adjacent to curbs unless indicated. 2. Use epoxy bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened

or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints of pre-formed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs, retaining and freestanding walls, ramps, stairs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, building walls, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Locate expansion joints in pavement as detailed in the Drawings. 2. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at all expansion joints. Lubricate one-half of

dowel length with heavy grease. 3. Locate expansion joints in curbs, curbs and gutters and concrete bands 25 feet on center

to align with expansion joints in adjacent concrete paving, and in no case more than 40 feet on center.

4. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 5. Terminate joint filler not less than 0.5 inch below finished surface where joint sealant is

indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface when no joint sealant is indicated.

6. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece. Where more than 1 length is required, lace or clip joint- filler sections together.

7. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other temporary pre-formed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Sawn Joints: construct after the concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not be damaged by the sawing, but before shrinkage cracking can occur. The initial saw cut should be 0.125 inch to 0.188- inch in width. 1. At building walls, site walls, sign bases, and curbs, finish sawn cut with hand-held

grinder or equal to extend cut or joint to face of vertical surface.

E. Score Joints: Form weakened-plane score joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct score joints for a depth equal to at least a quarter of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Locate score joints in pavement as detailed. 2. Locate score joints in curbs, curbs and gutters and concrete bands every 5-feet and align

with score joints in adjacent concrete paving and in no case more than 10 feet on center.



3. Tool score joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of score joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. a. Radius: 0.25 inch.

F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 0.5 inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

C. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

D. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations or spreading dry shake surface treatments.

E. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

F. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is prohibited.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Paving: medium textured broom finish. Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished

concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.



2. Bands: smooth formboard with smooth trowel surface. After concrete has adequately cured strip formwork and apply smooth trowel texture on the top and exposed faces of the curb and band.

3.6 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Protect surrounding areas, landscaping, and adjacent horizontal and vertical surfaces.

3.7 CURING

A. As soon as concrete has set sufficiently so that it can be walked on gently without moving, surface moisture has evaporated, and no condensation can occur, apply the curing compound for colored cement concrete two-part system per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Apply curing compound for non-colored cement concrete per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows. 1. Elevation: 0.125 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 0.75 inch, minus 0.25 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10 feet long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 0.25 inch, or

0.125 inch for accessible paths of travel. 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. Testing Agency: The Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Section.

B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with

ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; 1 test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test but

no less than 1 test for each day’s pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; 1 test for each compressive-strength test but no less than 1 test for each day’s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; 1 test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below and when 80 degrees F and above, and 1 test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.



5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; 1 set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless directed otherwise. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; 1 set for each day’s pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus 1 set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test 1 specimen at 7 days, test 2 specimens at 28 days, and retain 1 specimen in reserve for later testing if required.

C. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. 1. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

2. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of 3 consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 pounds per square inch.

D. Test results will be reported in writing to Contractor within 24 hours of testing. 1. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the following.

a. Project identification name and number. b. Date of concrete placement. c. Name of concrete testing agency. d. Concrete type and class. e. Location of concrete batch in paving. f. Design compressive strength at 28 days. g. Concrete mix proportions and materials. h. Compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

F. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed by Owner.

3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the requirements of this Section.

B. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.





VALVES 33 1216-1

SECTION 33 1216 –VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Hydronic distribution valves and appurtenances outside of buildings.

B. Water valves and appurtenances

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 33 6113 Underground Hydronic Piping

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings

C. ASTM A276 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes

D. ASTM A536 - Ductile Iron Castings

E. ASTM B148 - Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings

F. ASTM B61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

G. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings – (Reinstated)

H. American Water Works Association (AWWA) C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

I. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service

J. AWWA C550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

K. AWWA C800 - Underground Service Line Valves and Fitting.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1 for submittal procedures.


VALVES 33 1216-2

B. Product Data: Provide data acknowledging that products meet requirements of standards referenced.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Project Record Documents: 1. Record location of valves and invert elevations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GATE VALVES

A. Buried valves shown on the plans shall be gate valves.

B. Valves of the same size and service shall be provided by a single valve manufacturer. Packing shall be non-asbestos material. Actual length of valves shall be within 1/16 inch (plus or minus) of the manufacturer's specified length.

C. Gate Valves 2 inch through 12 inch: 1. Valves shall be resilient seated gate valve. Valves greater than 4 inches shall comply

with AWWA C509. 2. Valves shall open by turning the stem counterclockwise. Buried valves shall be non-

rising type with O-ring seal equipped with 2 inch square operating nut, and shall be bituminous coated. Buried valves shall have stem extensions to place operating nut within 6 inch of top of valve box. End connections shall be flanged ends or mechanical joint as required for the type of pipe used. Working pressure shall be 250 psi.

3. Above-ground Gate Valves shall be rising stem, OS&Y, solid wedge disc type, Class 350, rated for a working pressure of 200 psi W.O.G. minimum at a temperature of 150° F. Ends shall be flanged. Valves shall be provided with handwheels. Valves shall open counter-clockwise.

4. Flanges shall meet the requirement of ASME B16.5. Mechanical joints shall meet the requirements of AWWA C111.

5. Valve materials shall be as follows: a. Body and Bonnet: Cast or ductile iron, ASTM A126, Class B or C b. Wedge: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B c. Resilient seal: Buna N d. Stem: Stainless Steel AISI 420 e. Stem Nut: Brass f. Fasteners and hardware: Type 304 stainless steel

6. Buried gate valves 2 inches through 12 inches shall be American Flow Control Series 2500, Mueller 2360 Series, or equal.

7. Above-ground gate valves shall be Crane No. 428, Stockham Fig. B100, or equal.

D. Manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be marked on valve body.


VALVES 33 1216-3

E. Gate valve interior and exterior body and bonnet shall be fusion bond epoxy coated per requirements of AWWA C550.

2.2 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes shall be precast concrete with cast iron traffic covers. Traffic box shall be circular with the word ‘W’, ‘CHW’ or ‘HW’ embossed on the top surface of the lid.

B. Valve boxes shall be Christy G-5, Brooks, or equal.

C. An identification number shall be welded onto the valve box rim with 1-inch high text.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Valve installation shall be in accordance with details. Set valves on solid bearing.

B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.

C. Valves shall be installed in the closed position.

3.2 TESTING

A. Valves shall be tested according to manufacturer’s instructions and according to system testing requirements of Section 33 6113 Underground Hydronic Piping.



UNDERGROUND HYDRONIC PIPING 33 6113 - 1

SECTION 33 6113 - UNDERGROUND HYDRONIC DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Steel pipes and fittings. 2. Cased piping system.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing hydronic piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings: 1. Hot-Water Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F. 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 150 psig at 100 deg F.


A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Cased piping system.

B. Shop Drawings provided by the manufacturer for underground hydronic piping layout, signed and sealed by a professional engineer. 1. Calculate requirements for expansion compensation for underground piping. 2. Provide dimensional drawings showing expansion compensators, offsets, and loops with

appropriate materials to allow piping movement in the required locations. Show anchors and guides that restrain piping movement with calculated loads, and show concrete thrust block dimensions.

3. Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show piping in trench and cased pipe with details showing clearances between piping, and show insulation thickness.

4. Expansion loops and elbows shall be properly designed in accordance with stress limits indicated by ANSI B31.1 Code for Pressure Piping.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Test Reports: For cased piping.

D. Field quality-control reports.



1.5 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD INSTALLATION INSTRUCTOR

A. To assure proper installation of the piping materials, a manfacturer’s field service instructor who is technically qualified to determine whether or not the installation is being made in accordance with their recommendations shall be present during critical periods of the materials installation and testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Application" Article.

B. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

C. Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

D. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8” maximum thickness unless thickness

or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and -bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

E. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 CASED PIPING SYSTEM

A. Description: Factory-fabricated piping with carrier pipe, insulation, and casing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Ricwil/Perma-Pipe, Inc. b. Thermacor Process, L.P.

B. Carrier Pipe: Schedule 40, steel pipe and fittings.

C. Carrier Pipe Insulation: 1. Polyurethane Foam Pipe Insulation: Rigid, cellular, high-pressure injected between

carrier pipe and jacket. a. Comply with ASTM C 591; thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.14

Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.020 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) after 180 days of aging.

D. Casing:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3762&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456812286&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456812288&mf=04&src=wd



1. Filament wound, polyester resin/fiberglass reinforcement composity (FRP) having a flexural strength of 25,000 psi; a compressive strength of 60,000 psi; a tensile strength of 20,000 psi, and a heat distortion temperature of 250 degF.

E. Casing accessories include the following: 1. Joint Kit: Half-shell, pourable or split insulation, casing sleeve, and shrink-wrap sleeve. 2. Expansion Blanket: Elastomeric foam, formed to fit over piping. 3. End Seals: Shrink wrap the casing material to seal watertight around casing and carrier

pipe.

2.3 PREFABRICATED INSULATION

A. The service pipe insulation shall be polyurethane foam with 2 lb/ft³ minimum density, 90% minimum close cell content and maximum initial thermal conductivity of 0.18 Btu-in/hr-ft²-°F. The insulation shall completely fill the annular space between the service pipe and jacket and shall be bonded to both. System using open cell insulation or a non-bonded design will not be allowed. The insulation shall be provided to the minimum thickness specified in chart ‘A’.

CHART ‘A’ - Minimum Insulation Thickness (inches)

Pipe Size

Chilled Water Pipe In-sulation Thickness

Hot Water Pipe Insulation Thickness

1” to 8” 1” 1” 10” to 12” 1” 1.5”

B. The polyurethane foam insulation shall be tested by the piping system manufacturer for mechanical and thermal properties to assure compliance with the values shown in chart ‘B’. All test samples will be taken from production material, identified, tagged and tested in accordance with the table below. Test reports showing results will be furnished to the engineer for approval. Data supplied by the polyurethane foam chemical supplier is not acceptable. CHART ‘B’ – Polyurethane Foam



Attribute ASTM STD Sample Frequency Requirement

Insulation Density

D1622 Once per day > 2.0 lbs/ft³

Insulation Compression Strength

D1621 Once per day > 40 psi

2.4 FIELD APPLIED INSULATION

A. Field applied pipe insulation shall be a non-combustible, closed-cell, cellular glass insulating material, Foamglas by Pittsburgh Corning, or equal.

B. Jacketing of field applied insulation shall be Pittwrap jacketing, or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. See Section 31 2000 "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATION

A. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 1. NPS 2 and larger shall be of the following:

a. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

b. Insulation: Polyurethane foam. 2. Cased piping with polyurethane carrier-pipe insulation.

a. Piping Insulation Thickness: See Chart A under paragraph 2.3. 3. Casing shall be FRP.

B. Chilled-Water Piping: 1. NPS 2 and larger shall be of the following:

a. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

b. Insulation: Polyurethane foam. 2. Cased piping with polyurethane carrier-pipe insulation.

a. Piping Insulation Thickness: See Chart A under paragraph 2.3. 3. Casing shall be FRP.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.



B. Remove standing water in the bottom of trench.

C. Do not backfill piping trench until field quality-control testing has been completed and results approved.

D. Install piping at minimum grade of 0.2 percent. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points and elsewhere as required for system drainage. Install manual air vents at high points.

E. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Secure anchors with concrete thrust blocks.

3.4 EXPANSION LOOPS AND ELBOWS

A. Prefabricated expansion loops, elbows and tees shall be furnished and installed at all fitting locations shown on the contract drawings or at locations determined by the pipe manufacturer. All preinsulated fittings that must provide compensation for pipe expansion and/or contraction shall be installed in a suitably sized jacket and insulated with flexible polyurethane foam insulation. The straight units adjoining expansion fittings shall also be insulated with flexible polyurethane foam insulation to compensate for lateral pipe movement.

3.5 ANCHORS

A. Prefabricated plate anchors shall be furnished and installed where shown on the construction drawings and shall consist of a steel plate welded to the carrier pipe and sealed to the outer jacket. The steel plate shall be a minimum of ½” thick with an outside diameter 2” greater than that of the outer jacket.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.


C. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.7 FIELD JOINTS



A. Field joints between factory prefabricated pipe units shall be made in the following manner: 1. Connect the carrier pipe and hydrostatically test as required. 2. Center the mold over the joint area and hold in position with fiberglass tape, mix

polyurethane foam insulation compounds and pour into the aluminum mold according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer. Remove mold and visually inspect insulation for any voids prior to application of shrink sleeve.

3. Trim cured polyurethane foam flush with jacket. Center a heat activated shrink blanket over the jacket sleeve and jackets of adjoining units to provide double layer protection. Using a soft orange flame from a propane torch, work flame from center toward one end moving rapidly back and forth and around shrink blanket. All air pockets must be removed and worked out from under the shrink blanket to insure a water tight seal.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tapes during back filling of trenches for underground hydronic piping. Locate tapes 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly over piping. See Section 312000 "Earthwork" for warning-tape materials and devices and their installation.

3.9 SPARE PARTS

A. The Contractor shall provide the following spare parts for this contract: 1. 10-inch Piping – eight (8) 45 degree fittings 2. 8-inch Piping – eight (8) 45 degree fittings 3. 6-inch piping - eight (8) 45 degree fittings

B. Spare parts shall be available during construction. Should the fittings be required during the construction do to unforeseen circumstances, the Owner shall make parts available for Contractor’s use in construction.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Prepare hydronic piping for testing according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

a. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

b. Fill system with water. Where there is risk of freezing, air or a safe, compatible liquid may be used.

c. Use vents installed at high points to release trapped air while filling system.



2. Test hydronic piping as follows: a. Subject hydronic piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times

the design pressure. b. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for 10 minutes, examine joints for

leakage. Remake leaking joints using new materials and repeat hydrostatic test until no leaks exist.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
